Operating instructions | Epson 4056 Printer User Manual

4100
PRINTER
OPERATOR'S GUIDE
Part No: 066-00428-02
February 12, 1998 — Rev. F
ii
Contents
Operator's Guide
iii
Copyright © 2000, Output Technology Corporation
All rights reserved under the Berne Convention.
TRADEMARKS
DEC LA210 is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Epson is a registered trademark of Epson America, Inc.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Corporation.
IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Lotus is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Smart Cable is a registered trademark of I.Q. Technology.
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
WordPerfect is a registered trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.
Output Technology Corporation
2310 North Fancher Road
Spokane, WA 99212-1381
USA
We suggest you use authorized service centers. Contact us at :
Voice: (509) 536-046 8 — Fax: (509) 533-1280
For service, please have your printer model and serial numbers handy—these are located
on the back of the printer.
Output Technology maintains a Bulletin Board System (BBS) service. In the U.S.A., call
(509) 533-1217 to access our BBS service for the very latest drivers, firmware, pricing,
maintenance and troubleshooting aids, and application information. Also, you can contact
us at :
FTP:
ftp.output.com/public/output
WWW:
http://www.output.com
iv
Contents
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DANGER: KEEP HAIR, HANDS, AND CLOTHING
AWAY FROM MECHANISM, AND AVOID HOT
SURFACES.
VORSICHT: HAAR, HÄNDE UND KLEIDUNG VON
DEM MECHANISMUS FERNHALTEN, UND
HEISSE FLÄCHEN MEIDEN.
DANGER: N'APPROCHER NI LES CHEVEUX, NI
LES MAINS, NI LES VETEMENTS DU
MECANISME, ET EVITER LES SURFACES
CHAUDES.
PERICOLO: TENERE CAPELLI, MANI ED
INDUMENTI LONTANI DAL MECCANISMO, ED
EVITARE SUPERFICI CALDE.
PELIGRO: MANTENGA CABELLOS, MANOS Y
VESTIMENTOS ALEJADOS DEL MECANISMO
DE IMPRESION, Y EVITE SUPERFICIES
CALIENTES.
•
Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
points or other risks. Servicing must be done by qualified personnel
only. In the event of product damage, liquid spillage, or a distinct
change in performance requiring service, unplug the printer from the
wall outlet.
•
Always plug the printer power cord into a three-wire grounded
receptacle.
Operator's Guide
•
DO NOT operate the printer unless its voltage is set to the local line
voltage, as described in this manual.
•
Keep printer vents free from obstructions.
•
Keep the printer dry. If water is accidentally spilled on the printer, turn
the power OFF immediately and wipe it dry. Do not turn the power on
until the printer is completely dry.
•
Do not lean or stack objects on or against the printer. If an object is
accidentally dropped into the printer, turn OFF power and carefully
remove the object.
•
Use a high-quality, well-shielded interface cable. Both connectors
should be metal and connected to chassis (frame) ground.
•
Make sure the power is OFF anytime you are connecting or
disconnecting the power cable or interface cable.
•
Be sure the cover is secure while the printer is running.
v
vi
Contents
SUPPLIES AND SERVICES
Important ! For best results and longest printer life, insist on genuine, factoryapproved, ribbon cartridges. (Re-inked or remanufactured ribbon cartridges are
not suitable.) Obtain factory-approved ribbon cartridges from your dealer or
directly from the printer manufacturer:
Output Technology Corporation
2310 North Fancher Road — Spokane, WA 99212-1381
Voice: 1-800-468-8788 — Fax : (509) 533-1280
Genuine, factory-approved ribbon cartridges are your best price-performance
value. Factory-approved ribbon cartridges are manufactured to close tolerances
under exacting quality control to provide long life, reliability, and uniformity.
Order your ribbons fast. Tear out and use the handy fax form following Page viii.
If you need service, contact us for the name of the nearest certified service
agent. Please have your printer model and serial numbers handy—these are
located on the back of the printer. When you call, ask about our Factory
Express Service Program!
Operator's Guide
vii
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of
more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply
with the relevant FCC regulations.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Output
Technology Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
viii
Contents
EPA ENERGY STAR PRINTERS PARTNER
The 4100 printer complies with voluntary standards for low-power
consumption as set forth by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
DOC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This digital apparatus does not exceed the limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference
regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques prescrites
dans le règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique éditcté par le Ministère
des Communications du Canada.
Operator's Guide
ix
CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURER/IMPORTER
It is hereby certified that the 4100 Series printers have been
suppressed in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPTAmtsbiVfg 243/1991 and 46/1992. The operation of some equipment
(e.g. test transmitters) in accordance with the regulations may, however,
be subject to certain restrictions. Please refer to the notes in the
operating instructions.
The Federal Ministry for Telecommunications Approvals has been
notified of the placing of this equipment on the market and has been
granted the right to test the series for compliance with the regulations.
This equipment has been tested concerning compliance with the
relevant RFI protection requirements both individually and on system level
(to simulate normal operation conditions). However, it is possible that
these RFI Requirements are not met under certain unfavorable conditions
in other installations. It is the user who is responsible for compliance of
his particular installation.
Compliance with applicable regulations depends on the use of
shielded cables. It is the user who is responsible for procuring the
appropriate cables.
Output Technology Corporation
2310 North Fancher Road
Spokane, WA 99212-1381
***
This product meets the requirements of the European Communities EMC
Directive.
x
Contents
Contents
Installation
See the Kwik Installation and Startup
Basics
Basic Physical Features ................................................................. 1
Basic Startup and Printing .............................................................. 4
A. Check Paper Supply ...................................................... 4
B. Close Operator Access Door ........................................ 4
C. Turn On Printer .............................................................. 4
D. Check Top of Form Setting ............................................ 4
E. Check Print Quality ........................................................ 5
F. Remove Printout ............................................................ 5
Basic Controls and Indicators ........................................................ 6
Power On/Off Switch .............................................................. 6
Switch Panel .......................................................................... 6
Combination Keys ................................................................ 10
Basic Connections ....................................................................... 15
Power Receptacle ................................................................. 15
Interface Connectors ............................................................ 16
Basic Beeps ................................................................................. 17
Operator's Guide
xi
Operations
Common Operations ....................................................................21
LoadingPaper .......................................................................21
Adjusting the Printhead Gap .................................................27
Running a Self Test ..............................................................29
Setting Top of Form ..............................................................30
Switching NLQ and Draft ..............................................................32
Changing Emulations ....................................................................34
Printing the Active Character Set ..................................................36
Configuration
The Configuration Menu ...............................................................51
Accessing the Configuration Menu .......................................51
Navigating the Configuration Menu ......................................51
Exiting the Configuration Menu .............................................58
Adjusting the Printer’s Performance ..................................................
Configuration Map .............................................................................
Help .......................................................................................58
Status Print? .................................................................56
Menu Tree? ..................................................................58
Non-Default List? ..........................................................58
Print All Options? ..........................................................58
Hot Key List? ................................................................59
Diagnostic Codes? ........................................................60
Print Active Character Set? ..........................................60
Print Data Byte Map? ...................................................61
Interface Options ..................................................................63
xii
Contents
Configuration, continued
Active Interface ............................................................ 63
Serial Options .............................................................. 64
Input Buffer Size .......................................................... 70
Print Style.............................................................................. 72
Near Letter Quality........................................................ 72
Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ ....................................... 73
Bold Print ...................................................................... 74
Italics............................................................................. 74
Subscript/Superscript.................................................... 75
Char/Inch ...................................................................... 75
Slash Zero..................................................................... 76
Forms Options ...................................................................... 76
Lines/Inch...................................................................... 77
Form Length.................................................................. 77
Skip Perf ....................................................................... 78
LF on CR....................................................................... 78
CR on LF....................................................................... 79
Paper Jam Detect ......................................................... 80
Paper Speed ................................................................. 80
Emulation .............................................................................. 80
Character Options................................................................. 81
Epson Character Options.............................................. 82
IBM Character Options ................................................. 85
DEC Character Options ................................................ 87
Overlay Characters ....................................................... 90
Barcode Options ................................................................... 91
Operator's Guide
xiii
Configuration, continued
Barcode Strike ...............................................................91
Barcode Density ............................................................91
System Options .....................................................................92
Factory Reset ................................................................92
Lock Character Set and Emulation ................................92
Initialize Sensitivity.........................................................93
Vertical Alignment..........................................................93
Maintenance
Static Electricity .............................................................................95
Cleaning ........................................................................................97
Interior Surfaces ....................................................................97
Exterior Surfaces ...................................................................98
Lubrication .....................................................................................98
Changing Ribbon Cartridge ...........................................................99
Changing Forms Compressor......................................................104
Changing Fuses...........................................................................107
Vertical Image Alignment.............................................................110
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting By the Numbers ................................................115
Troubleshooting Chart .................................................................119
Beeps ..................................................................................119
Messages, Printed ...............................................................120
Print Quality .........................................................................120
xiv
Contents
Troubleshooting, continued
Italics (Epson Emulation) .................................................... 123
Print Positioning .................................................................. 123
Paper Problems .................................................................. 124
Switch Panel ....................................................................... 127
Communications ................................................................. 129
Printhead Performance ....................................................... 130
Troubleshooting Aids .................................................................. 131
Power-Up Sequence Test ................................................... 131
Hex Dump Mode ................................................................. 132
Control Commands—An Introduction
Communication Basics .............................................................. 135
Identifying Data Bytes ................................................................ 136
Binary Number System ...................................................... 137
Decimal Number System ................................................... 137
Hexadecimal Number System ............................................ 138
Three Categories of Data Bytes ......................................... 140
Sending Control Codes and Control Sequences ....................... 141
Using BASIC to Send Commands ..................................... 142
Using Batch Files to Send Commands ............................... 142
Sending Commands From The DOS Command Line ........ 144
Using Control Key Sequences To Send Commands ......... 144
Typographic Conventions .......................................................... 146
Format ................................................................................ 146
Parameters ........................................................................ 147
Data Byte Values of Command Parameters ...................... 148
Zeros and Ones .................................................................. 148
Operator's Guide
xv
Universal Control Commands
Index of Universal Control Sequences .......................................150
Alphabetical Summary of Universal Control Sequences ............151
Form Length ...............................................................................152
Emulation Mode ..........................................................................153
Miscellaneous .............................................................................154
Print Style ...................................................................................155
Barcodes ....................................................................................157
Mapping Characters ...................................................................158
Download Characters .................................................................165
Designing Download Characters ........................................166
Extended Characters ..........................................................168
Print Quality ........................................................................169
Storing Download Characters .............................................172
Printing Download Characters ............................................173
Example 1 ...................................................................................178
Example 2 ...................................................................................179
Example 3 ...................................................................................181
Graphics ......................................................................................184
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
Index of Control Codes and Control Sequences ........................190
Alphabetical Summary ................................................................194
Unavailable Epson FX-100 Emulation Commands .....................195
Character Sets ............................................................................196
Form Length ...............................................................................199
xvi
Contents
Epson FX-100 Control Commands, continued
Graphics ..................................................................................... 201
Line Spacing .............................................................................. 208
Margins ...................................................................................... 210
Miscellaneous ............................................................................ 212
Print Direction ............................................................................ 217
Print Style ................................................................................... 218
Tabs ........................................................................................... 229
IBM Proprinter XL Control Commands
Index of Control Codes and Commands .................................... 234
Alphabetical Summary ............................................................... 237
Unavailable IBM Proprinter Control Commands ........................ 238
Character Sets ........................................................................... 239
Form Length ............................................................................... 241
Graphics ..................................................................................... 243
Line Spacing .............................................................................. 247
Margins ...................................................................................... 249
Miscellaneous ............................................................................ 251
Print Direction ............................................................................ 255
Print Style ................................................................................... 256
Tabs ........................................................................................... 265
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Operator's Guide
xvii
Index of Control Codes and Control Commands .........................234
Alphabetical Summary ................................................................275
4100 Printer VS DEC LA210 Printer............................................277
Unsupported DEC Commands ............................................277
Character Pitch Differences.................................................279
Graphics Density Differences ..............................................279
Character Maps ...........................................................................281
Lines Per Inch .............................................................................290
Margins .......................................................................................291
Miscellaneous .............................................................................296
Graphics .....................................................................................303
Paper Motion ..............................................................................308
Pitch ............................................................................................311
Print Style ...................................................................................312
Special Printhead Movement ......................................................314
Print Direction .............................................................................315
Tabs ............................................................................................316
Appendix A - Specifications
Characteristics ............................................................................. A-2
Throughput .......................................................................... A-2
Printing Mechanism ............................................................. A-2
Copies ................................................................................. A-4
Paper Feed.......................................................................... A-4
Ribbon ................................................................................. A-6
Appendix A – Specifications, continued
xviii
Contents
Emulations ...........................................................................A-6
Character Sets .....................................................................A-6
Human-Readable Fonts.......................................................A-8
Barcodes..............................................................................A-9
Graphics.............................................................................A-10
Serial Interface...................................................................A-10
Parallel Interface ................................................................A-11
Memory Configuration........................................................A-11
Safety Features..........................................................................A-11
Reliability....................................................................................A-12
Physical......................................................................................A-12
Requirements.............................................................................A-13
Electrical ............................................................................A-13
Environmental ....................................................................A-13
Interface .............................................................................A-13
Paper .................................................................................A-14
Appendix B - Serial Interface
Serial Interface Basics ................................................................B-1
Serial Interface Pin-Outs for Printer ............................................B-7
Making a Serial Cable .................................................................B-9
Connection Examples ...............................................................B-12
IBM PC to Printer ..............................................................B-12
IBM PC/AT to Printer ........................................................B-13
Handshaking .............................................................................B-15
Appendix B - Serial Interface, continued
Operator's Guide
xix
Software Handshaking ...................................................... B-15
Hardware Handshaking .................................................... B-17
If You Cannot Make It Work ..................................................... B-18
Interface Circuits........................................................................ B-20
Appendix C - Parallel Interface
Parallel Interface Basics .............................................................C-1
Data .....................................................................................C-2
Synchronization ..................................................................C-2
Handshaking .......................................................................C-2
Parallel Interface Pin-Outs for Printer ..........................................C-3
Parallel Interface Timing .............................................................C-7
Interface Circuits........................................................................C-20
Appendix D - Character Sets
Terminology.................................................................................D-4
The Main Character Library .........................................................D-5
Standard U.S. ASCII Character Set ............................................D-6
The Control Code Map ..............................................................D-11
Epson Control Code Map ..................................................D-12
IBM Control Code Maps ....................................................D-13
DEC 7-Bit C0 Control Code Map .......................................D-14
DEC 8-Bit Control Code Maps...........................................D-15
The Character Map....................................................................D-16
Epson National-Use Character Map ..................................D-18
xx
Contents
Appendix D - Character Sets, continued
Epson Hebrew Character Map.......................................... D-21
IBM Code Page 437 (U.S.) ............................................... D-23
IBM #2 Code Page 437 (Hebrew) ..................................... D-25
IBM Code Page 850 (Multilingual) .................................... D-28
IBM Code Page 860 (Portugal) ......................................... D-31
DEC National-Use Character Map .................................... D-34
DEC Multilingual Character Map....................................... D-35
DEC Hebrew Character Map ............................................ D-36
DEC VT100 Line Draw Character Map ............................. D-37
OCR A Overlay Character Map......................................... D-38
OCR B Overlay Character Map......................................... D-39
Character Substitutions for
Epson National-Use Character Map ......................... D-40
Character Substitutions for
DEC National-Use Character Map ............................ D-41
The Character Set..................................................................... D-42
Epson Enhanced Character Sets...................................... D-42
IBM All Character Character Set....................................... D-43
IBM #2 Multilingual Character Set..................................... D-44
Epson ESC I Printable Character Overlay ........................ D-46
Epson ESC 6 Printable Character Expansion Overlay...... D-48
Epson Standard Code Page Character Set ...................... D-50
IBM All Character Overlay................................................. D-52
IBM #2 All Character Multilingual Character Set ............... D-54
Operator's Guide
xxi
Appendix E - Barcodes
Printing Barcodes ....................................................................... E-2
Barcode Format Command ........................................................ E-4
P1 Through P8 .................................................................... E-5
Barcode Format Command Example .................................. E-9
Start Barcode Command ............................................................ E-9
Barcode Data ............................................................................ E-10
Valid Characters ............................................................... E-11
Entering Barcode Data ..................................................... E-12
Quiet Zone ........................................................................ E-13
Spaces............................................................................... E-13
PostNet Placement on an Envelope .................................. E-16
Check Digits ...................................................................... E-17
Number System Characters and Country Flags ............... E-18
Start Characters, Stop Characters, and Guard Bars ........ E-19
Summary of Required Barcode Data ................................ E-19
End Barcode Command ........................................................... E-20
Examples .................................................................................. E-21
Example 1.......................................................................... E-21
Example 2.......................................................................... E-22
Alternate Commands................................................................. E-23
P4 Through P8 Integrity............................................................. E-25
Glossary
Index
xxii
Contents
Basics
BASIC PHYSICAL FEATURES
1.
See "Operator Access," Page 3.
2.
See "Switch Panel," Page 6.
The Printer (Front View, Shown With Acoustic Hood)
JB0-AB1
2
Basics
1.
See "Interface Connectors," Page 16.
2.
See "Power Receptacle," Page 15.
The Printer (Rear View, Shown Without Acoustic Hood)
JB0-AC1
Operator's Guide
1.
Use in adjusting printhead gap when loading paper. See "LoadingPaper" and/or
"Adjusting the Printhead Gap," Pages 21 and 27.
2.
See "Changing Ribbon Cartridge," Page 99.
Operator Access
3
JB0-AD2
4
Basics
BASIC STARTUP AND PRINTING
A
Check Paper Supply.
If necessary, load paper. See "Loading Paper," Page 21.
B
Close Operator Access Door.
C
Turn on printer.
Press the l side of the power on/off switch (Page 6).
D
Check Top of Form Setting.
Normally, set the horizontal perforation to be even with the "TOF"
!
arrow (
). If top of form must be reset, see "Setting Top of
Form," Page 30.
Operator's Guide
E
5
Check Print Quality.
Make sure the ON LINE indicator is lit (Page 8) and the operator
access door is closed, and then send a file from the host computer
to the printer:
F
•
If the print is too light or too dark (smudged), or if some dots are
not being printed, adjust the printhead gap. (See "Adjusting the
Printhead Gap," Page 27.) If necessary, replace an old ribbon
cartridge with a new one (Page 99).
•
If desired, switch between near letter quality (NLQ) and draft
quality by pressing and holding ON LINE and then momentarily
pressing NLQ. Although NLQ has more dots, and therefore
looks better than draft quality print, draft is faster.
Remove Printout.
1. Press ON LINE to place printer off line.
2. Use FORM FEED to move paper to a convenient tear-off point.
3. Separate printout from paper supply at perforation.
4. Press ON LINE again to place printer on line.
6
Basics
BASIC CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH
This power on/off switch is located at the left-rear corner of the printer.
Press the I side of this switch to turn on the printer. Make sure the O side
(the off side) is depressed when :
•
Connecting or disconnecting cables
•
Performing operations close to the
printhead carriage
JB0-AU
When you turn on the printer, it automatically performs a brief diagnostic
test which lights indicators, moves the printhead carriage, and sounds the
beeper. For more about this test, see "Power-Up Sequence Test," Page
131.
The power on/off switch is also used in conjunction with switch panel keys
to perform various printer operations following the power-up sequence
test. For information about these key combinations, see "Combination
Keys," page 10.
Operator's Guide
7
SWITCH PANEL
The switch panel is located at the right-front corner of the printer. The
switch panel contains four indicator lights and four keypad switches.
JB0-BD
PAPER
*
Except when in configuration menu mode.
Paper Out (Fault) Indicator. Glows
amber when the printer is out of paper.*
Flashes if an overcurrent, carriage motor
problem, paper jam, or other fault occurs.
(See "Paper Problems" in the
troubleshooting chart, Page 124.)
8
Basics
NLQ
Near Letter Quality. Glows green to indicate
near letter quality printing is selected. To
quickly switch between draft quality and NLQ,
press and hold ON LINE and then
momentarily press NLQ.
POWER
Power On Indicator. Glows green to indicate
the printer is receiving AC power.
On Line/Exit Key and Indicator. Press once to
place printer on line. The indicator glows green.
Press again to place printer off line. Each time
ON LINE is pressed, the beeper sounds:
When on line, printer can print data received
from the computer.
When off line, you can set top of form, move
paper, or change configuration.
Also, use this key to exit the configuration menu.
The ON LINE indicator flashes when the
operator door is open.
Operator's Guide
Top Of Form / NLQ / NEXT Key. With printer
off line, press to set top of form. (See "Setting
Top of Form," Page 30). Printer beeps once
when top of form is set.
Press along with ON LINE to switch between
near letter quality (NLQ) and draft modes.
Also, use this key to move through the
configuration menu. (See "Navigating the
Configuration Menu," Page 51.)
Line Feed / YES Key. With printer off line,
press once to advance paper one line. Hold
pressed to advance multiple lines. (Also used
in micro-positioning the paper. See "On-Line
Hot Keys," Page 12.)
Also, use this key to choose configuration
menu options. (See "Navigating the
Configuration Menu," Page 51.)
9
10
Basics
Form Feed / BACK Key. With printer off line,
press once to eject a page, that is, to print
anything still in the output line buffer (if
applicable) and then to advance paper to the
top of the next form. Hold pressed to move
paper continuously. (Also used in micropositioning the paper. See "On-Line Hot Keys,"
Page 12.)
Also, use this key to move through the
configuration menu. (See "Navigating the
Configuration Menu", Page 51.)
COMBINATION KEYS
The power on/off switch and the ON LINE key are used in combination
with other keys to perform various operations. Although most of these
operations can be selected from the configuration menu, the "hot" keys
are faster.
Power-Up Hot Keys
The power-up hot keys allow you to power up the printer, perform a
power-up sequence test, and then enter one of three menu or test modes,
all in the same switch panel operation. For all power-up hot keys, you
must press the switch panel key, hold that key depress, and then turn on
the printer. Hold down the switch panel key for a couple of seconds after
turning on power.
Operator's Guide
+
+
+
+
11
Configuration Menu. While
pressing FORM FEED, turn
on printer to print out the
first configuration menu
query. (See Configuration
section, Page 49.)
Self Test. While pressing
LINE FEED, turn on printer
to begin a rolling printout of
keyboard characters. (See
"Running a Self Test," Page
29.) To stop printout, press
ON LINE or turn off the
printer.
Hex Dump (Wide Form).
While pressing FORM
FEED and LINE FEED, turn
on printer to place printer in
10 pitch hex dump mode.
(See "Hex Dump Mode,"
Page 132.) To exit hex
dump mode, turn off the
printer.
12
Basics
+
+
+
Hex Dump (Narrow
Form). While
pressing ON LINE,
FORM FEED, and
LINE FEED, turn on
printer to place
printer in 17.14 pitch
hex dump mode.
(See "Hex Dump
Mode," Page 132.)
To exit hex dump
mode, turn off the
printer.
On-Line Hot Keys
The on-line hot keys allow you to enter the configuration menu (without
having to turn off the printer), to fine position the paper, and to switch print
quality modes. For all on-line hot keys, you must press the ON LINE key,
hold that key depressed, and then momentarily press the indicated switch
panel key(s).
+
+
Configuration Menu. While
pressing ON LINE,
momentarily press FORM
FEED and LINE FEED at
the same time to print out
the first configuration menu
query. (See Configuration
section, Page 49.)
Operator's Guide
+
+
13
Move Up Paper/Speed
Exit. While pressing ON
LINE, momentarily press
LINE FEED to advance
paper by one microline
(1/144 in.). Use this for fine
positioning the paper when
setting top of form. (See
"Setting Top of Form,"
Page 30.) Also used for
fast exiting the
configuration menu.
Move Down Paper. While
pressing ON LINE,
momentarily press FORM
FEED to back up paper by
one microline (1/144 in.).
Use this for fine positioning
the paper when setting top
of form. (See "Setting Top
of Form," Page 30.) When
backing up paper, pull
down slightly on the paper.
14
Basics
+
Near Letter Quality. While
pressing ON LINE,
momentarily press NLQ to
switch between near letter
quality and draft quality
printing modes.
Operator's Guide
15
BASIC CONNECTIONS
POWER RECEPTACLE
The power receptacle is located at the left-rear corner of the printer, below
the power on/off switch.
One end of the power cord plugs into
the lower portion of the receptacle.
The other end of the power cord plugs
into a standard three-prong, grounded
electrical outlet. Plug power cord only
into the type of power source
specified in the window near the top of
the receptacle. The window shows
either 120 Vãc, 100 Vãc, 220 Vãc, or
240 Vãc.
The compartment above the power
cord contains a voltage selection
tumbler and two fuses. If necessary,
to change the voltage selection or the
fuses, refer to "Changing Fuses,"
Page 107.
DA0-H
16
Basics
INTERFACE CONNECTORS
Serial
Parallel
Serial and parallel interface connectors are
located near the right-rear corner of the
printer. Use one of these connectors to
interconnect the printer and host computer.
Always turn the printer off when
disconnecting or connecting a cable
connector, always use a shielded cable, and
always lock the cable connector to the printer
connector, as specified in the following
paragraphs.
JB0-AA1
Parallel Interface
The parallel interface connector is a standard Centronics-type connector
with 36 pins . The triangular clips on the top and bottom of the connector
are used to lock in the cable connector.
For more information on parallel connectivity, see Appendix C.
Operator's Guide
17
Serial Interface
The serial interface connector is a standard RS-232, 25-pin, D-type
connector. Normally, thumbscrews attached to the cable connector are
used to lock the cable connector to the printer connector.
For more information on serial connectivity, see Appendix B.
BASIC BEEPS!
The beeper sounds to confirm a change or to flag an error or failure. For
errors and failures, see "Beeps" (Page 119) in the troubleshooting chart.
One chirp is heard when :
•
Power-up sequence test is successful.
•
ON LINE is pressed.
One short beep is heard when the
top of form is set.
18
Basics
Three sets of low-high beeps are
heard when a paper jam occurs.
Four-second solid beep is heard
when:
4 S ec
...
*
Except when in configuration menu mode.
**
Turn off printer to stop beeping.
•
Paper runs out*
•
Left tractor is too far right
•
Paper out sensor fails
Intermittent single beeps are heard
when a string of bad data is
received on serial interface.**
Operator's Guide
19
One short beep followed by four
short-long beeps indicates the
printer has encountered a
recoverable memory error.†
Five long beeps are heard when
the printer encounters a
nonrecoverable error.††
†
If problem persists, record beep pattern and then see BEEPs in Troubleshooting Chart (Page 119).
†† Turn off printer and then turn back on. If problem persists, record beep pattern. Press ON LINE several times
to solicit additional beep patterns, if any, then see BEEPs in Troubleshooting Chart (Page 119).
20
Basics
Operations
COMMON OPERATIONS
LOADING PAPER:
JB0-AF1
Loading Paper
22
Operations
To load paper, follow these steps:
1. Open operator access door.
2. If you plan on loading the same type of paper, note the setting of the
printhead gap adjustment lever and then move printhead gap
adjustment lever toward you (away from paper), as far as possible.
3. If necessary, reposition tractors to
accommodate a change in paper width, as
follows:
a. Keep the left tractor locked at the
extreme left end of its travel.
b. Lift lock lever on right tractor.
c. Slide right tractor along its shafts and
position it, in relationship to the left t
ractor, to approximately match the width
of the paper.
d.
Right Tractor
For now, leave the right tractor
unlocked.
JBO-N
Note: The paper out sensor is located near the left edge of the paper
path below the platen. Normally, to prevent a false paper out
alarm, keep the left tractor at the extreme left end of the platen.
Move only the right tractor to accommodate changes in paper
width.
4. Open hinged paper retainers on tractors.
Operator's Guide
Paper Specifications*
• Type: standard fanfold, edge perforated.
Single-part to 6-part paper.
• Sheet Width: 3 in. to 16 in. (approx. 76.2
mm to 406.4 mm), including tractor strips.
• Form Length: 0.5 to 31.5 in. (approx.
12.7 to 800 mm) in 1/2 in. increments to
conform to configuration menu setting.**
• Tractor Strips: 4.00 ± 0.25 mm dia.
sprocket holes, 1/4 in. from outside edge
of paper, located every 1/2 in. vertically.
• Bond Weight: 14 lb to 28 lb (52 g/m2 to
105 g/m2) for single-part paper. Variable
for multi-part paper*.
• Thickness: 0.002 in. to 0.005 in. (approx.
0.065 mm to 0.13 mm) for single-part
paper. Total thickness for multi-part paper
is 0.018 in. (approx. 0.46 mm).
*
For more information, see Appendix A.
** Other form lengths are available using emulation
control commands. DEC emulation includes a No
Form mode.
23
5. Feed paper from either the
bottom or front of the printer,
as shown in the following
illustrations. Gently push
paper up until it appears
between printheads and
platen.
Note: Prefer feeding paper
stock from the bottom rather
than the front. Feeding from
the bottom is the most direct
and trouble-free path, causing
less stress on the paper's
sprocket holes during highspeed printing. If you use
multi-part paper or label stock,
you should feed only from the
bottom.
If you feed from the front, be
sure paper flows freely into
front entrance of printer*** .
Prevent the paper from
contacting the front of the
printer stand (or table or desk
edges, if not using the stand).
Any excessive load or friction
on in-feed paper will result in
paper-handling problems.
*** The printer is shipped with a stand that allows paper to be fed from the bottom. If you intend to feed paper from
the front, you must first remove a 16-in. foam plug from the front feed guide.
24
Operations
Do not let
paper drag on
edge of stand,
table, or desk.
Front Feed
Bottom Feed
JB0-AG2
JB0-AH1
Operator's Guide
25
6. Align paper on tractor sprockets. Make sure
that the paper is straight.
7. Adjust the position of the right tractor so that
the paper is neither stressed nor buckled.
Left Tractor
JB0-L1
The sprocket pins should sit comfortably in
the middle of the paper's sprocket holes.
Paper holes should not be distorted.
8. Close retainers.
9. Make sure both tractors are locked in position.
10. Adjust the printhead gap:
•
If you reloaded the printer with the same type of paper, simply
return the printhead gap adjustment lever to its previous position.
•
If you reloaded with a different thickness or weight of paper, see
"Adjusting the Printhead Gap," Page 27.
11. Set top of form. (See "Setting Top of Form," Page 30.)
26
Operations
ADJUSTING THE PRINTHEAD GAP
Warning!
Make sure no article of clothing (necktie, jewelry) is
hanging into the operator access during this
procedure.
1. Open the operator access door.
2. Make sure the printhead gap adjustment lever is positioned as far as
possible toward the front of the printer so that the gap between the
printheads and platen is as wide as possible.
3. Turn on the printer.
4. Begin a printout by:
•
Sending a file (about three pages of characters) to the printer
•
Running a self test (See "Running a Self Test," Page 29.)
5. See the Note below and then move the printhead gap adjustment lever
toward the platen.
The printout appears.
Note: The printhead gap must be set at normal print speed.
As a safety feature, when using “fast pitch” (10 pitch printing), the
printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is open. To
temporarily cancel half-speed printing during printhead gap
adjustment, press and hold TOF while the printer prints.
Operator's Guide
27
Adjust the printhead gap adjustment lever
for desired print quality.
Note: The ideal setting of the printhead
gap adjustment lever for longest ribbon and
printhead life is just before printed dots
begin to disappear. For multipart paper,
check the bottom copy.
Printhead Gap
Adjustment Lever
JB0-AJ1
Caution:
Do not use the printhead gap adjustment lever to
compensate for light print as the ribbon cartridge
begins to run out of ink. Narrowing the gap between
the platen and printheads may cause excessive wear
on the printheads and cause drag on the printhead
carriage motor, in effect shortening their life span.
28
Operations
RUNNING A SELF TEST
Warning!
If you run self test with the operator access door
open, make sure no article of clothing (necktie,
jewelry) is hanging into the operator access.
+
While pressing LINE FEED, turn
on printer to begin a rolling
printout of keyboard characters.
To stop printout, press ON LINE
or turn off the printer.
Note: As a safety feature, when using “fast pitch” (10 pitch printing), the
printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is open. To
temporarily cancel half-speed printing during a self test, press and
hold TOF while the printer prints.
Self Test Printout
JB0-AI
Operator's Guide
29
SETTING TOP OF FORM
Note: The configuration menu option for form length must be set correctly
before setting the top of form. (The factory default form length is
11 in.: usually set to correspond to 11 in. between horizontal
perforations.) If necessary, see "Form Length," Page 77 in the
Configuration section, to select a different length.
1. Use the paper positioning keys to move the paper to the desired top of
form position.
Paper Position Keys
Paper Movement
With
Printer
Up 1 Line
Off Line
+
Up by 1/144 in.
+
Down by 1/144 in.
30
Operations
Normally, the horizontal perforation is chosen as the top of form. For
this, move the paper so that the horizontal perforation is even with the
!) near the right and left edges of the platen.
"TOF" arrow (
Locating Top Of Form
2. With the printer off line, press TOF.
The beeper sounds to confirm your new top-of-form setting.
JB0-AK1
Operator's Guide
31
SWITCHING NLQ AND DRAFT
You can switch back-and-forth between near letter quality (NLQ) and draft
quality print modes by pressing and holding ON LINE and then
momentarily pressing NLQ:
+
In NLQ mode, the NLQ indicator lights. After switching modes you must
press ON LINE to place printer on line.
You can also preselect a startup print mode in the configuration menu.
This assures that the preferred print mode is automatically set after you
turn on the printer. Draft print mode is the factory default startup print
mode. If desired, see "Near Letter Quality," Page 72, in the Configuration
section to change the startup print mode.
Once the printer is on, you can switch freely between NLQ and draft print
modes using either the hot key explained above or, more commonly, by
using a printer driver that matches your printer's present emulation. (See
"Emulations and Printer Drivers" that follows.)
32
Operations
Emulations and Printer Drivers
When a printer acts like another printer, it is said to emulate that printer.
Your printer can emulate an Epson FX-100, IBM Proprinter XL, or DEC
LA210 printer.
You can switch between emulations, as detailed in "Changing Emulations"
that follows.
When you use a specific computer application (MS Windows,
WordPerfect, Lotus 1-2-3, etc.) to print on a specific printer (Epson FX100, IBM Proprinter XL, etc.) you must select a specific printer driver. The
application's printer driver not only allows you to print on that printer, it
also allows you to select such things as print quality (NLQ, draft), normal
vs bold print, characters per inch, character sets, and others features and
options available with the emulated printer. These printer driver
selections override the configuration menu default selections.
Remember:
If you change the emulation of your printer, you must
change the selected printer driver in your computer application. Consult
the manuals provided with your application.
Operator's Guide
33
CHANGING EMULATIONS
The factory default startup emulation is Epson FX-100, which means that
the printer acts like an Epson FX-100 printer after you turn on the power.
You can change the default startup emulation using the configuration
menu. The other two emulation selections are IBM Proprinter XL and
DEC LA210.
To change emulations, use a power-up or on-line hot key to enter the
configuration menu:
1. Either press FORM FEED and then turn on the printer;
+
or, with the printer already on, press and hold ON LINE and then
simultaneously press FORM FEED and LINE FEED.
+
+
The printer prints out:
HELP OPTIONS
2. Respond by pressing NEXT.
The printer prints out:
INTERFACE OPTIONS
•
34
Operations
3. Again, press NEXT.
4. Continue pressing NEXT
•
•
•
until the printer prints:
EMULATION
5. Then, press YES.
The printer prints out:
= Epson FX 100 ?
6. If you intend to change emulations, press NEXT.
The printer prints out:
change to IBM Proprinter XL ?
7. Press YES to select this emulation or NEXT to move on to "change to
DEC LA210?"
Pressing YES to a selection records that selection.
8. Press ON LINE twice to exit the menu and to place printer on line.
The printer is now in the newly selected emulation and subsequently
powers up in that emulation.
Operator's Guide
35
PRINTING THE ACTIVE CHARACTER SET
The configuration menu provides a way to print out the active character
set.
For this feature, the active character set is defined as the menu-selected
default character set along with any active overlays (OCR A, OCR B,
download characters). Character sets selected by software applications
such as word processing software cannot be printed using this help
feature.
Note: The printout can be in either draft quality or NLQ mode and in
either normal or italic style, depending on the present print quality
and italics settings.
To print out a copy of the active character set use a power-up or on-line
hot key to enter the configuration menu:
1. Either press FORM FEED and then turn on the printer;
+
or, with the printer already on, press and hold ON LINE and then
simultaneously press FORM FEED and LINE FEED.
+
The printer prints out:
+
36
Operations
HELP OPTIONS
2. Respond by pressing YES.
The printer prints out:
Status Print ?
3. Press NEXT.
The printer prints out:
Menu Tree ?
4. Again, press NEXT.
•
•
5. Continue pressing NEXT
•
•
•
until the printer prints :
•
Print Active Character Set ?
6. Then, press YES.
The printer moves to the top of the next form and then prints the active
character set.
The illustrations on the following pages show the draft mode factorydefault character sets for the Epson FX-100, IBM Proprinter XL, and DEC
LA210 emulations. (Examples are shown smaller than actual size.) In
these printouts, the first hexadecimal digit of the character or control code
is written along the top of the table, and the second hexadecimal digit is
written along the side. Thus, the hexadecimal control code for a capital
Operator's Guide
37
"Z" in all three character sets is 5A which is equivalent to decimal 90,
using the hexadecimal-to-decimal conversion chart on Page 43.
JB0-AM
Printout of Epson U.S. Character Set
(Factory Default for Epson Emulation)
38
Operations
JB0-AN
Printout of IBM #1 U.S. Character Set
(Factory Default for IBM Emulation)
Operator's Guide
39
JB0-AO
Printout of DEC U.S./Multilingual Character Set
(Factory Default for DEC Emulation)
40
Operations
Hexadecimal-To-Decimal Conversion (Along with U.S. PC-8 computer terminal
characters.)
0
-1
0NUL
1-
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
17
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
18
34
50
66
82
98
114
•
1
-2
•
2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
♥
!!
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115
♦
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
20
36
52
68
84
100
116
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
♠
•
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
22
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
7
23
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
8
24
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
9
25
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
10
26
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
11
27
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
12
28
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
13
29
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
14
30
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
15
31
47
63
79
95
111
!
-8
-9
"
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
127
Operator's Guide
Hexadecimal-To-Decimal Conversion, continued
8Ç
9É
Aá
B•
C•
Dð
E•
F•
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
æ
í
•
•
Ð
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
Æ
ó
•
•
Ê
•
•
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
ô
ú
•
•
Ë
•
•
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
ö
ñ
•
•
È
•
•
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
ò
Ñ
Á
•
¹
•
•
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
å
û
ª
Â
ã
Í
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
•
•
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
ê
ÿ
¿
©
•
Ï
•
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
ë
Ö
®
•
•
•
•
•
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
ª
•
•
•
•
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ï
ø
½
•
•
•
•
•
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
î
£
¼
•
•
•
•
•
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
¥
¡
¢
•
¦
Ø
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ä
×
«
¥
•
Ì
•
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Å
ƒ
»
•
¤
•
•
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
41
42
Operations
What Is a Character Set?
A character set consists of up to 256 printable patterns and printer
instructions assigned to 256 possible codes. The character set tells the
printer what to do or what to print when each of these codes is received
from the computer.
The codes can be assigned to keyboard characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, *,
etc.) foreign characters (such as É‚ æ‚ Ç‚), linedraw features (such as
• • • • • • ), and symbols (such as ©, †, µ,™, barcodes). In addition,
codes can be assigned for sounding the beeper, feeding a form, causing
a horizontal tab, and so on. Literally, there are thousands of character
and control possibilities, but only 256 can be assigned at any one time.
Either you or your application software chooses the active character set.
But, the choice is primarily made by the application software. For
example, if you draw a box around text, your MS Word application
automatically chooses a linedraw character set, or, if you select the
Swedish language in MS Windows, some of the keys on your keyboard
cause Swedish characters to be printed.
You can assign a default character set for each printer emulation in the
configuration menu. (See "Character Option," Page 81.) The preselected
character set is automatically set as the active character set after you
switch emulations. But, like most configuration default settings, your
application software can change the active character set.
Appendix D shows all of the control code and character maps for all of the
built-in emulations.
Configuration
This section provides details on using the printer’s configuration menu.
Among other things, the configuration menu contains the printer’s
changeable configuration settings.
A new printer is preset at the factory to:
•
Emulate an Epson FX-100 printer on a parallel interface, and
•
Print 6 lines per inch of 10 pitch (10 characters per inch) draft quality
characters on a form length of 11 in.
These factory settings specify how the printer reacts to data when you
turn on the printer for the very first time. These constitute the factory
default settings, or simply the factory defaults.
You can customize the defaults so that when you turn on the printer, it
reacts differently. You might, for example, wish to change the default for
"Lines/Inch" so that the printer prints 8 lines per inch instead of 6.
In the paragraph above, it is important to stress the phrase "...when you
turn on the printer." In most cases, the host computer sends commands
to the printer at the beginning of each print job to alter or completely
override the defaults. Your defaults, whether factory defaults or
customized defaults, only apply when you start up the printer and
continuously print unformatted text files containing "straight ASCII" data.
46
Configuration
Formatted data files, such as what MS-Windows, or WordPerfect, or
Lotus 1-2-3, or another modern software application would send to the
printer, contains control commands* imbedded with the text to change
many of the configuration settings to something other than the factory or
customized defaults. Typically, a formatted data file contains codes to
select bold versus normal type, near letter quality versus draft quality,
pitch, character set, and on and on. In other words, the software
application changes the printer's settings for the present print job. It does
not change the defaults, because the next time the printer is turned on,
the factory or customized defaults are reset.
The computer's software application can and does change most optional
settings, but not all. For example, the software application does not
change the parallel versus serial port settings, and it does not change
from the Epson FX-100 emulation to, for example, the IBM Proprinter XL
emulation. Choosing the right options for these types of setting—the ones
that software applications do not change—is the main focus of the
configuration menu.
If your printer’s present performance is satisfactory, then the configuration
is likely set correctly for your needs and no changes to the configuration
are necessary. However, if the printer’s performance requires alteration
or improvement, then adjustment of the configuration may be appropriate.
The following is an explanation of the navigation of the configuration
menu, where the default settings can be found and, when necessary,
changed.
*
Control commands are covered in other sections of this manual.
Operator's Guide
47
THE CONFIGURATION MENU
The configuration menu consists of 42 changeable default settings, eight
report (help) options, a performance aid, and an option to recall original
factory default settings.
A map of the configuration menu selections and options, along with the
original factory defaults (which are underlined), is shown on Pages 56
through 57. At the extreme right edge of the map are page references for
more information.
ACCESSING THE CONFIGURATION MENU
If the printer is off, press FORM FEED while turning on the printer.
+
If the printer is on, press and hold ON LINE and then simultaneously
press FORM FEED and LINE FEED.
+
+
The printer prints out the first line of the configuration menu selection:
HELP OPTIONS
48
Configuration
NAVIGATING THE CONFIGURATION MENU
To move through the menu, you must respond to the menu options and
queries using the YES, BACK, and NEXT keys:
,
and
For example, in response to "Help Options" above, press YES. The
printer prints:
Status Print ?
If you do not want a "Status Print," then press NEXT to move on to the
next configuration item:
Menu Tree ?
If you need to change direction in the menu, you can reverse the query
string by pressing BACK. This returns you to "Status Print?"
Status Print ?
If you change your mind about "Status Print," press YES and the printer
prints out the present default settings—similar to the one shown on
Page 60.
The moment you press YES the printer executes the request—either
printing out the report or making the default setting change. Also, in the
case of a default change, the change also is made to the current (active)
printer settings. For example, if you answer YES to the "Char/Inch"
change (Page 75) from "10" to "12," the change is in effect when you
leave the configuration menu.
Operator's Guide
49
EXITING THE CONFIGURATION MENU
There are three ways to exit the configuration menu:
•
Turn off the printer.
•
Press EXIT until the printer advances to the next top of form.
•
Press ON LINE along with LINE FEED.
If you have made default setting changes, the new default selections take
effect immediately after exiting the configuration menu or when the printer
is turned on again.
If it becomes necessary to return to the factory defaults after configuration
changes have been made, the configuration menu includes an option
called Factory Reset, which restores the factory default settings. (See
“Factory Reset,” Page 87.)
50
Configuration
ADJUSTING THE PRINTER’S PERFORMANCE
The best method for adjusting the printer’s performance to match your
needs is to:
1. Make interface changes (physical printer connections).
2. Make emulation changes (printer behavior: IBM, Epson, or
DEC).
3. Make other changes (software and printer configuration menu
settings).
The subsections that follow discuss the options and setting selections
available through the configuration menu.
Some configuration menu settings are more crucial to printer performance
than others.
The printer drivers within a software application often change the printer's
status to suit the document being printed; that is, the software temporarily
changes the printer’s configuration settings. (See Page 33.) For example,
if EPSONFX is selected as the printer driver in MS Word 97, Word 97
might need to change the printer's default value of 10 pitch (10 character
per in.) to 12 pitch to match your Word 97 character format requirements.
Because of the software’s dominance over the printer’s settings, it is
unnecessary to adjust every setting in the configuration menu unless you
intend to print unformatted text, such as Pine or Eudora e-mail messages
or .BAT files.
Operator's Guide
51
However, because printer drivers do not or cannot change some printer
settings, such as the interface or emulation, those settings are important
to the printer’s function. These settings must be correctly set as default
settings so they are in effect when the printer is turned on.
If your printer’s configurations are set incorrectly for the interface, the
printer driver in the software application cannot change that setting, and
your documents will not be printed. If your printer emulation setting does
not match the emulation setting in the software, your documents may not
be printed or they may be printed incorrectly, with character substitutions
and other problems.
If you must change configuration settings—and if those changes include
interface and emulation changes—we advise that you change the
interface and/or emulation settings first, before changing other settings.
Also, consider the following guidelines:
•
"Interface Option" changes (Page 63).
•
If you select "Serial," do not forget to check the "Serial Options"
settings (Page 64) for protocol, baud, number of data bits, parity, and
the number of stop bits. These must agree with like settings on the
computer.
•
"Emulation" changes (Page 80).
•
The selected emulation also affects the "Character Options" (Page
81).
52
Configuration
CONFIGURATION MAP
CONFIGURATION MAP*
HELP
|
|
Status Print?
Menu Tree?
Non-Default List?
Print All Options?
Hot Key List?
Diagnostic Codes?
Print Active Character Set?
Print Data Byte Map?
58
INTERFACE OPTIONS
Active Interface: Serial, Parallel
Serial Options (only apply if active interface is serial)
Protocol: DTR, X-ON/X-OFF, ETX/ACK, DTR/X-ON/X-OFF
DTR Polarity: Low, High
Robust X-ON: Off, On
X-OFF when Off Line: Off, On
Baud: 4800, 2400, 1200, 19200, 9600
Data Bits: 7 Bits, 8 Bits
Parity: Even, Odd, Mark, Space, None
Stop Bits: 2 Bits, 1 Bit
Input Buffer Size: Min. (user-defined characters OK), Max. (no user-defined characters)
63
64
65
66
65
67
61
68
69
70
70
PRINT STYLE
Near Letter Quality: On, Off
Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ: On, Off
Bold Print: On, Off
Italics: On, Off
Sub/Superscript: On, Off
Char/Inch: 12.0, 15.0, 16.67, 17.14, 18.2, 5.0, 6.0, 7.5, 8.33, 8.57, 9.1, 10.0
Slash Zero: Off, On
72
73
74
74
75
75
76
FORMS OPTIONS
Lines/Inch: 8 lpi, 6 lpi
1
Form Length: 420.0 mm, 297.0 mm, 210 mm, 148.5 mm, 0.5-11.0-31.5 in.
Skip Perf: On, Off
LF on CR: On, Off
CR on LF: Off, On
Paper Jam Detect: Off, On
Paper Speed: 5 inches/sec, 11 inches/sec
77
77
78
78
79
80
80
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2
EMULATION : IBM Proprinter XL, DEC LA210, Epson FX-100
80
Operator's Guide
53
3
CHARACTER OPTIONS
Epson Character Options
Epson Control Code Map: Epson IBM #1, Epson IBM #2, Epson
Epson Character Map4: France, Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy (Epson), Spain,
Japan, Norway, Denmark II, Spain II, Latin America, Hebrew, Italy (ANSI), U.S.
Epson IBM #15: Page 850 (Multilingual), 860 (Portugal), 437 (U.S.)
Epson IBM #26: Page 850 (Multilingual), 860 (Portugal), 437 (Hebrew), 437 (U.S.)
IBM Character Options
IBM Control Code Map: IBM #2, IBM #1
IBM #17: Page 850 (Multilingual), 860 (Portugal), 437 (U.S.)
IBM #28: Page 850 (Multilingual), 860 (Portugal), 437 (Hebrew), 437 (U.S.)
DEC Character Options
DEC Character Set: 7 Bit DEC, 8 Bit DEC
G09: France, Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy (ANSI), Spain, Hebrew,
Finland, Canada (French), Multilingual, VT100 Line Draw, U.S.
G19: U.S., France, Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy (ANSI), Spain,
Hebrew, Finland, Canada (French), Multilingual, VT100 Line Draw
G29: VT100 Line Draw, U.S., France, Germany, U.K., Denmark,
Sweden, Italy (ANSI), Spain, Hebrew, Finland, Canada (French), Multilingual
G39: France, Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy (ANSI), Spain, Hebrew,
Finland, Canada (French), Multilingual, VT100 Line Draw, U.S.
Overlay Characters: OCR A, OCR B, Accept User-Defined Characters, None
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
82
79
84
84
84
85
86
82
86
87
89
89
89
89
89
90
BARCODE OPTIONS
Barcode Strike: Single Strike, Double Strike
Barcode Density: 100 dpi, 75 dpi
91
91
91
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Factory Reset
Lock Char Set & Emulation: On, Off
Initialize Sensitivity: High, Low
Vertical Alignment
92
92
92
93
93
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Factory defaults are underlined. Page references are on the extreme right. See footnotes on
following page.
54
Configuration
1 0.5-in. increments, including A4 length of 11 2/3 in.
2 "EMULATION" does not appear as a configuration menu option if "Lock Character Set and
Emulation" is "On."
3 "CHARACTER OPTIONS" does not appear as a configuration menu option if "Lock Character
Set and Emulation" is "On."
4 Only applies if the "Epson Character Set" is "Epson" in the FX-100 emulation.
5 Only applies if the "Epson Character Set" is "IBM #1" in the FX-100 emulation.
6 Only applies if the "Epson Character Set" is "IBM #2" in the FX-100 emulation.
7 Only applies if the "IBM Character Set" is "IBM #1" in the Proprinter emulation.
8 Only applies if the "IBM Character Set" is "IBM #2" in the Proprinter emulation.
9 G0 is the default for "7 Bit DEC." G0 and G2 are the defaults for "8 Bit DEC." You can assign
different graphic map defaults for 7-Bit and 8-Bit DEC.
The following sections explain, in greater detail, the various setting options
within the printer’s configuration menu. Each option is listed in order
under its respective menu heading.
HELP
Status Print?
Pressing YES prints out the present default settings, similar to the printout
on Page 60.
Menu Tree?
Pressing YES prints out a profile of the configuration menu options.
"EMULATION" and "CHARACTER OPTIONS" do not appear in the
configuration menu tree if "Lock Character Set and Emulation" (Page 92)
is "On."
Non-Default List?
Pressing YES prints out a list of the present default settings which differ
from the original factory default settings.
Operator's Guide
Print All Options?
Pressing YES prints out a list of all options and all possible option
settings.
Hot Key List?
Pressing YES prints out a list of all power-on and on-line hot keys.
Diagnostic Codes?
Pressing YES prints out a reference list of beep patterns for recoverable
and nonrecoverable failures.
55
56
Configuration
Print Active Character Set?
Pressing YES prints out a chart of all present character and control code
assignments, similar to those illustrated on Pages 37 through 39. (See
"Printing the Active Character Set," Page 35, for more details.)
Status Printout (Partial Example Showing Factory Defaults)
JB0-AZ1
Operator's Guide
57
Print Data Byte Map?
Pressing YES prints out the present data byte map. Primarily, the data
byte map is a troubleshooting and development tool used in customizing
character sets.
In content, the present data byte map is similar to the active character set
printout. The data byte map not only shows the 256 active character and
control code assignments, as does the active character set, but it also
identifies the source of the character or code.
Part of a data byte map is shown on Page 63 for Data Bytes 96 through
106. Column headings are explained below. (See the "Universal Control
Commands" section for more information concerning data byte maps.) To
stop this three-page printout before completion and to move on to the next
configuration menu item, press EXIT.
Data Byte. The decimal data byte number. Data bytes are numbered 0
through 255.
Action. Indicates whether the data byte is to be interpreted as a printable
character (CHAR) or as a nonprintable control code (CTRL).
Control Code. For a CTRL action, this column contains a standard
abbreviation* for the control code. For example, "FF" would indicate the
form feed control code. If the data byte does not have a control function,
the column contains the abbreviation NUL.
*
Appendix D contains a list of standard control code abbreviations.
58
Configuration
Source: This is the memory source of the character or control code. The
two possibilities are ROM and RAM:
•
ROM stands for read only memory which is permanent memory.
•
RAM stands for random access memory which is temporary memory.
Character and control codes residing in RAM are lost when the printer
is turn off. (See "Character Library" which follows.)
Character Library. Always Character Library 0 if the source is RAM. For
ROM there are two possibilities (Character Libraries 0 and 1). The
source/character library combinations are listed below:
Source
ROM
Character Library
0
ROM
1
RAM
0
Type of Character
Any built-in character
except an OCR B
Character
OCR B Character
Downloaded Character
Character Number. Each character within a character library is assigned
a number. (Appendix D contains more detail on this.)
Character. The actual printable character presently assigned from a
character library. The character is printed for that data byte if the printer
action is set to CHAR.
Operator's Guide
Data Byte Map (Partial Printout, Example)
59
JB0-BA
INTERFACE OPTIONS
Pressing YES prints out the first of the interface options listed below:
•
Active Interface
•
Serial Options
•
Input Buffer Size
•
Active Interface
Pressing YES prints out the active interface setting:
•
Parallel (factory default)
•
Serial
Whenever you change the active interface, make sure that it matches the
interface selection on the computer. Do not forget to change cables and
connect them to the proper connectors on the back of the printer and
computer.
60
Configuration
Parallel. Enables communication on the parallel interface connector on
the back of the printer. For information concerning parallel
communications, see Appendix C.
Serial. Enables communication on the serial interface connector on the
back of the printer. For information concerning serial communications,
see Appendix B.
If you select "Serial," double-check the serial interface settings under
"Serial Options"—the next configuration menu item.
Serial Options
Pressing YES prints out the first of the serial options listed below:
•
Protocol
•
DTR Polarity
•
Robust X-ON
•
X-OFF When Off Line
•
Baud
•
Data Bits
•
Parity
•
Stop Bits
•
If the active interface is "Serial," then the settings for serial options must
match those of the computer.
Operator's Guide
61
Protocol
Pressing YES prints out the present protocol setting:
•
DTR/X-ON/X-OFF (factory default)
•
DTR
•
X-ON/X-OFF
•
ETX/ACK
Protocol refers to the "handshaking" technique used for serial
communication. For more information concerning hardware and software
handshaking techniques, see Appendix B.
DTR/X-ON/X-OFF. Combines hardware handshaking, using the DTR
signal, with software handshaking, using X-ON/X-OFF.
DTR. Stands for data terminal ready. The printer sets the DTR signal
high when it is ready to receive data from the computer.
DTR is hardware-oriented handshaking initiated by the printer.
X-ON/X-OFF: Stands for Transmission On/Transmission Off. The printer
sends the X-ON status, using device control code 1 (DC1), to the
computer when it is ready to receive data. The X-OFF status, using DC3,
is sent when the printer is busy receiving and processing data. (Also see,
"Robust X-ON" and "X-OFF When Off Line," the next configuration menu
items.)
X-ON/X-OFF is software-oriented handshaking initiated by the printer.
ETX/ACK. Stands for End of Text/Acknowledge. The computer sends
the ETX code to the printer after each line of characters. The computer
waits for the ACK code from the printer before sending the next line of
characters.
ETX/ACK is software-oriented handshaking initiated by the computer.
62
Configuration
DTR Polarity
Pressing YES prints out the present setting:
•
High (factory default)
•
Low
See “Hardware Handshaking” in Appendix B.
Robust X-ON
Pressing YES prints out the present setting:
•
Off
•
On (factory default)
The robust setting only applies to the X-ON/X-OFF protocol.
Off. The printer transmits X-ON only once when it is ready to receive
data.
On. The printer transmits X-ON to the computer every 20 seconds if it is
ready and waiting for data from the computer.
X-OFF When Off Line
Pressing YES prints out the present setting:
•
Off
•
On (factory default)
The "X-OFF when Off Line" setting only applies to the X-ON/X-OFF
protocol.
Off: If the printer has transmitted X-ON to the computer prior to being
switched off line, the printer remains in the X-ON state until it receives
Operator's Guide
63
data from the computer. Although the printer will not print data, the
computer can send data to the printer.
On: The printer transmits X-OFF to the computer when it goes off line.
The printer will not accept or print data.
Baud
Pressing YES prints out the present baud setting:
•
19200
•
9600 (factory default)
•
4800
•
2400
•
1200
Baud is the speed at which serial information flows between the computer
and printer. In general, the higher the baud value, the faster this interface
speed. Print speed, however, is maximized at a serial interface speed of
9600 baud, the factory default.
Data Bits
Pressing YES prints out the present setting:
•
8 Bits (factory default)
•
7 Bits
This defines the number of data bits in each byte transmitted between
computer and printer.
8 Bits: Commonly, an eight-bit byte is necessary for graphics. Eight bits
also allows access to all of the character and control data bytes (0-255) in
the character sets.
64
Configuration
7 Bits: Limits the printer's ability to handle graphics and restricts it to
accessing only the lower character and control data bytes (0-127) in the
character sets.
Parity
Pressing YES prints out the present parity bit status:
•
None (factory default)
•
Even
•
Odd
•
Mark
•
Space
The parity bit follows the data byte transmitted from the computer to the
printer. The printer can use even or odd parity to check that all data bits
from the computer were received correctly.
None: No parity check.
Even: Data bits are either binary 0 or binary 1. For even parity, all of the
data bits must add up to an even decimal sum. If not, the parity bit is set
to binary 1 to make it so.
Odd: All of the data bits must add up to an odd decimal sum. If not, the
parity bit is set to binary 1 to make it so.
Mark: Parity bit is always binary 1.
Space: Parity bit is always binary 0.
Operator's Guide
65
Stop Bits
Pressing YES prints out the present stop bit status:
•
1 Bit (factory default)
•
2 Bits
The printer uses the stop bit(s) to detect the space in-between data bytes.
The stop bit follows the parity bit if parity is enabled.
1 Bit: One bit is sufficient for the printer and most modern computers.
2 Bits: Consider using two stop bits if you transmit at a relatively high
baud using an older, slower computer.
Input Buffer Size
Pressing YES prints out the present setting:
•
Maximum (no user-defined characters) (factory default)
•
Minimum (user-defined characters OK)
The printer contains a 32K RAM, part of which is available as an input
buffer. The input buffer is used for storing print data, graphics, and userdefined characters. If you download and retain user-defined characters,
you decrease the amount of memory available for input print data.
Maximum (no user-defined characters): All of the input buffer is reserved
for input print data. User-defined, downloaded (custom) characters are
rejected.*
Minimum (user-defined characters OK): The minimum amount of space
assigned to the input buffer for print data is reduced to 532 bytes. The
rest is used to accommodate custom characters downloaded from the
*
Maximizing the input buffer size does not affect the use of graphic fonts, such as TrueType fonts. The
restriction only applies to custom characters downloaded using universal control commands.
66
Configuration
computer using universal control commands. You can then specify up to
128 custom characters.
Even if you do not intend to download custom characters, minimizing the
input buffer to 532 bytes has some side-effect advantages. Consider
minimizing the buffer size to minimize:
•
Data loss due to possible power, network, or computer failures
•
Dedicated computer-to-printer transmission time
Note: Storing downloaded characters does not activate them. After you
download a character or characters using universal control
commands, you must "map" them into the active character set
using still other universal control commands or the "Accept UserDefined Characters" setting (Page 90) under "Overlay Characters"
in the configuration menu. Only then does "Print Active Character
Set" (Page 54) and "Print Data Byte Map" (Page 61) reveal the
character substitution(s).
Operator's Guide
67
PRINT STYLE
Pressing YES prints out the first of the print style options listed below:
•
Near Letter Quality
•
Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ
•
Bold Print
•
Italics
•
Char/Inch
•
Slash Zero
•
Other print style settings are available using universal and emulation
control commands.
Near Letter Quality
Pressing YES prints out the active NLQ status:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Off: The printer prints draft quality characters. Draft quality printing is
about three to four times as fast as that of NLQ printing.
Draft characters can be bolded and/or italicized.
Note: Optical character recognition (OCR) fonts cannot be printed in draft
quality mode.
68
Configuration
On: The printer prints near letter quality (NLQ) characters in 10 12, and
15 pitch (10, 12, and 15 char/in.). NLQ characters have about two to
three times the dot density of draft quality characters. NLQ characters are
more attractive than comparable draft quality characters.
Most NLQ characters can be bolded and/or italicized.
Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ
Pressing YES prints out the active NLQ status:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Normally, all draft text is printed bi-directionally, that is, on right-to-left as
well as left-to-right passes of the printhead carriage. This option lets you
enable or disable bi-directional printing of all non-draft text and graphics.
Non-draft text and graphics include graphical images, barcodes (except
PostNet printed as text), and NLQ text.
Consider enabling bi-directional printing if you normally print NLQ text
and/or routinely include graphics. Bi-directional printing approximately
doubles throughput, thereby increasing efficiency. Enabling bi-directional
printing overrides all uni-directional printing control commands sent by the
host.
Consider disabling bi-directional printing if barcode readability is a
problem. (Also, setting the “Barcode Density” in the configuration menu
from 75 dpi to 100 dpi may enhance readability.)
Operator's Guide
69
Bold Print
Pressing YES prints out the active interface setting:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Off: The printer prints standard normal-weight characters.
On: The printer prints bolded characters. Bold (or emphasized)
characters appear "fatter" than normal-weight characters.* Since bolding
is usually reserved for emphasis, rather than paragraph text, bolding does
not appreciably slow down the print speed.
Bold characters can also be italicized.
Note: Optical character recognition (OCR) fonts cannot be bolded.
Italics
Pressing YES prints out the active setting:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Off: The printer prints standard upright characters.
On: The printer prints italicized characters. Italicized characters appear
slanted.
Italicized characters can be bolded.
*
To make a bolded character from a normal-weight character, the printer simply prints another image of the
character slightly to the right of the first.
70
Configuration
Note: Characters can only be italicized in the Epson emulation. Also,
barcodes and optical character recognition (OCR) fonts cannot be
italicized.
Subscript/Superscript
Pressing YES enables you to include subscripts and superscripts in your
text. Subscript and superscript printing slightly affects overall print speed.
Char/Inch
Pressing YES prints out the active pitch (characters printed per horizontal
inch):
•
5.0
•
10.0 (factory default)
•
6.0
•
12.0
•
7.5
•
15.0
•
8.33
•
16.67
•
8.57
•
17.14
•
9.1
•
18.2
Note: Although optical character recognition (OCR) characters can be
printed in any pitch, OCR character are normally used in 10 pitch
only.
Operator's Guide
Slash Zero
Pressing YES prints out:
•
Off
•
On (factory default)
Off: The printer prints zeroes without a slash.
On: The printer prints zeroes with a slash.
Note: Optical character recognition (OCR) zeroes cannot be slashed.
FORMS OPTIONS
Pressing YES prints out the first of the forms options listed below:
•
Lines/Inch
•
Form Length
•
Skip Perf
•
LF on CR
•
CR on LF
•
Paper Jam Detect
•
Paper Speed
•
71
72
Configuration
Lines/Inch
Pressing YES prints out the active line space setting:
•
6 lpi (factory default)
•
8 lpi
This sets the number of lines per vertical inch. For an 11 in. form, the
printer prints a maximum of 66 lines at 6 lpi or 88 at 8 lpi.
Form Length
Pressing YES prints out the active form length setting:
•
0.5 in. to 31.5 in. in .5 in. increments (11 in. is factory default)
•
112/3 in. (standard A4 length for continuous forms)
•
420.0 mm
•
297.0 mm
•
210 mm
•
148.5 mm
Normally, the form length is the vertical distance between horizontal
perforations. However, any evenly divisible or multiple of this length to the
half inch can be used. For example, if you print on fanfolded 1½ in. label
stock, you might want to set the form length to 1½ in. rather than the
actual distance between horizontal perforations.*
*
12 in. is a standard vertical distance between horizontal perforations on some fanfolded label stock.
Operator's Guide
73
Skip Perf
Pressing YES prints out:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Off: The printer prints across the horizontal perforation, unless instructed
otherwise by the computer's software application.
This is the preferred setting in most instances. In general, leave it off if
you print on label stock.
On: The printer automatically leaves a ½ in. white space before and after
the TOF setting.
Consider using the "on" setting when printing unformatted ("straight
ASCII") text.
LF on CR
Pressing YES prints out:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Note: Regardless of this setting, the printer automatically performs a
printer-supplied line feed and carriage return when the output line
buffer is full.
Off: The printer does not supply a line feed command after it executes a
carriage return command sent from the computer.
This is the preferred setting since most computer software applications
supply all vertical positioning commands.
74
Configuration
On: The printer automatically supplies a line feed for every carriage
return command from the computer. (Sometimes referred to as Auto Line
Feed.)
CR on LF
Pressing YES prints out:
•
Off
•
On (factory default)
Note: Regardless of this setting, the printer automatically performs a
printer-supplied line feed and carriage return when the line buffer is
full.
Off: The printer does not automatically supply a carriage return command
after it executes a line feed command sent from the computer.
On: The printer automatically supplies a carriage return for every line
feed command from the computer. (Sometimes referred to as Auto
Carriage Return.) This is the preferred setting since most modern
software applications assume that line feeds cause the printer to print out
the line of text, empty its print buffer, and then reset the character cursor
to the first character position.
Operator's Guide
75
Paper Jam Detect
Pressing YES prints out:
•
Off
•
On (factory default)
The printer uses a paper motion sensor on top of the left tractor to detect
paper jams. If the paper is supposed to move but it does not, then the
printer flashes the PAPER indicator and sounds the beeper.
Off: Disables paper jam detection.
On: Enables paper jam detection.
Paper Speed
Pressing YES prints out:
•
11 in./sec (factory default)
•
5 in./sec
This is often referred to as the slew rate.
11 in./sec: This the normal slew rate for single-part 18 lb paper.
5 in./sec: Consider using this slower slew rate for very light, heavy, or
multipart paper. The slower slew rate is gentler on the paper's sprocket
holes.
76
Configuration
EMULATION
Note: "Emulation" cannot be changed and does not appear as a
configuration menu option if "Lock Character Set and Emulation"
(Page 92) is set to "On."
Pressing YES prints out the active emulation:
•
Epson FX-100 (factory default)
•
IBM Proprinter XL
•
DEC LA210
CHARACTER OPTIONS
Note: "Character Options" cannot be changed and does not appear as a
configuration menu option if "Lock Character Set and Emulation"
(Page 92) is set to "On."
Pressing YES prints out the first of the character options listed below:
•
Epson Character Options
•
IBM Character Options
•
DEC Character Options
•
Overlay Characters
•
A character set contains assignment for up to 256 character and control
codes. Each emulation offers at least two character set variations, along
with other variations based on the language and/or country.
Operator's Guide
77
Each emulation has a default character set. The factory default character
sets for the 4100 printer are English-language U.S.A. The factory default
U.S. Epson, IBM, and DEC character sets are illustrated on Pages 39
through 43. If desired, you may map over the U.S. English characters
with French, Swedish, U.K. English, Multilingual characters, and so on,
depending on the emulation.
Note: The factory default emulation is Epson FX-100, therefore, the
character set in effect when you turn on the printer for the first time
is the U.S. Epson Character Set. If you then switch, for example,
to the IBM Proprinter XL emulation as your default emulation, then
the U.S. IBM #1 Character Set is in effect when the printer is turned
on.
Besides the character options available within an emulation, you can also
overlay parts of the active language-biased character set with optical
character recognition (OCR) characters. You can even overlay particular
character set characters with your own characters downloaded from the
computer using universal control commands.
To check out the active character and control code assignments, use the
"Print Active Character Set" menu selection (Page 36).
Epson Character Options
Pressing YES prints out the first of the Epson character options listed
below:
•
Epson Control Code Map
•
Epson Character Map
•
Epson IBM #1
•
Epson IBM #2
•
An Epson FX-100 printer contains a basic or native character set plus two
variations of IBM character sets: Epson, Epson IBM #1, and Epson IBM
78
Configuration
#2. Although only one character set can be the default character set for
the Epson emulation, you can assign a national-use character map or a
code page default for each of the three.
Note: Do not confuse the IBM #1 and IBM #2 character sets available in
the Epson emulation with those of the IBM emulation. The
selections you make for the Epson emulation do not affect those of
the IBM emulation, and vice versa.
Epson Control Code Map
Pressing YES prints out the present Epson control code map selection:
•
Epson (factory default)
•
IBM #1
•
IBM #2
Epson: The U.S. Epson Character Set (Epson control code map + U.S.
national-use character map) is shown on Page 39. Instead of the U.S.
national-use character map, you can select one of 11 others under
"Epson Character Map," Page 84.
IBM #1: The U.S. IBM #1 Character Set (IBM #1 control code map + U.S.
national-use character map) is shown on Page 41. Instead of the U.S.
national-use character map—IBM calls this Code Page 437—you can
select the multilingual or Portuguese character map under "Epson IBM #1
Code Page," Page 84.
IBM #2: The U.S. IBM #2 Character Set is similar to the one shown on
Page 41 except that Columns 8 and 9 contain characters rather than
control codes. Instead of the U.S. national-use character map, you can
select the multilingual, Portuguese, or Hebrew character map under
"Epson IBM #2 Code Page," Page 84.
Epson Character Map
Operator's Guide
79
Pressing YES prints out the present Epson national-use character map
selection:
•
United States (factory
default)
•
Japan
•
France
•
Norway
•
Germany
•
Denmark II
•
United Kingdom
•
Spain II
•
Denmark
•
Latin America
•
Sweden
•
Hebrew
•
Italy (Epson)
•
Italy (ANSI)
•
Spain
For more information on Epson national-use character maps, see
Appendix D.
Epson IBM #1 Code Page
Pressing YES prints out the present Epson emulation code page selection
for the IBM #1 character set:
•
Code Page 437 (U.S.), (factory default)
•
Code Page 850 (Multilingual)
•
Code Page 860 (Portugal)
For more information on IBM code pages, see Appendix D.
80
Configuration
Epson IBM #2 Code Page
Pressing YES prints out the present Epson emulation code page selection
for the IBM #2 character set:
•
Code Page 437 (U.S.), (factory default)
•
Code Page 850 (Multilingual)
•
Code Page 860 (Portugal)
•
Code Page 437 (Hebrew)
For more information on IBM code pages, see Appendix D.
IBM Character Options
Pressing YES prints out the first of the IBM character options listed below:
•
IBM Control Code Map
•
IBM #1 Code Page
•
IBM #2 Code Page
•
An IBM Proprinter XL printer contains two variations of IBM character
sets: IBM #1 and IBM #2. Although only one character set can be the IBM
default character set, you can assign a code page default for each of
them.
Code pages is the term IBM uses to refer to its national-use character
maps.
Operator's Guide
81
IBM Control Code Map
Pressing YES prints out the present IBM control code map selection:
•
IBM #1 (factory default)
•
IBM #2
IBM #1: The U.S. IBM #1 Character Set (IBM #1 control code map + U.S.
national-use character map) is shown on Page 41. Instead of the U.S.
national-use character map—IBM calls this Code Page 437—you can
select the multilingual or Portuguese character map under "IBM #1 Code
Page" in the next subsection.
IBM #2: The U.S. IBM #2 Character Set is similar to the one shown on
Page 41 except that Columns 8 and 9 contain characters rather than
control codes. Instead of the U.S. national-use character map, you can
select the multilingual, Portuguese, or Hebrew character map under "IBM
#2 Code Page," Page 86.
IBM #1 Code Page
Pressing YES prints out the present IBM emulation code page selection
for the IBM #1 character set:
•
Code Page 437 (U.S.), (factory default)
•
Code Page 850 (Multilingual)
•
Code Page 860 (Portugal)
For more information on IBM code pages, see Appendix D.
82
Configuration
IBM #2 Code Page
Pressing YES prints out the present IBM emulation code page selection
for the IBM #2 character set:
•
Code Page 437 (U.S.), (factory default)
•
Code Page 850 (Multilingual)
•
Code Page 860 (Portugal)
•
Code Page 437 (Hebrew)
For more information on IBM code pages, see Appendix D.
Operator's Guide
83
DEC Character Options
Pressing YES prints out the first of the DEC character options listed
below:
•
DEC Character Set
•
Character Map G0
•
Character Map G1
•
Character Map G2
•
Character Map G3
•
A DEC LA210 printer contains two variations of DEC character sets: one
called the 7-Bit DEC and the other the 8-Bit DEC. Although only one
character set can be the DEC default character set, you can assign
national-use character map(s) to each of them.
You specify national-use character maps in G0 through G3. (DEC refers
to G0 through G3 as graphics maps.) When the printer is turned on, G0 is
automatically assigned to either:
•
The 7-Bit DEC Character Set
•
The lower half of the 8-Bit DEC Character Set (G2 is automatically
assigned to the upper half of the 8-Bit DEC Character Set*)
You can specify one of 12 default national-use character maps or a
multilingual character map for each graphics map.
*
Although these power-on defaults cannot be changed, G0, G1, G2, G3 can be re-assigned, after turning on the
printer, by using DEC control commands. (G0 can only be assigned to data bytes 0-127.)
84
Configuration
DEC Character Set
Pressing YES prints out the present DEC character set configuration:
•
8 Bit DEC (factory default)
•
7 Bit DEC
8 Bit DEC: The U.S./Multilingual 8-Bit DEC Character Set (8-bit control
code map + G0 & G2 character maps) is shown on Page 43. Instead of
the U.S. or multilingual character map, you can select one of 11 others
using the character (graphics) maps.
7 Bit DEC: The U.S. 7-Bit DEC Character Set is the left-hand half of the
8-bit character set shown on Page 43. Instead of the U.S. national-use
character map, you can select multilingual or one of 11 others using the
character (graphics) maps.
Character Maps G0 through G3
Pressing YES to G0, G1, G2, or G3 prints out the present national-use
graphics map selection:
• Multilingual (G2 factory default)
• Sweden
• VT100 Line Draw (G1 factory
• Italy (ANSI)
default)
• United States (G0 & G3 factory
• Spain
default)
• France
• Hebrew
• Germany
• Finland
• United Kingdom
• Canada (French)
• Denmark
For more information on DEC national-use graphic maps, see Appendix
D.
Operator's Guide
85
Overlay Characters
Pressing YES prints out the present settings:
•
None (factory default)
•
OCR A
•
OCR B
•
Accept User-Defined Characters
You can alter any active character set by overlaying one or more
characters with either a predefined or a customized character map.
The printer contains two sets of predefined optical character recognition
(OCR) maps. If you press YES to either OCR A or OCR B, the printer
overlays some of the characters in the active characters set with these
OCR characters. Your selection also becomes the default condition when
you turn on the printer; for example, if you have selected the OCR A
overlay and the NLQ* mode as defaults, then the active characters are
OCR A characters when you turn on the printer. See Appendix D for OCR
character maps.
If you press YES to "Accept User-Defined Characters," then downloaded
characters presently in and/or subsequently downloaded to RAM using
universal control commands can be mapped to the active character set.
For the printer to accept downloaded customized characters, "Input Buffer
Size" must be set to "Minimum" (Page 70). Unlike ROM-resident OCR
characters, RAM-resident downloaded characters are lost when you turn
off the printer.
*
OCR characters are only allowed in Near Letter Quality (NLQ) mode. You cannot print OCR in draft quality
mode.
86
Configuration
BARCODE OPTIONS
Pressing YES prints out the first of the barcode options listed below:
•
Barcode Strike
•
Barcode Density
•
Barcode Strike
Pressing YES prints out the active setting:
•
Double Strike (factory default)
•
Single Strike
Double Strike: For barcodes, double strike is analogous to bold text. For
this, the printhead carriage moves slightly to the right and reprints the
same single-strike pattern.
Single Strike: For barcodes, single strike is analogous to normal text.
The width of a single strike varies, depending on the barcode symbology.
For more on this, see Appendix E.
Barcode Density
Pressing YES prints out the active setting:
•
75 dpi (factory default)
•
100 dpi
75 dpi: For barcodes, 75 dpi is analogous to draft quality mode. If the
barcode reader successfully reads a low-density barcode, choosing the 75
dpi barcode density increases printer throughput. The 75 dpi setting may
actually enhance readability.
100 dpi: For barcodes, 100 dots per in. is analogous to near letter quality
mode. Use 100 dpi for USPS PostNet.
Operator's Guide
87
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Pressing YES prints out the first of the system options listed below:
•
Factory Reset
•
Lock Character Set and Emulation
•
Initialize Sensitivity
•
Vertical Alignment
•
Factory Reset
Note: If you reset the configuration menu settings to factory defaults, all
custom characters previously downloaded with universal control
commands are lost.
Press YES to reset all configuration menu settings to factory defaults.
Before actually resetting, the printer prints "Reset Menu Settings to
Defaults?" Press YES to execute the factory reset. After a couple of
seconds, the printer prints “Reset Done.”
Lock Character Set and Emulation
Pressing YES prints out the active setting:
•
Off (factory default)
•
On
Pressing YES to "On" causes the printer to hide configuration menu
selections for "Emulation" (Page 80) and "Character Options" (Page 81).
With the character set and emulation locked, the options, queries, and
settings for "Emulation" and "Character Options" do not appear as you
navigate through the configuration menu. However, the emulation and
88
Configuration
character set settings and options are printed out when you select "Status
Print?" (Page 56) or "Print All Options?" (Page 58).
Initialize Sensitivity
Pressing YES prints out the active setting:
•
Low (factory default)
•
High
The initialize sensitivity setting applies only to the INIT* signal (Pin 31) on
the parallel interface.
Low: Low sensitivity means that the printer requires an active-low INIT*
pulse of at least 100 ms in order to reset the printer to its power-up default
settings.
In most situations, prefer low sensitivity, especially when using overly long
parallel interface cables (over 10 ft) or when dealing with an electronically
noisy computer-printer connection.
High: High sensitivity means that the printer requires an active-low INIT*
pulse of at least 1.66 µs in order to reset the printer to its power-up default
settings.
Use high sensitivity when the INIT* pulse is short, such as with an IBM
3197 terminal.
Vertical Alignment
Pressing YES allows you to adjust the printer's right-versus-left-pass
timing for firing printhead pins. See "Vertical Image Alignment" (Page
110) for the procedure.
Maintenance
WARNINGS !
! Turn off printer and unplug power cord before attempting any
maintenance procedure.
! Hazardous voltages are present in the 4100 printer. Equipment repair
must be performed only by service-trained personnel who are aware of
the hazards involved.
! Double-Pole/Neutral Fusing. The 4100 printer contains two fuses in the
power receptable. It is possible for only one fuse to blow. If this occurs,
be warned that, even though the POWER indicator is not lit, some printer
electrical circuit may remain active. ALWAYS turn off the printer and
unplug the power cord before checking the cause of the blown fuse(s) and
before replacing the fuse(s).
! Use only the fuses specified. Never use repaired fuses, and never shortcircuit a fuse holder.
90
Maintenance
STATIC ELECTRICITY
Static electricity occurs when objects become electrically charged. When
charged with static electricity, objects tend to attract or repel other objects.
Static electricity can build up on paper. The printer paper can become
charged with static electricity as it moves from the feeder slot to the
printer's acoustic hood. If the static electricity is not discharged from the
paper as it exits the printer, the paper tends to cling to the printer (or
printer stand) and resist stacking.
Fortunately, the acoustic hood is designed to draw off this static electricity.
For this reason, the manufacturer recommends that you always use the
acoustic hood to reduce static electricity, as well as to reduce printer
noise. If you do use the printer without the acoustic hood, there are still
ways to control or eliminate static electricity.
Temperature, humidity, and other factors influence static buildup:
•
Low relative humidity tends to encourage static buildup. Prefer to
keep the relative humidity in the printer room above 40%.
In general, since warmer environments tend to have higher relative
humidity levels, prefer a warmer room to a colder one.
•
Avoid storing paper in an overly dry location. Instead, store paper at
the same temperature and humidity levels of the printer, or allow paper
to acclimate overnight before loading that paper in the printer.
Besides encouraging static electricity, an overly dry location robs
paper of its built-in moisture content. (Typically, 5% of paper weight is
water.) When paper loses this built-in moisture, it curls.
Operator's Guide
•
91
Wool, as well as many synthetic carpeting materials, are notorious for
causing static electricity. If the site has carpeting, consider using an
anti-static spray on the area surrounding the printer or place an antistatic mat under the printer stand. If you use an anti-static spray, do
not spray the printer or the paper.
CLEANING
Warning !
Remember to turn off power and unplug the printer
before cleaning interior or exterior surfaces.
INTERIOR SURFACES
Paper dust is inevitable. If desired, use a vacuum cleaner to remove
paper dust from the area beneath the ribbon cartridge and printhead
carriage. Prefer using a vacuum cleaner specially designed for electronic
equipment. Avoid canned or compressed air, which can force dust and
dirt into printer mechanisms.
Before you vacuum, remove the ribbon cartridge (Page 99). While you
vacuum, move the printhead carriage from side to side to vacuum debris
from under the carriage path. Do not force vacuum attachments into
hard-to-reach places; and limit vacuuming to the area directly beneath the
cartridge and carriage. Absolute cleanliness is not necessary.
Never use a liquid cleaner—including soap and water—inside the printer.
92
Maintenance
EXTERIOR SURFACES
Surfaces, including the operator access window, can be cleaned with a
soft cloth dampened with soap and water. (Remember: The cloth should
be moist—not dripping wet.)
Avoid petroleum-based cleaners and solvents such as lighter fluid, paint
thinner, and the like. If necessary, use a commercial cleaner, such as
409*, to clean ink from surfaces. When using a spray, apply the cleaner
to a soft cloth and then apply to the printer. Isopropyl alcohol (70%-90%)
can be used instead of a commercial cleaner, except as noted below.
Caution !
DO NOT use alcohol on the switch panel. Alcohol, if
it seeps beneath the keypad, weakens the adhesive
that binds the keypad laminates.
LUBRICATION
Periodic lubrication is not required.
All moving parts are either lubricated for life or require no special periodic
lubrication. In fact, unwarranted lubrication could cause damage or
impaired performance.
*
409 is a brand name of The Clorox Company.
Operator's Guide
93
CHANGING RIBBON CARTRIDGE
Important ! For best results and longest printer life, insist on
genuine, factory-approved, ribbon cartridges. (Reinked or remanufactured ribbon cartridges are not
suitable.) Obtain factory-approved ribbon cartridges
from your dealer or directly from the printer
manufacturer. See the front of this operator's guide
for information on ordering ribbon cartridges.
Replace the ribbon cartridge if it becomes frayed or the print density is too
light. Replace with a genuine, factory-approved ribbon cartridge.
Refer to the following illustration for removing and installing a ribbon
cartridge.
Ribbon Cartridge (Top View of Operator Access)
To remove a ribbon cartridge, proceed as follows:
Warning !
After printing, printheads are hot.
JB0-AP
94
Maintenance
Note: You need not remove paper to change the ribbon cartridge.
1. Turn off the printer or place printer off line.
2. Open the operator access door.
3. Move the printhead carriage to the center of the printer.
4. Move the printhead gap adjustment lever as far as possible toward the
front of the printer to open the gap as wide as possible between the
platen and printheads.
5. Pull up all of the ribbon guides to remove them from their printheads.
6. Lift the cartridge straight up and out of the printer.
To install a ribbon cartridge, proceed as follows:
Note: Replacement ribbon cartridges include three ribbon guides. The
three ribbon guides are only loosely attached to the ribbon. If a
ribbon guide has come off the ribbon, see "The Clean Way to Reattach a Ribbon Guide," (Page 103).
1. Move the ribbon guides toward the center of the ribbon, and make
sure the ribbon is taut.
If necessary, turn the ribbon feed wheel in the direction of the arrow
until the ribbon is taut.
2. Insert the ribbon cartridge into the printer so that the tabs on the right
and left ends of the ribbon cartridge slip through the slots provided in
the operator access way. Guide the tabs into the retaining slots
provided at each end of the printer mechanism.
Operator's Guide
Installing Ribbon Cartridge (Left-End View)
3. Gently press down on the cartridge until it quietly snaps into place.
4. Be sure the ribbon is taut and then slip the ribbon guides onto the
printheads.
5. Take up the slack again and then check the ribbon for twists.
Make sure that the ribbon is not obstructed or bound up at the
cartridge's entrance and exit slots.
95
JB0-AT
96
Maintenance
6. Manually slide the printhead carriage back and forth.
If the ribbon feed wheel spins (on the left-to-right pass of the carriage),
the ribbon cartridge is installed correctly. If not, remove the cartridge
and re-install.
7. Adjust the printhead gap using the printhead gap adjustment lever. (If
necessary, see "Adjusting the Printhead Gap," Page 27.)
Operator's Guide
97
The Clean Way To Re-Attach a Ribbon Guide
1. Lay the ribbon cartridge face down on a table, as shown below.
2. Make sure the ribbon is taut. If not, turn the ribbon feed wheel in the direction of the
arrow until the ribbon is taut.
3. Determine the proper position of the ribbon guide.
The ribbon guides are labeled Left, Middle, and Right. The guides are physically
different and therefore not interchangeable.
4. Hold a pencil under the ribbon, as shown below, and slip on the ribbon guide so that
the handle on the ribbon guide is at the top of the cartridge. The ribbon should be
positioned under the ribbon guide posts.
5. Remove the pencil and use it to slip the ribbon under the spurs on the guide.
The Clean Way To Re-Attach a Ribbon Guide
JB0-AQ
98
Maintenance
CHANGING FORMS COMPRESSOR
The forms compressor is located between the platen and the printhead
carriage, as shown in the illustration. Its purpose is to hold the paper flat
against the platen during printing.
Forms compressor replacement is required only if it is broken, bent, or
worn.
To change a forms compressor, proceed as follows:
1. Turn off printer and unplug the power cord.
2. Open the operator access door.
3. Note the setting of the printhead gap adjustment lever and then
remove paper and ribbon cartridge. (If necessary, see "To remove a
ribbon cartridge," Page 100.)
4. Make sure the printhead gap adjustment lever is toward the front of the
printer as far as possible.
Operator's Guide
Forms Compressor (Left End)
99
JB0-AR1
5. Lift the forms compressor off the alignment tabs near both ends.
6. Make sure the forms compressor clears the paper out sensor, and
then lift the forms compressor out of the printer.
7. Slightly bend the new forms compressor, as shown in the following
illustration, and slip past the printheads.
8. As you push the forms compressor down, keep it bent on the left side
so that it clears the paper out sensor.
100
Maintenance
Installing a Forms Compressor
JB0-AS1
9. Tuck the bottom of the forms compressor into the holder at the bottom
of the printer compartment, and then adjust the forms compressor side
to side so that it fits over the alignment tabs.
10. Make sure that the paper out sensor protrudes through its hole in the
forms compressor and recheck that the forms compressor is correctly
positioned over the alignment tabs.
11. Re-install the ribbon cartridge (Page 100) and paper (Page 21).
Operator's Guide 101
CHANGING FUSES
Caution !
Double pole/neutral fusing.
The printer contains two fuses in a compartment just above the power
receptacle near the left-rear corner of the printer.
If a fuse "blows," turn off power and unplug the power cord. Attempt to
find the cause of the blown fuse before putting in a new fuse or fuses.
To change a fuse, proceed as follows:
1. Note the voltage selection in the window of the fuse compartment.
2. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to open fuse compartment, as
shown in the illustration on Page 109.
3. Pull out voltage selection tumbler.
4. Pull out fuse holder(s).
5. Check blown fuse(s).
Note: If one or both fuses are shattered, this indicates a short circuit in
the printer receptacle or in the printer's primary power supply. If a
fuse is shattered, do not attempt to replace the fuse; simply unplug
the printer and call one of the numbers listed in the front of this
operator's guide to obtain qualified servicing.
6. Obtain new fuse(s):
•
For 100 or 120 Vac, use two, 3.00 a., slow-blow fuses (1¼ in. x ¼
in.), rated at 250 v.
•
For 220 or 240 Vac, use two, 1.6 a., time-delay fuses (5 mm x 20
mm), rated at 250 v.
102
Maintenance
7. Re-insert both fuse holders (with proper fuses) with the arrows facing
right, and then re-insert voltage selection tumbler.
Make sure that the same voltage selection noted in Step 1 faces out
through the window of the fuse compartment.
8. Close the compartment.
Opening Fuse Compartment
DA0-E
Changing Fuses
DA0-F
Operator's Guide 103
VERTICAL IMAGE ALIGNMENT
The configuration menu provides a simple means of making slight
compensations in the factory's vertical alignment setting.
The printer is a bidirectional printer, meaning it prints text not only on leftto-right passes of the printhead carriage, but also on right-to-left passes.
Vertical alignment simply adjusts the relative timing between bidirectional
passes so that consecutive lines line up vertically.
Vertical alignment only affects draft text if “Bi-Directional Graphics/NLQ” in
the configuration menu is off. If off, graphics, NLQ text, and text printed
as graphics, such as TrueType text, are printed only on left-to-right
passes of the printhead carriage.
To check or change vertical alignment, proceed as follows:
1. For a wide carriage printer, make sure that wide (14 7/8 in.) paper is
installed in the printer.
2. Enter the configuration menu:
If the printer is off, press FORM FEED while turning on the printer.
+
104
Maintenance
If the printer is on, press and hold ON LINE while simultaneously pressing
FORM FEED and LINE FEED.
+
+
3. If necessary, check and/or change the Char/Inch setting under PRINT
STYLE in the configuration menu.
Note: Select a preferred characters-per-inch setting, since vertical
alignment varys slightly for different pitches.
4. Select “System Options” in the configuration menu.
5. See the Note below and then select “Vertical Alignment.”
Note: Vertical alignment must be set at normal print speed.
As a safety feature, when using “fast pitch” (10 pitch printing),
the printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is
open. To cancel half-speed printing during vertical alignment,
press and hold TOF while the printer prints out the test patterns.
Operator's Guide 105
The printer prints a two-line pattern of vertical lines. The top row of
lines should be vertically in line with the bottom row:
Proper Vertical Alignment
||||||
||||||
Back or Next to adjust, Yes when done
||||||
||||||
Improper Vertical Alignment
||||||
||||||
Back or Next to adjust, Yes when done
||||||
||||||
If the top line is too far to the left, as shown above, press NEXT to
move the top line to the right.
If the top line is too far to the right, then press BACK to move the top
print line to the left.
The printer prints out the result of the re-alignment.
5. Continue using BACK and NEXT to align the two lines.
6. When finished with vertical alignment, press YES to save the
alignment and to proceed to the next configuration menu option.
7. Press EXIT twice to leave the configuration menu.
106
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
WARNINGS !
! Hazardous voltages are present in the 4100 printer. With the enclosure
removed and power applied, hazardous voltage areas are present.
Equipment service must be performed only by service-trained personnel
who are aware of the hazards involved.
! Double-Pole/Neutral Fusing. The 4100 printer contains two fuses in the
power receptable. It is possible for only one fuse to blow. If this occurs,
be warned that, even though the POWER indicator is not lit, some printer
electrical circuit may remain active. ALWAYS turn off the printer and
unplug the power cord before checking the cause of the blown fuse(s) and
before replacing the fuse(s).
! Use only the fuses specified. Never use repaired fuses, and never shortcircuit a fuse holder.
108
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Today's computers, printers, and other electronic equipment are, by and
large, more reliable than those of just a few years ago. But still troubles
occur.
If you have trouble with your printer, expect the best, not the worst,
because most times the solution to the problem is quite simple.
The following table outlines most minor and major problems along with
recommended solutions. If you need additional assistance, though,
please call our customer service department—they are more than happy
to help. (See the front of this guide for appropriate voice/fax numbers and
addresses.) If you call, please have your printer model and serial
numbers handy—these numbers are located on the back of the printer.
Use the following questions to begin to identify the problem with the
printer:
1. If the printer is not doing anything, is it on line, turned on, plugged in?
If no power, also check fuses (Page 107) and the wall receptacle. If
the POWER indicator is not lit, see "Switch Panel" (Page 127) in the
troubleshooting chart.
2. Is the ON LINE indicator lit?
If not, run the power-up sequence test by simply turning off and then
turning on the printer. (See "Power-Up Sequence Test," Page 131.)
The ON LINE indicator flashes if the operator access door is open.
3. Are there any beeps?
If so, see "Beeps" (Page 119).
4. Are there any printed messages?
Operator’s Guide 109
If so, see "Messages, Printed" (Page 120).
5. Is the interface cable securely connected and is the printer responding
to the host computer?
If not, see "Communications" (Page 129).
6. Is the paper and ribbon installed properly?
7. Is the paper path obstructed?
8. Did you change paper, ribbon, configuration settings, computers,
ports, print drivers, power receptacles or cords, printhead gap just
before the problem occurred?
If so, double-check to be sure the procedure is completed and correct.
9. Any problem with switch panel control of the printer: for example,
indicators that do not light, switches that do not seem to work?
If so, see "Switch Panel" (Page 127).
10. Does there seem to be a problem with computer control of the printer.
or is the format, print mode, spacing, etc. wrong?
If so, see "Communications" (Page 129).
11. Does the problem manifest itself as a paper problem or a print
positioning problem?
For paper problems (jams, positioning, PAPER indicator), see "Paper
Problems" (Page 124).
For a print positioning problem (not printing in the right place), see
"Print Positioning" (Page 123) and "Communications" (Page 129).
12. Have you attempted a self test printout?
110
Troubleshooting
To do so, press and hold LINE FEED while turning on the printer:
If the print is smudged, faded, broken, and the like, see "Print Quality"
(Page 120).
If the printhead carriage moves too slowly or makes noise, see
"Printhead Performance" (Page 130).
To stop the printout, press ON LINE.
13. Have you attempted to print a status page?
To do so, press and hold FORM FEED while turning on the printer.
The printer prints the question "HELP OPTIONS" Press YES. The
printer then prints "Status Print ?" Again, press YES. Check printout
for incorrect settings.
Operator’s Guide 111
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
BEEPs
Four-Second
BEEEEEEEEP With
PAPER OUT Lit
Beep-BEEP-BeepBEEP-Beep-BEEP
1. Paper Out
1. Install paper (Page 21).
2. Left Tractor Too Far to
Right
2. Move the left tractor to the far
left so that paper covers the
paper out sensor.
3. Bad Paper Out Sensor
3. Call for service.
Paper Jam
Clear jam.
Long Intermittent String of
Bad Serial Data
1. Check printer's "Set Serial
Options" in configuration menu
against those of host.
(Three High-Low Beeps)
With PAPER OUT
Flashing
Endless BEEP-BEEPBEEP-BEEP-BEEP etc.*
2. Check data from host using
hex dump mode (Page 132).
3. Call for service.
1 Short followed by
4 Short-Long Beeps:
SSSSS
SSSSL
SSSLS
Recoverable Memory Error:
5 Long Beeps (LLLLL)
Nonrecoverable Error
*
If problem persists, call for
service.
ROM Checksum Error
EEPROM Error
Bad ROM
Turn off printer to stop beeping.
Press ON LINE to solicit specific
beep patterns, if any. Record
beep pattern; see list that follows.
Cycle printer off/on to reset.
112
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Nonrecoverable Errors:
Record beep pattern. Press
ON LINE to solicit still other
patterns, if any.
BEEPs, continued
1 Long followed by
4 Short-Long
Beeps:
LSSSS
LSSSL
LSSLS
LSSLL
LSLSS
LSLSL
LSLLS
LSLLL
LLSSS
LLSSL
LLSLS*
LLSLL
LLLSL
Printhead #1 Error
Printhead #2 Error
Printhead #3 Error
Carriage Motor Overcurrent
Carriage Motor Driven
Overtemperature
HV Error
24 vdc** Error
12 vdc Error
Tachometer Overrun Error
Linefeed Motor Overcurrent
Tachometer Timeout Error
Processor Error
Synthesis Counter Overrun
Turn off and then turn on
printer to reset. If problem
persists, record beep
pattern(s) and call for service.
Messages, Printed
ROM ERROR
Bad Checksum
Press ON LINE. If problem
persists, call for service.
NONVOLATILE
RAM CHECKSUM - Setting Default
Parameters***
New Checksum Does not
Match Previous Checksum
Press ON LINE. If problem
persists, call for service.
*
Will occur if the carriage is impeded by an obstruction.
**
Used for dc cooling fan.
*** The printer returns to factory default setting. This often happens when upgrading firmware.
Operator’s Guide 113
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Print Quality
No Printout
Characters Too Light
1. No Ribbon Cartridge, or
Cartridge Not Installed
Properly
1. Re-install ribbon cartridge
(Page 100).
2. Ribbon Twisted
2. Check ribbon.
1. Printhead Gap Too Wide
1. Adjust printhead gap (Page
27).
2. Ribbon Worn Out
2. Replace ribbon (Page 100).
Fading Print
Characters are OK, Then
Begin to Break Up
1. Worn Out Ribbon
1. Replace ribbon (Page 100).
2. Ribbon Not Advancing,
or Motor or Electronics
Failure
2. Re-install or replace ribbon
(Page 100). If problem
persists, call for service.
Electronics Failure
Call for service.
1. Printheads Too Close to
Paper
1. Re-adjust printhead gap (Page
27).
2. Worn Ribbon and/or
Ribbon Guides
2. Examine. If necessary,
replace ribbon cartridge (Page
100).
(Carriage May Hit
Bumper)
Smudging
3. Printhead Blend Needs
Adjusting
Bottom Half of
Characters Missing
Forms Compressor Not On
Alignment Tabs
3. Call for service.
Check that forms compressor is
properly positioned over right and
left alignment tabs.
114
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Print Quality, continued
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Scanner Will not Read
Barcodes
1. Barcode Density Too
Low
1. Set density in configuration
menu to 100 dpi (Page 91).
2. Vertical Misalignment
During Bi-Directional
Printing
2. Re-adjust vertical alignment in
configuration menu (Page 93).
If necessary, turn off bidirectional printing in
configuration menu (Page 73).
3. Worn Out Ribbon
3. Replace ribbon (Page 100).
Try double strike printing
(Page 91).
Scanner Will not Read
PostNet Barcodes
1. See “Scanner Will not Read Barcodes” above
2. PostNet Mode (text
versus graphics)
2. Prefer PostNet text mode.
(See Appendix E.)
Italics (Epson Emulation)
Printout is ALL (or partly)
Italics and Should not Be
Characters used are from
the Upper Half of the
Character Set
Use data bytes 32-127 for upright
characters and 160-255 for italic
characters.
Operating Systems Such
as UNIX Routinely Use
Characters in Upper Half
of Character Set
In configuration menu, change the
number of data bits in “Serial
Options” from 8 to 7 bits.
Margin Drift
Belt Too Loose or Motor
Failure
Call for service.
Print Shifts Right or Left
Until Carriage Hits
Bumper
Carriage Belt is Slipping
At Belt Clamp
Call for service.
Entire Paragraphs Print
Out on One Line
No Line Feeds From Host
In configuration menu, change
"LF on CR" from "Off" to "On".
(Both Parallel and Serial
Interfaces)
Printout is ALL (or partly)
Italics and Should not Be
(Serial Interface Only)
Print Positioning
Operator’s Guide 115
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Print Positioning, continued
Blank Lines Between
Every Line of Print
Printer and Host Both
Supplying Line Feeds
In configuration menu, change
"LF on CR" from "On" to "Off".
Prints Across Horizontal
Perforation
1. Wrong Configuration
Setting
1. In configuration menu, change
"Skip Perf" from "Off" to "On".
2. Host Changing Forms
Settings
2. Check print driver settings of
host software. If necessary,
use hex dump mode (Page
132) to check control codes
sent by host.
Prints Across Left
Vertical Perforation
Paper Too Far to the Right
The left tractor should be
positioned at the far left stop.
Prints Across Right
Vertical Perforation
Normal
Form, column, and margin widths
are controlled by the host
software. Unformatted text prints
a full carriage-width line.*
Paper Problems (Positioning, Feeding, Paper Out, Jamming)
PAPER Lit
(With Paper Installed)
PAPER Flashing
*
1. Left Tractor Too Far to
Right
1. Move the left tractor to the far
left so that paper covers the
paper out sensor.
2. Paper Out Sensor Lever
Needs Adjusting
2. Call for service.
3. Bad Paper Out Sensor
or Electronics Failure
3. Call for service.
Paper Jam
Clear Jam.
Avoid printing directly on the platen.
116
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Paper Problems (Positioning, Feeding, Paper Out, Jamming), continued
Paper Does not Feed
When Printing
Host Not Sending Line
Feeds with Carriage
Returns
In configuration mode, under "Set
Forms Options" set "LF on CR" to
"On".
Paper Does not Feed
When Using Switch
Panel
Switch Panel or Electronics
Failure
Call for service.
Paper Does not Feed
Reliably
1. Paper Supply Not
Positioned Correctly
1. Align paper supply so it is in
line with the paper feed
tractors.
(Frequent Tears, and/or
Paper Jams)
2. Paper Stretched Too
Tight
2. Release tension on paper by
moving right tractor slightly
closer to left tractor.
3. Paper hanging up on
front of stand or table
during front feed.
3. Make sure front feed path is
unobstructed. Prefer the
bottom feed path.
4. Paper Hanging Up on
Paper Box
4. Trim box (as shown below) or
remove paper from box.
5. Paper Too Heavy or
Light for Front Feed
Path
5. Consider using the bottom
feed path.
AB0-J
Operator’s Guide 117
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Paper Problems (Positioning, Feeding, Paper Out, Jamming), continued
Paper Does not Feed
1. Obstruction
(Both On and Off Line)
2. Mechanical or
Electronics Failure
Top of Form Ignored or
Paper Slews to Wrong
TOF Setting
1. Check paper path for
obstruction.
2. Call for service.
1. Wrong Form Length
Setting
1. Check the "Form Length"
setting (Page 77) in the
configuration menu.
2. Host Changing Forms
Settings
2. Check print driver settings of
host software. If necessary,
use hex dump mode (Page
132) to check control codes
sent by host.
3. Electronic Failure
3. Call for service.
Switch Panel
Self Test or Menu
Printout Occurs Without
Being Selected
Switch Panel or Electronics
Failure
Call for service.
No Response to Keys
Power Problem
Perform a Power-Up Sequence
Test (Page 131).
Switch Panel or Electronics
Failure
Call for service.
Switch Panel or Electronics
Failure
Call for service.
(Power On, but POWER
is Not Lit)
No Response to Keys
(POWER is Lit)
Paper Does not Feed
When Using Switch
Panel
118
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Communications
Character or Control
Problems With Any
Interface
Problems When Using
Serial Interface Only:
1. Printer's Menu Settings
Have Been Superseded
by Host
1. Normal. Host computer
commands override printer
configuration settings for print
style, characters set, and
forms control. (These printer
configuration settings are only
effective until the host changes
the settings using printer
control commands.)
2. Printer Off or Off line
2. Check.
3. Blown Fuse
3. Replace fuse (Page 107).
4. Electronics Failure
4. Call for service.
1. Wrong Serial Interface
Settings
1. Host and printer settings for
baud, data bits, parity, and
stop bits must be the same.
Check "Serial Options" (Page
64) in printer's configuration
mode.
• Garbled text with
numerous "?"
characters
• No printout
• Printer prints a few
pages and quits
2. Loose or Bad Interface
Cable
3. Bad Data
2. Check. If necessary, replace
interface cable.
4. Electronics Failure
3. Check data using hex dump
mode (Page 132).
4. Call for service.
Operator’s Guide 119
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, CONTINUED
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
Communications, continued
Problems When Using
Parallel Interface Only
1. Loose or Bad Interface
Cable
1. Check. If necessary, replace
interface cable.
2. Bad Data
2. Check data using hex dump
mode (Page 132).
3. Electronics Failure
3. Call for service.
Printhead Performance*
Printheads Click!**
(Just When Printer is
Turned Off)
Carriage Speed Too
Slow
Printhead Snags Ribbon
Printhead Electronics
Failure
Call for service.
1. Obstruction
1. Check for and remove any
material impeding carriage.
2. Belt Tension Too Tight
or Loose, Bad Carriage
Bearing, or Electronics
Failure
2. Call for service.
1. Worn Ribbon
1. Replace ribbon (Page 100).
2. Printhead or Electronics
Failure
2. Call for service.
*
If accompanied by beeping, see BEEPS.
**
The sound of a printhead hammer or hammers striking paper.
120
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS
POWER-UP SEQUENCE TEST
The normal start-up sequence for the printer is detailed in the following
table. The printer performs this sequence each time the printer is turned
on.
After Turning
On Printer,
Observe the
Following:
Meaning That :
If Not Observed :
A. Indicators light
briefly.
POWER
indicator
remains on.
Power is applied to
printer. Main power
supply is operating OK
and feeding power to
switch panel.
Check power receptacle,
power cable, and printer
fuses (Page 107). If
necessary, call for
service.
B. Printhead
carriage
moves right to
left, then stops
at extreme
left.
Carriage motor functions
properly. While tracking,
the printer checks
position of the printhead
carriage and then parks
the carriage at its "home"
position in preparation for
printing.
Check for an obstruction.
If necessary, call for
service.
Operator’s Guide 121
POWER-UP SEQUENCE TEST, CONTINUED
After Turning
On Printer,
Observe the
Following:
Meaning That :
If Not Observed :
C. Printer chirps.
Printer is mechanically
and electronically OK. (A
manual off line/on line
cycle also causes this
chirp.)
Call for service.
D. ON LINE
indicator
lights.
Printer is ready for
operation.
If ON LINE does not light,
check for paper out,
paper jam, printhead
carriage obstruction. If it
flashes, close the
operator access door. If
necessary, call for
service.
HEX DUMP MODE
The hexadecimal (hex) dump mode is used for checking:
•
Proper receipt of characters by the printer
•
Control commands
•
Nonprintable codes
122
Troubleshooting
To enter the hex dump mode, do one of the following:
•
Press and hold LINE FEED and FORM FEED and then turn on printer
to place printer in 10 pitch hex dump mode.
The printer prints all transmissions from the host in hex dump format
on 13.6-in. lines.
•
Press and hold ON LINE, LINE FEED, and FORM FEED and then turn
on printer to place printer in 17.14 pitch hex dump mode.
The printer prints all transmissions from the host in hex dump format
on 8-in. lines.
A hex dump shows both the hexadecimal value of all characters received
by the printer and, where possible, also prints the character itself in the
right-hand column. (See the example.) Unprintable characters are
represented as a period (.).
To exit the hex dump mode, turn off printer.
Hex Dump Mode Printout (Example)
JB0-AL
Control Commands
An Introduction
This section explains the following:
•
Communication basics
•
Sending control codes and control commands
•
Identifying data bytes
•
Typographic conventions
COMMUNICATION BASICS
Communication between the computer and printer is accomplished by
exchanging codes that have a predefined meaning. The building blocks
of these codes are bits and bytes.
Bits are the fundamental element of computer communication and may
have one of two values: zero and one. Computers and printers recognize
only these two states: zero and one.
A byte, or data byte, is a group of 8 bits that have significance as a unit.
There are 256 possible patterns of zeros and ones in an 8-bit data byte,
so there are 256 unique data bytes. Individual data bytes are identified by
a number related to the pattern of zeros and ones.
There are different conventions for assigning meaning to individual data
bytes. In the 4100 printer, two different conventions are used:
124
Universal Control Commands
•
In Epson and IBM Proprinter XL emulations, the American Standard
Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) is used.
•
In DEC emulations, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
standards are used.
Aspects of these standards relevant to the emulations contained in the
4100 printer are described in this section.
IDENTIFYING DATA BYTES
Individual data bytes can be identified using one of several number
systems. This section describes three number systems in common use:
•
Binary
•
Decimal
•
Hexadecimal
Three number systems are used because each has advantages in
specific situations. Some understanding of these number systems is
beneficial when working with printers.
Operator’s Guide 125
BINARY NUMBER SYSTEM
Computers use the binary number system. In the binary (base two)
number system, we count from zero (0) to one (1) and then start over
again. All other numbers are expressed using only these two digits.
The pattern of zeros and ones in a data byte can be interpreted as a
binary number. The bit pattern 00001110 can be interpreted as itself, as
the binary number 00001110. Thus, each data byte can be numbered
uniquely for a total of 256 unique bytes.
The number, or value, of the data byte can also be expressed in other
number systems, including the decimal and hexadecimal systems.
DECIMAL NUMBER SYSTEM
The decimal number system is the most common number system. In the
decimal (base ten) number system, counts from zero (0) to nine (9) and
then starts over again. All other numbers are expressed using these ten
digits. The 256 unique data bytes in the binary system can also be
identified with decimal numbers. For example, the data byte with pattern
00001110 can be identified by binary number 00001110 and by decimal
number 14. Both numbers identify the same data byte.
The decimal number system is used in this manual to identify data bytes
unless explicitly stated otherwise.
126
Universal Control Commands
HEXADECIMAL NUMBER SYSTEM
The hexadecimal (hex) number system is used in the computer industry
because its relationship to the binary number system allows convenient
notation. In the hexadecimal (base sixteen) number system, counts from
zero (0) to fifteen (15) and then starts over again. The sixteen digits are
represented by the numbers zero (0) through nine (9) and the letters A
through F. All other numbers are represented using these sixteen
characters.
The 256 unique data bytes in the binary system can be identified with
either decimal or hexadecimal numbers. For example, the data byte with
pattern 00001110 can be identified by decimal number 14, or equally well,
by hexadecimal number 0E.
Operator’s Guide 127
The table below shows equivalent binary, decimal, and hexadecimal
numbers for 17 different data bytes.
Binary
Number
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
00001110
00001111
00010000
Decimal
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Hexadecimal
Number
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
A chart at the end of the Operations section shows corresponding decimal
and hexadecimal numbers for all 256 possible data bytes.
128
Universal Control Commands
THREE CATEGORIES OF DATA BYTES
The printer takes specific action for each data byte received. Two types
of action are possible: A character is printed or a controlling operation is
performed. All data bytes are classified into three categories:
•
Printable characters
•
Control codes
•
Elements in a control sequence or command
Each category is described in the following paragraphs.
Printable Characters
Characters are printable symbols: Letters, numbers, punctuation marks,
graphic shapes, and all other symbols that can be printed as a unit within
a single cell. A blank space is also a valid character.
Control Codes
A control code is a single byte of control information that modifies printer
action. It commands the printer to change something. For example, a
control code sent to the printer might advance the paper to the top of the
next page or it might sound the beeper.
Control codes are assigned to data bytes according to the emulation
active in the printer. Specific assignments are shown in Appendix D. The
majority of the control codes are normally assigned to data bytes between
0 and 31 decimal and between 128 and 159 decimal.
Operator’s Guide 129
Control Commands
A control command is two or more bytes of control information. The first
data byte is the control code that signals the printer to interpret
succeeding data bytes as control information instead of printable
characters or other control codes. In Epson, IBM, and DEC emulations,
this control code is ESC, data byte 27 decimal. Control commands that
begin with ESC are commonly known as escape sequences.
The control code used to introduce the universal control commands (in the
next section) is SOH, data byte 1 decimal.
Control commands are defined by printer manufacturers to provide more
control options than those contained in ASCII or ANSI standards.
Control codes and control commands may be embedded anywhere in the
data stream.
SENDING CONTROL CODES AND CONTROL
COMMANDS
You can send commands to the printer with any programming language.
Techniques vary with the hardware and software used. In many cases, it
is done automatically by the application program. Several examples are
shown here for illustration.
130
Universal Control Commands
USING BASIC TO SEND COMMANDS
Using BASIC, the control sequence to set the top margin to line 6 in DEC
emulation can be sent with the following program:
ASCII sequence:
ESC
[
6
r
Control sequence in decimal:
27
91
54
BASIC program:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6r";
114
To set the left margin to Column 6 and the right margin to Column 76 in
IBM Proprinter XL emulation, the following program could be used:
ASCII sequence:
ESC
X
!
L
Control sequence in decimal:
27
88
6
76
BASIC program:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"X";CHR$(6);CHR$(76);
USING BATCH FILES TO SEND COMMANDS
If you are running DOS on your computer, you can create batch files to
send the necessary data stream to the printer. For example, to select 12pitch, single-strike printing in Epson emulation, the control command is
ESC ! (1). (The parentheses around "1" identify this as parameter 1,
which in the Epson emulation is decimal or hexadecimal 1—not the ASCII
character 1, which would be decimal 49 or hexadecimal 31.) In this
example, we make use of the fact that, in Epson and IBM #1 character
sets, data byte value 155 is also the ESC control code. Create a batch
file by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
COPY CON 12PITCH.BAT
ECHO ¢!^A > PRN
^Z
•
The first line tells the computer to copy the lines that follow into the file
named "12PITCH.BAT". The ".BAT" extension identifies the file as a
batch file.
Operator’s Guide 131
•
The second line is the command that is performed whenever you use
this batch file. Enter Ç by pressing the ALT key and entering 155 from
the numeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard. Data byte value
155 is also an ESC control code in Epson and IBM #1 character sets.
•
Enter ! by typing !. Enter ^A by pressing the ALT key and entering "1"
from the numeric keypad. Data byte value 01 decimal is represented
by an ^A on the screen, or occasionally by the smiley face.
•
The third line closes the file, saving it as named in Line 1. Enter ^Z by
pressing the CTRL key and entering Z from the keyboard or by pressing
function key F6.
Once the batch file is created, type the name of the file when you want to
send the control command to select 12 pitch to the printer. Type the
following at the DOS prompt:
12PITCH
The same command can be sent using the following BASIC program:
ASCII sequence:
ESC ! <smiley face>
BASIC program:
LPRINT CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(1);
BASIC program:
LPRINT CHR$(&H1B);CHR$(&H21);CHR$(&H01);
or,
where the prefix &H is used to denote hexadecimal numbers.
132
Universal Control Commands
SENDING COMMANDS FROM THE DOS COMMAND
LINE
Commands can also be issued directly from the DOS command line by
typing the following:
ECHO (command data) > PRN
The command to select 12-pitch, single-strike printing in Epson emulation
could be sent from the DOS command line as follows:
ASCII sequence:
Command line:
ESC ! <smiley face>
ECHO ¢!^A > PRN
USING CONTROL KEY SEQUENCES TO SEND
COMMANDS
Commands composed of a single control code may be sent using a
control key sequence corresponding to the assigned data byte.
Where control key sequence formats are shown in this manual, CTRL
represents the control key on the computer keyboard, not individual
characters to be typed. Control key sequences (for example, CTRL A) are
sent by pressing the control key (CTRL) together with the key for the
specified character. If CTRL does not appear before a character within the
sequence, the key for that character is pressed alone.
The table below shows ASCII control codes assigned to data bytes 0
through 31 (decimal) and the corresponding control key sequence.
Operator’s Guide 133
Decimal
Value
Hexadecimal
Value
ASCII
Name
Control Key
Sequence
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
CTRL @
CTRL A
CTRL B
CTRL C
CTRL D
CTRL E
CTRL F
CTRL G
CTRL H
CTRL I
CTRL J
CTRL K
CTRL L
CTRL M
CTRL N
CTRL O
CTRL P
CTRL Q
CTRL R
CTRL S
CTRL T
CTRL U
CTRL V
CTRL W
CTRL X
CTRL Y
CTRL Z
CTRL [
CTRL \
CTRL ]
CTRL ^
CTRL _
134
Universal Control Commands
TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS
This subsection describes the typographic conventions used in
descriptions of control codes and control commands throughout this
manual.
FORMAT
Spaces are never sent to the printer as part of the command. For
readability, the arguments of the command are shown separated by
spaces.
Character case is significant. For example, if R is shown as part of the
command, an uppercase R must be sent.
The format for entering each control code or control command is shown
as follows:
ASCII:
the sequence in ASCII character
Control: the sequence in control characters
Decimal: the sequence in decimal data bytes
Hexadecimal:
the sequence in hexadecimal data bytes
All four command formats are equivalent.
Operator’s Guide 135
PARAMETERS
Parameters are indicated with the following notations:
•
(n), (n1), (n2), etc. and (d),(d1),(d2), etc. The printer expects to receive
a data byte for each parameter.
The parentheses are not sent, only the value of parameter n or d. For
example, if n=1 in Epson, IBM, or most universal control commands,
then a decimal value of 1, not the ASCII character 1, is sent to the
printer. On the other hand, in DEC control commands, n=1 is the
value of ASCII character 1 (decimal 49). In some universal control
commands, you can specify n=1 as either decimal 1 or as the ASCII
character 1.
•
(n1)...(n10): The printer expects to receive from one to ten specific
parameters.
•
(n1) + (n2 x 256): Because the printer does not use decimal numbers
larger than 255, some commands use two bytes of data (n1 and n2) to
specify one value. Both n1 and n2 must be in the range 0 to 255.
Two data bytes must be supplied even if only one is needed. If a
value less than 256 is needed, n1 is the number itself and n2 is 0. For
values equal to or greater than 256, divide the total number needed by
256. n2 is the number of complete groups of 256, and n1 is the
remainder.
If you are using a programming language with MOD (modulus) and INT
(integer) functions, you can use the following formulas, in which n is the
total number needed:
n1 = n MOD 256
n2 = INT (n/256)
136
Universal Control Commands
This formula for determining n1 and n2 is used for graphics commands
and for specifying a range of characters in some commands (such as the
commands to map or download characters).
DATA BYTE VALUES OF COMMAND PARAMETERS
A source of confusion arises because three of the conventions used to
specify command parameters use numbers. For example, 48 could be a
decimal data byte, a hexadecimal data byte, or an ASCII character
representation of a two-byte sequence, 4 followed by 8. The conventions
used in the emulations of the 4100 printer are specified in the following
paragraphs.
Universal, Epson, and IBM Control Commands
Univeral, Epson, and IBM control commands use (n) to indicate the
decimal value of a single data byte. For example "(n) = (75)" is the data
byte identified by decimal number 75. This is the same data byte
identified by hexadecimal number 4B and ASCII character K.
DEC Control Commands
DEC control commands use (n) to indicate an ASCII character or
sequence of ASCII characters. For example, "(n)=(75)=(7)(5)=7 5" is a
two-byte sequence. The decimal numbers are 55 and 53, and the ASCII
characters are 7 and 5.
ZEROS AND ONES
Since upper case "O's" and zeroes look similar, zeroes in control
commands are shown with slashes.
Since lower case els (l) and ones look similar, lower case els in control
commands are shown as scripted els ( ! ).
Operator’s Guide 137
Universal Control
Commands
This section describes control commands that are unique to the printer.
Universal control commands can be used in any emulation mode.
Before using these commands, read the previous section (Control
Commands—An Introduction). It describes the typographic conventions
used in this section and contains other information needed to send
universal control commands in the correct format.
All universal control commands must begin with the sequence SOH Az or
the sequence ESC Az. SOH Az provides maximum compatibility with
other printer models and is the sequence documented in this manual.
Note: Control command SOH AzP and control commands that begin with
the sequence SOH AzZ are reserved for internal use within the
printer. Character sequences that begin with these strings causes
unpredictable action.
Universal control commands for formatting and printing bar codes
are shown for reference in this section. See Appendix E for
complete information.
138
Universal Control Commands
INDEX OF UNIVERSAL CONTROL COMMANDS
Form Length
Length of Form in Millimeters
SOH A z C (n)
152
Emulation Mode
Select Emulation and Reset Printer
SOH A z A (n)
153
Miscellaneous
n/144 Inch Line Spacing
Reset to Power Up Settings
SOH A z Y (n)
SOH A z X (Ø)
154
154
SOH A z ! (n)
SOH A z T (n)
155
157
Print Style
Set Pitch and Strike
Select Print Quality
Barcodes
Enable/Disable Barcode Printing SOH A z L (n)
Set Barcode Parameters
SOH A z M (P1)...(P8)
157
157
Mapping Characters
Select Character Source/Library SOH A z % (s)( l )(n1)(n2)
Map Characters SOH A z B (n1)(n2)(c1a)(c1b)...(cxa)(cxb)
162
163
Operator’s Guide 139
Download Characters
Download Characters
SOH A z & (m)(n1)(n2)(a1a)(a1b)(c1)...(cx) 174
Graphics
Universal Graphics
SOH A z * (d1)(d2)(r)(c1)(c2)(g1)...(gx) 184
ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY OF UNIVERSAL
CONTROL COMMANDS
Command
Function
Page
SOH A z !
SOH A z %
SOH A z &
SOH A z *
SOH A z A
SOH A z B
SOH A z C
SOH A z L
SOH A z M
SOH A z T
SOH A z X
SOH A z Y
Set Pitch and Strike
Select Character Source/Library
Download Characters
Universal Graphics
Select Emulation and Reset Printer
Map Characters
Length of Form in Millimeters
Enable/Disable Barcode Printing
Set Barcode Parameters
Select Print Quality
Reset to Power Up Settings
Set n/144 Inch Line Spacing
155
162
174
184
153
163
152
157
157
157
154
154
140
Universal Control Commands
FORM LENGTH
SOH A z C
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Length of Form in Millimeters
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
C
C
67
43
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets the form length to a specified number of millimeters. n* indicates
form length as follows:
•
n = 0: Form length set to 148.5 mm
•
n = 1: Form length set to 210.0 mm
•
n = 2: Form length set to 297.0 mm
•
n = 3: Form length set to 420.0 mm
If the bottom margin was previously set by the Epson or IBM Skip Over
Perforation command, ESC N, the command SOH AzC cancels the
bottom margin setting. Therefore, to re-establish the bottom margin after
this command is set, send another Skip Over Perforation command. SOH
AzC does not cancel Skip Perforation set in the configuration menu.
When the printer receives this command, the current form position
becomes the top of form.
*
(n) can be, for example, decimal 1 or ASCII character 1.
Operator’s Guide 141
EMULATION MODE
SOH A z A
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select Emulation and Reset Printer
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
A
A
65
41
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Selects the printer emulation mode and the character set that has been
selected from the configuration menu for the selected emulation. n*
specifies the emulation as follows:
•
n = 0: Epson FX-100 emulation
•
n = 1: IBM Proprinter XL emulation
•
n = 3: DEC LA210 emulation
This command also initializes the printer. It initiates the same process as
turning the printer on. The printer functions as specified by the
configuration menu.
* (n) can be, for example, decimal 1 or ASCII character 1.
142
Universal Control Commands
MISCELLANEOUS
SOH A z Y
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
n/144 Inch Line Spacing
SOH
CTRL
A
1
01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
Y
Y
89
59
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets line spacing to n/144 in. The valid range for n is from 0 to 170.
Changing the line spacing affects the amount of space between lines, not
the height of the characters.
SOH A z X
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Reset to Power Up Settings
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
X
X
88
58
(Ø)*
(Ø)
48
30
Resets the printer to power-up default settings. The printer functions as
specified in the configuration menu. To reset the printer to factory default
settings, use the configuration menu.
* (Ø) can be decimal 0 or ASCII character Ø.
Operator’s Guide 143
PRINT STYLE
SOH A z !
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Pitch and Strike
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
!
!
33
21
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Specifies the number of characters per inch (pitch) and degree of
boldness (strike).
Binary values for n are as follows:
Bit
7:
6:
5:
4:
3:
2-0:
Setting
16.67 pitch
Ignored
0 = disable enlarged (double wide) printing
1 = enable enlarged (double wide) printing
0 = disable double strike printing
1 = enable double strike printing
0 = disable emphasized (bold strike) printing
1 = enable emphasized (bold strike) printing
Specifies pitch (other than 16.67) as follows:
000 = 10 pitch
001 = 12 pitch
010 = 15 pitch
011 = 12 pitch
100 = 17.14 pitch
101 = 18.2 pitch
110 = 18.2 pitch
111 = 18.2 pitch
Decimal values for n are shown on the next page.
Decimal values for n are as follows:
Pitch
Single
Double
Bold
Extra
144
Universal Control Commands
Bold
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
5,6,7
4
128
2
1,3
0
37,38,39
36
160
34
33,35
32
21,22,23
50
144
18
17,19
16
53,54,55
52
176
50
49,51
48
13,14,15
12
136
10
9,11
8
45,46,47
44
168
42
41,43
40
29,30,31
28
152
26
25,27
24
61,62,63
60
184
58
57,59
56
Note: Parameter value 13 (decimal) may not be successfully transmitted
to the printer if sent using BASIC programming language.
Parameter value 26 (decimal) may not be successfully transmitted
to the printer if sent using C programming language.
Operator’s Guide 145
SOH A z T
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select Print Quality
SOH
CTRL
A
1
01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
T
T
84
54
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Selects draft or near letter quality (NLQ) printing. n* specifies the print
quality as follows:
•
n = 0: draft
•
n = 2: NLQ
Note: Near letter quality printing is available only in 10, 12, and 15 pitch.
BARCODES
SOH A z L
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Enable/Disable Barcode Printing
SOH
CTRL
A
1
01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
L
L
76
4C
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Enables or disables the printing of barcode symbols. For complete
information on printing barcodes see Appendix E.
SOH A z M
ASCII:
SOH
CTRL A
Control:
Decimal:
1
Hexadecimal:
Set Barcode Parameters
A
A
65
01
z
z
122
41
M
M
77
7A
(P1)...(P8)
(P1)...(P8)
(P1)...(P8)
4D
(P1)...(P8)
Specifies the parameters used to print barcodes. The function of each
parameter is explained in Appendix E.
* (n) can be, for example, decimal 2 or ASCII character 2.
146
Universal Control Commands
MAPPING CHARACTERS
The commands in this subsection enable you to map a printable character
to each data byte value between 0 and 255, to select a character from
ROM (permanent memory), or to download and select a character from
RAM (temporary memory).
Mapping a character to a data byte value re-assigns the action the printer
takes when it receives a data byte with that value.
For example, if you map the letter "A" to data byte value 33, normally
associated with the exclamation mark, "!", then each time the printer
receives that data byte value, an "A" is printed.
Note: Remapping characters does not affect their use in control
commands.
Current settings for all data byte values are stored in the data byte map.
The data byte map is a group of five maps in printer memory that describe
the action the printer performs when it receives a data byte. These maps
are described below:
Data Byte Action Map
Describes whether each data byte
value between 0 and 255 is
interpreted as a control code or a
printable character.
Control Code Map
Describes the control codes currently
assigned to data byte values between
0 and 255.
Operator’s Guide 147
Character Source Map
Describes the location of the selected
character library: ROM or RAM.
Character sets and character maps
selected from the configuration menu
are stored in ROM. Mapped
characters originate in ROM, so their
source is ROM. Download
characters are downloaded directly to
RAM, so their source is RAM.
Character Library Map
A character library is a defined group
of printable characters stored in the
printer. This map shows which library
is currently active for each data byte
value between 0 and 255.
Character Number
Map
Each character in a character library
is numbered. The character number
map specifies which characters are
currently selected for each data byte
value between 0 and 255.
148
Universal Control Commands
The 4100 printer emulates several printers, each of which has defined
"standard" character sets, control code maps, and national-use character
maps. Examples are Epson-German-ESC 6 and IBM #2-Code Page 437.
Selecting these standard options can be done using the configuration
menu or control commands described in other sections. Selecting these
options modifies the data byte map as illustrated below.
Modifying the Data Byte Map, Standard Character Options
ABO-N1
The data byte map is also updated each time you perform one or all of
these actions:
1. Map various printable characters from the character library to a
range of data byte values.
2. Download some characters you design to RAM (temporary
memory) and select some of the download characters to print
by changing the character source to RAM.
3. Select a new emulation mode, overwriting any mapped
characters and control codes but not the download characters.
Operator’s Guide 149
4. Select a new character set, overwriting any mapped characters
and control codes but not the download characters.
5. Reset the printer to factory defaults, overwriting all prior
selections.
See the illustration below.
Modifying the Data Byte Map, Additional Options
AB0-O
At any time, you can see the characters and control codes currently
assigned to each data byte value. Use the configuration menu to print a
data byte map.
Character set, character map, and emulation settings should be made
before mapping characters. Download characters cannot be remapped.
Mapped characters remain in effect until:
•
Cleared with the "Factory Reset" option on the configuration menu or
control command SOH AzX
150
Universal Control Commands
•
Overwritten by new selections
•
A new emulation or character set is selected
•
Power is turned off
The format and examples for sending the command follows.
SOH A z %
ASCII:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Control:
Select Character Source and Library
SOH
1
01
CTRL
A
A
65
41
A
z
122
7A
z
%
37
25
%
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(l)
(l)
(l)
(l)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
Selects a character source and character library for a range of data bytes.
s specifies the source—the type of memory that contains the character
library. • specifies the character library residing in the character source.
Values for s and • • are as follows:
s
•
0
0
character set
1
0
2
0
2
1
Character
Character
Source
Library
ROM (permanent memory)
Currently selected
RAM (temporary memory)Download characters
ROM
OCR-A overlay characters
ROM
OCR-B overlay characters
n1 and n2 define the range of data bytes for which the selection applies.
To map only one data byte, enter the same value for both n1 and n2.
OCR-A and OCR-B characters print only when NLQ printing is selected.
(See Appendix D for charts of OCR-A and OCR-B characters.) The
characters correspond to the characters in the current data byte map. If
you have mapped characters prior to selecting OCR-A and OCR-B, the
overlay characters equivalent to the mapped characters are printed. If no
equivalent to a mapped character exists within the OCR-A or OCR-B
Operator’s Guide 151
character library, the character for that data byte value is printed from the
default character set for the currently selected emulation.
Character source and library selections are stored until power off, printer
reset, or until changed using this command, control sequence SOH Az&,
or the "Overlay Characters" option in the configuration menu.
SOH A z B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map Characters
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
B
B
66
42
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(c1a)(c1b)...(cxa)(cxb)
(c1a)(c1b)...(cxa)(cxb)
(c1a)(c1b)...(cxa)(cxb)
(c1a)(c1b)...(cxa)(cxb)
This controls the relationship between data byte values and their
associated printable characters. Any printable character from the current
character source and character library may be mapped to any data byte
value between 0 and 255, enabling you to create custom character maps.
n1 and n2 define the range of data byte values to which the characters
are mapped. To map a single character, enter the same data byte value
for both n1 and n2.
The number of each character to be mapped to the range of data byte
values is specified using two bytes: ca is the least significant byte of the
character number, cb is the most significant byte of the character number.
ca and cb must be specified for each character in the range n1 through
n2.
This control command only maps characters from the currently selected
character source and character library. Character source and character
library are selected with command SOH Az%. Download characters
cannot be remapped.
Maps created using this command are stored until power off, printer reset,
or until overwritten by other selections. Selecting a character set or
changing emulation mode overwrites current selections.
152
Universal Control Commands
See Appendix D for charts of standard character sets and the character
library.
Example
REM REMAP CHARACTERS G THROUGH K TO DATA BYTE VALUES
REM ASSOCIATED WITH CHARACTERS A THROUGH E
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzBGK";CHR$(65);CHR$(0);CHR$(66);CHR$(0);
LPRINT CHR$(67);CHR$(0);CHR$(68);CHR$(0);CHR$(69);CHR$(0);
LPRINT "ABCDEFGHIJK"
RESULT: "ABCDEFABCDE"
Operator’s Guide 153
DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS
Using the download character command, SOH Az&, you can design
special symbols or graphic patterns or create a custom alphabet. The
following pages describe how to:
•
Define and download characters of your own design
•
Store the characters
•
Select and accept the characters for printing
When you map a character, as shown earlier, you re-assign a printable
character that is stored in the printer to a data byte value between 0 and
255. The printer supplies the character data—the shape, size, and style
of the character, as well as the intercharacter space.
When you download a character, you supply the character data as well as
map it to a specific data byte value. You are not limited to characters
within the printer's character library. You can create whatever printable
shape you want. If "Input Buffer Size" is set to "Minimum," you can
download up to 128 different characters. Download characters cannot be
remapped.
154
Universal Control Commands
DESIGNING DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS
Design the character within a matrix of 10 dot columns by 9 dot rows, like
the one shown below. Column 10 is always blank.
Character Design Matrix
AB0-R
Operator’s Guide 155
The cell values are used to tell the printer which printhead pins fire to
create the character. The cell value for each column is a binary value that
corresponds to the printhead pins used to print the dots in that row.
Eight of the nine printhead pins are used to print the character.
Characters that ascend above the character waistline (such as h, t, A, M)
are printed by the top eight pins. Use the top eight rows on the matrix to
design ascending characters. Characters that descend below the
baseline (such as p, g, y) are printed by the lower eight pins. Use the
bottom eight rows on the matrix to design descending characters. Using
cell values to calculate character data is shown later in this section.
Designing Ascending and Descending Characters
AB0-S1
156
Universal Control Commands
EXTENDED CHARACTERS
Use a matrix like the one shown below to design shaded characters, like
those typically assigned to data byte values 176 to 178 and 219 to 223
decimal, and line drawing characters, like those typically assigned to data
byte values 179 to 218 decimal.
If a line draw character is selected, the dots you enter in Row 8 are copied
into Rows 10, 11, and 12. If a shaded character is selected, the dots you
enter in Rows 6, 7, and 8 are copied into Rows 10, 11, and 12.
Extended Characters
AB0-T1
Note: Print shaded characters and line drawing characters at 6 lpi line
spacing to obtain the full effect of the extension.
Operator’s Guide 157
PRINT QUALITY
There are two ways to define the print quality of downloaded characters:
•
Design characters in a style that is between draft and NLQ print
quality. (This is sometimes referred to as correspondence quality.)
The printer automatically calculates draft and NLQ from downloaded
character data.
•
Design and download data for NLQ characters. Downloaded NLQ
characters may be printed only when NLQ printing is selected. When
draft printing is selected, the printer prints random dots.
To design characters that are between draft and NLQ print quality, place
dots within any of the cells. Ten columns of character data are sent to the
printer. When NLQ printing is selected, the printer adds dots to the
design of the character. When draft printing is selected, the printer omits
some dots from adjacent columns. See the illustrations below.
Print Quality, NLQ/Draft Characters
Calculated from Correspondence Quality Download Character
AB0-U1
158
Universal Control Commands
To design NLQ characters, place dots within any of the design matrix
cells. Forty columns of character data are sent to the printer, twenty for
each print pass. In the second print pass, the dots are offset vertically by
one-half dot.
Print Quality, NLQ Download Character
AB0-V1
In calculating the 40 columns of data, calculate the 10 columns of cellvalue data as you would for the correspondence character mentioned
earlier; that is, calculate by adding up the ascender or descender cell
values of corresponding cells with dots. Then, for the NLQ character,
include a zero value between each correspondence column value to
create the 20 data bytes for the first NLQ pass. For the second NLQ
pass, do the same but drop the leading column value and add a trailing
zero value.
Operator’s Guide 159
For example, for the "7" character above, the calculated column values
are as follows:
Correspondence Column Values:
129 130 132 136 144 160 192 0 0 0
NLQ 1st Pass column Values:
129 0 130 0 132 0 136 0 144 0 160 0 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NLQ 2nd Pass Column Values:
0 130 0 132 0 136 0 144 0 160 0 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
160
Universal Control Commands
STORING DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS
Download characters are stored in RAM (temporary memory). The
character currently mapped to the same data byte value in ROM
(permanent memory) is not overwritten. Characters that have not been
downloaded, mapped, or overlayed print from the currently selected
character set stored in ROM. (See the next subsection, "Printing
Downloaded Characters".) If you select another character set or change
emulation mode, your downloaded characters are not overwritten.
Downloaded characters remain in temporary memory, RAM, until:
•
Cleared with the "Factory Reset" option on the configuration menu or
with control command SOH AzX
•
Overwritten with other selections
•
Cleared by setting the "Input Buffer Size" option to "Maximum (no
user-defined characters)" or by setting the "Overlay Characters" option
to "None"
•
Power is turned off
Note: Download characters may be retained for a variable amount of time
after the power is turned off.
Operator’s Guide 161
PRINTING DOWNLOADED CHARACTERS
Follow this procedure to print downloaded characters:
1. Use the configuration menu to set the printer to accept downloaded
characters.
2. Use the command SOH Az& to download characters to RAM as
described in this section.
3. Select the downloaded characters for printing. Downloaded
characters may be selected when created using SOH Az&. That
setting may be changed at any time. You can print from downloaded
characters stored in RAM or the currently selected character set stored
in ROM, on a character-by-character basis, by changing the data byte
source, using SOH Az%, as discussed earlier in this section.
You can print from all downloaded characters stored in RAM by changing
the data byte source using SOH Az%, or the "Overlay Characters" option
in the configuration menu.
The following pages describe the format of the command used to
download characters. Examples and blank matrixes for designing your
own characters are provided at the end of this subsection.
After your new characters are downloaded, you can use the "Print Data
Byte Map" option on the configuration menu to see how they appear in
print.
162
Universal Control Commands
SOH A z &
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Download Characters
SOH
CTRL
1
01
A
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
&
&
38
26
(m)
(m)
(m)
(m)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(a1a)(a1b)(c1)...(cx) ...
(a1a)(a1b)(c1)...(cx) ...
(a1a)(a1b)(c1)...(cx) ...
(a1a)(a1b)(c1)...(cx) ...
Defines and downloads to RAM (temporary memory) bit image data for
one or more characters. Before downloading characters, use the
configuration menu to set the printer to accept downloaded characters.
The format for downloading characters is shown here. Additional
information on designing, storing, and printing download characters is
given on the preceding pages.
In the Download Character command, m specifies whether the characters
are selected for printing, or downloaded but not selected. This parameter
performs the same function as the Select Character Source and Library
command, SOH Az%, and that command may be used at any time to
change the setting made here. This setting may also be changed using
the "Overlay Characters" option on the configuration menu. The following
are valid settings for m:
m = 0:
Download but do not select
m = 1:
Download and select immediately
n1 and n2 specify the range of data byte values to which the download
characters are assigned. Data must be sent for each character in the
range specified by n1 and n2. To download only one character, send the
same data.
Operator’s Guide 163
aa is a single data byte that specifies the vertical expansion
characteristics of each download character. Bit values for aa are as
follows:
aa Bit
Setting
7
0 = Ascending character (such as h, d, A, R)
1 = Descending character (such as y, p, g)
2-6
Ignored
1 and 0 Vertical expansion as follows:
00 or 11: No vertical expansion
01:
Line drawing character (data in Row 8 are copied
into Rows 10, 11, and 12)
10:
Shaded character
(data in Rows 6, 7, and 8
are copied into Rows 10,
11, and 12)
Decimal values for aa are as follows:
aa
Setting
0 or 3
1
Ascending character, no vertical expansion
Line drawing character (Row 8 copied)
2
Shaded character (Rows 6, 7, and 8 copied)
128 or 131 Descending character
129
Descending character, line drawing (Row 8 copied)
130
Descending character, shaded (Rows 6, 7, and 8 copied)
ab is a single data byte that specifies the print quality of a downloaded
character as follows:
•
ab = 0:
Draft/NLQ. Send 10 columns of character data for c1
through cx. Draft and NLQ characters are automatically calculated
from this data.
164
Universal Control Commands
•
ab = 1:
Near Letter Quality. Send 40 columns of character data
for c1 through cx. These characters may be printed only when NLQ
printing is enabled.
See "Print Quality" earlier in this section.
Both aa and ab must be provided for each character in the range n1
through n2.
c1 through cx specify the columns of pin fire patterns for the downloaded
character, and the intercharacter space. For example, if a1b = 0, send 10
columns of data: (c1)...(c10). If a1b = 1, send 40 columns of data:
(c1)...(c40).
c1 through cx must accompany each character specified by aa and ab in
the range n1 through n2.
To calculate c1 through cx, design the character within a matrix as shown
earlier in this subsection.
Note: All cells may be defined, but the printer ignores any data entered in
Column 10 (draft) and Columns 20 and 40 (NLQ).
Use the columns on the right side of the matrix to define the space
between characters. The standard intercharacter space is two columns
(Columns 8 and 9).
When the character is designed, add the cell values vertically by column
for each row, beginning at the upper left. In the examples shown on the
next page, the cell values for ascending characters are shown on the left
side of the matrix. Ascending characters are printed by the top eight pins
of the printhead. The cell values for descending characters are shown on
the right side of the matrix. Descending characters are printed by the
bottom eight pins of the printhead.
Operator’s Guide 165
The sum of the values in Column 1 is the c1 value, the sum of the values
in Column 2 is the c2 value, and so forth. Where no character data are
entered in the matrix, enter zero as the c-value for that column.
166
Universal Control Commands
EXAMPLE 1
The example shows how to define and download the copyright symbol, ©:
AB0-W1
The following BASIC program downloads this character to data byte value
35 decimal and select it for printing:
LPRINT CHR$(1);"Az&";CHR$(1);CHR$(35);CHR$(35);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);
FOR X = 1 TO 10
READ Y
LPRINT CHR$(Y);
NEXT X
DATA 60,66,153,165,165,66,60,0,0,0
Operator’s Guide 167
EXAMPLE 2
This example shows how to define and download a shaded character.
The matrix below shows how to determine the data. When a shaded
character is specified (aa=2 or 130), Rows 6, 7, and 8 are copied into
three additional rows, 10 through 12, to produce the result shown in the
matrix on the next page. c1 through cx are specified for the first 8 rows
only, not for Rows 10, 11, and 12.
AB0-X1
Note: Print shaded characters and line drawing characters at 6 lpi line
spacing to obtain the full effect of the extension.
168
Universal Control Commands
This matrix shows the dots the printer adds in Rows 10, 11, and 12 from
the data specified in the matrix on the previous page.
AB0-Y1
Operator’s Guide 169
EXAMPLE 3
This example shows how to define and download a near letter quality
character.
AB0-ZA
170
Universal Control Commands
AB0-ZA
The following BASIC program downloads this character to data byte value
48 decimal and selects it for printing. (The character is printed when NLQ
printing is enabled.)
LPRINT CHR$(1);"Az&";CHR$(1);CHR$(48);CHR$(48);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);
FOR X = 1 TO 40
READ Y
LPRINT CHR$(Y);
NEXT X
DATA 129,0,130,0,132,0,136,0,144,0,160,0,192,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
DATA 0,130,0,132,0,136,0,144,0,160,0,192,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
Operator’s Guide 171
Use the matrixes below to design your characters.
AB0-AA1
172
Universal Control Commands
GRAPHICS
SOH A z *
ASCII:
SOH
CTRL A
Control:
Decimal:
1
Hexadecimal:
Universal Graphics
A
A
65
01
z
z
122
41
*
*
42
7A
(d1)
(d1)
(d1)
2A
(d2)
(d2)
(d2)
(d1)
(r)
(r)
(r)
(d2)
(c1)
(c1)
(c1)
(r)
(c2)
(c2)
(c2)
(c1)
(g1)..(gx)
(g1)..(gx)
(g1)..(gx)
(c2)(g1)..(gx)
This command causes the printer to print graphics.
d1 and d2 specify the graphics density to be printed. d1 is the least
significant (lower) byte of the graphics density, and d2 is the most
significant (upper) byte. r specifies graphics resolution as follows:
r = 0: skip horizontally adjacent dots (this setting may increase
graphics print speed)
r = 1: print all dots
c1c2 specify the number of dot columns to reserve for graphics. (c1 is the
least significant byte and c2 is the most significant byte of the represented
number.) The method of representing the number of dot columns is the
same way as that for d1d2, described in the following paragraph.
d1d2 specify the graphic density. If the value is less than 256, d1 is the
number itself and d2 is 0. For values over 256, divide the total number of
256. d2 is the number of complete groups of 256, and d1 is the
remainder. For example, 120 is expressed as 120 0, and 360 is
expressed as 1 104.
Graphic density options and corresponding maximum available dot
columns are shown on the next page.
Operator’s Guide 173
10 Pitch
12 Pitch
Density
(d1d2)
Maximum Dot
Columns Per Line
(c1c2)
Density
(d1d2)
Maximum Dot
Columns Per Line
(c1c2)
50
680
60
816
60
816
72
979
75
1020
90
1224
100
1360
120
1632
120
1632
144
1958
150
2040
180
2448
200
2720
240
3264
240
3264
288
3917
300
4080
360
4896
g1 through gx specify the pin fire patterns for each dot column. The x in
gx refers to the maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved for
the specified graphics density, as shown above.
Eight of the 9 printhead pins are used to print graphics. To calculate g1
through gx, design each dot column as a cell that is 8-dot-rows high, then
add the cell values vertically for each dot column. The value of g for each
column can be expressed as a decimal number: the bits set to 1
correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each pattern. If
a bit is set, the corresponding pin fires. If it is not set, the corresponding
pin does not fire. See the figure and example that follow.
174
Universal Control Commands
For example, if g1=19 (decimal), the corresponding binary expression is
0010011. The pins fire in the following pattern:
Cell
Values
128
Dot
Column
19 = 00010011
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
AB0-AG1
The printer does not print until it receives sufficient data to fill all dot
columns reserved for graphics. Therefore, if dot column space is
reserved beyond the area in which printing occurs, it must be filled with
nulls (decimal 0s).
Operator’s Guide 175
The figure below shows how to determine the values for g1..gx to print an
X-shaped graphic pattern:
AB0-AE
Note: n/216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphics printing. n/216
in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is -1/216 in.
REM PRINT AN X-SHAPED PATTERN USING 60 DPI DENSITY GRAPHICS
LPRINT CHR$(1);"Az*";CHR$(60);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(80);CHR$(0);
FOR I = 1 TO 8
READ D
LPRINT CHR$(D);
NEXT I
LPRINT
DATA 129,66,36,24,24,36,66,129
176
Universal Control Commands
Epson FX-100
Control Commands
This section describes the control codes and control commands you can
use in Epson FX-100 emulation mode.
Before using these commands, read the section entitled "Control
Commands—An Introduction." It describes the typographic conventions
used in this section and other information needed to send these
commands in the correct format.
178
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS
Character Sets
National-Use Character Maps
ESC R (n)
183
Select IBM Character Set #2
or Expand Printable Characters
ESC 6
184
Select IBM Character Set #1
or Standard Printable Characters
ESC 7
184
Control Codes/Printable Characters
ESC I (n)
185
ESC C (n)
ESC C NUL (n)
186
187
Form Length
Length of Form in Lines
Length of Form in Inches
Graphics
Single-Density Graphics
Double-Density Graphics
Quad-Density Graphics
Graphics Mode Selection
ESC K (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d816)
ESC L/ESC Y (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d1632)
ESC Z (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d3264)
ESC * (m)(n1)(n2)(d1)...(dx)
188
191
193
194
Line Spacing
7/72 inch
1/8 inch
1/6 inch
n/72 inch
n/216 inch
ESC 1
ESC Ø
ESC 2
ESC A (n)
ESC 3 (n)
ESC J (n)
195
195
195
195
196
Operator’s Guide 179
Margins
Set Left Margin
Set Right Margin
ESC ! (n)
ESC Q (n)
197
197
Skip Over Perforation
(Sets Bottom Margin)
ESC N (n)
198
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
ESC O
198
ESC @
CR
BEL
BS
LF
FF
DEL
CAN
ESC s (n)
DC1
DC3
ESC =
ESC >
ESC #
199
199
199
200
200
200
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
203
ESC <
ESC U (n)
204
204
Miscellaneous
Printer Initialization
Carriage Return
Bell
Backspace
Linefeed
Form Feed
Delete Last Character
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
Half-Speed Printing
Select Printer
Deselect Printer
Clear MSB
Set MSB
Cancel MSB Control
Print Direction
One-Line Unidirectional Printing
Unidirectional or Bidirectional
180
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
Print Style
Set Pitch and Strike
Condensed Pitch
Cancel Condensed Pitch
Select Elite Pitch
Cancel Elite Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set/Cancel NLQ
Double Strike
Cancel Double Strike
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike) ON
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike) OFF
Set/Cancel Underline
Set Subscript/Superscript
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
Set Italics
Cancel Italics
ESC ! (n)
SI or ESC SI
DC2
ESC M
ESC P
SO or ESC SO
DC4
ESC W (n)
ESC x (n)
ESC G
ESC H
ESC E
ESC F
ESC - (n)
ESC S (n)
ESC T
ESC 4
ESC 5
218
219
220
221
221
222
223
224
225
226
226
226
226
227
228
228
228
228
ESC D (n1)...(n32) NUL
HT
VT
ESC B (n1)...(n16) NUL
ESC b (m)(n1)...(n16) NUL
ESC / (n)
229
230
230
231
231
232
Tabs
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
Horizontal Tab
Vertical Tab
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
Set Vertical Tab Channel
Select Vertical Tab Channel
Operator’s Guide 181
ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY
Command
Function
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DEL
ESC !
ESC #
ESC *
ESC ESC /
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC <
Bell
Backspace
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
Carriage Return
Select Printer
Cancel Condensed Pitch
Deselect Printer on Serial Port
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Delete Last Character
Set Pitch and Strike
Cancel MSB Control
Graphics Mode Selection
Set/Cancel Underline
Select Vertical Tab Channel
1/8 Inch Line Spacing
7/72 Inch Line Spacing
1/6 Inch Line Spacing
n/216 Inch Line Spacing
Set Italics
Cancel Italics
Select IBM Character Set #2
Select IBM Character Set #1
One-Line Unidirectional
Printing
ESC =
Clear MSB
ESC >
Set MSB
ESC @
Printer Initialization
ESC A
n/72 Inch Line Spacing
ESC B
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
ESC C
Set Length of Form by Line
ESC C NUL Set Length of Form in Inches
ESC D
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
ESC E
Emphasized Mode,
(Bold Strike) ON
ESC F
Emphasized Mode,
(Bold Strike) OFF
Page
199
200
201
199
202
207
202
210
201
205
203
194
214
219
195
195
195
196
215
215
184
184
204
203
203
199
195
218
186
187
216
213
213
Command
Function
ESC G
ESC H
ESC I
ESC J
ESC K
ESC L
ESC M
ESC N
ESC O
ESC P
ESC Q
ESC R
ESC S
ESC SI
ESC SO
ESC T
ESC U
ESC W
ESC Y
ESC Z
ESC b
Double Strike
Cancel Double Strike
Control Codes/Printable Characters
n/216 Inch Line Spacing
Single-Density Graphics
Double-Density Graphics
Select Elite Pitch
Skip Over Perforation
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
Cancel Elite Pitch
Set Right Margin
National-Use Character Maps
Set Subscript/Superscript
Condensed Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Double-Density Graphics
Quad-Density Graphics
Set Vertical Tab Channel
213
213
185
196
188
191
208
198
198
208
197
183
215
206
209
215
204
211
191
193
218
Set Left Margin
197
Half-Speed Printing
Set/Cancel NLQ
Form Feed
Horizontal Tab
Linefeed
Condensed Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Vertical Tab
201
212
200
217
200
206
209
217
ESC
l
ESC s
ESC x
FF
HT
LF
SI
SO
VT
Page
182
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
UNAVAILABLE EPSON FX-100 CONTROL
COMMANDS
The following commands are not available in Epson emulation mode:
•
ESC EM
Cut Sheet Feeder Mode
•
ESC SP
Intercharacter Space
•
ESC %
User Defined Character Set
•
ESC &
Define User-Defined Characters
•
ESC 8
Disable Paper End Detector
•
ESC 9
Enable Paper End Detector
•
ESC ^
9-Pin Graphics Mode
•
ESC ?
Re-assign 8-Pin Graphics
•
ESC :
Copy ROM to RAM
•
ESC p
Proportional Space Mode
Some of the functions listed above can be performed with Universal
Control Commands, as follows:
Epson Control
Sequence
Equivalent Universal Control
Command
ESC %, User-Defined Character
Set
SOH A z %, Select Character Source/Library
ESC :, Copy ROM to RAM
Function not required to map or download
characters
ESC &, Define User-Defined
Characters
SOH A z &, Download Character
Operator’s Guide 183
CHARACTER SETS
ESC R
National-Use Character Maps
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
R
R
82
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
52
(n)
Selects a national-use character map. The selected character map
remains in effect until this control command is sent to the printer again. n
specifies the national-use character map as follows:
n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character Map
United States
Japan
Germany
United Kingdom
Denmark I
Sweden
Italy (Epson)
Spain I
n
8
9
10
11
12
128
129
Character Map
Japan
Norway
Denmark II
Spain II
Latin America
Hebrew
Italy (ANSI)
See Appendix D for charts showing the national-use character maps.
This command applies only to the Epson Character Set. If an IBM
Character Set is currently in use, ESC R does not take effect until the
Epson Character Set is selected from the configuration menu.
Example
REM SELECT THE GERMAN CHARACTER MAP
LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(2);
184
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC 6
Select IBM Character Set #2 (or Expand Printable Characters)
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
6
6
54
1B
36
If the printer is currently set with an IBM character set, this command
causes it to print IBM Character Set #2.
If the printer is currently set with an Epson Character Set, this command
expands the printable characters to include data byte values 128 to 159
(decimal).
See Appendix D for charts of character sets.
ESC 7
Select IBM Character Set #1 (or Standard Printable Characters)
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
7
7
55
1B
37
If the printer is currently set with an IBM character set, this command
causes it to print IBM Character Set #1.
If the printer is currently set with an Epson Character Set, this command
causes data byte values 128 to 159 (decimal) to become nonprintable
characters (cancels ESC 6).
See Appendix D for charts of character sets.
Operator’s Guide 185
ESC I
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Control Codes/Printable Characters
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
I
I
73
49
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Specifies whether the undefined data bytes from 0 to 31 decimal (00 to 1F
hexadecimal) and 128 to 159 decimal (80 to 9F hexadecimal) are control
codes or printable characters. ESC I does not affect the defined control
codes such as BEL, BS, HT, etc. See the chart in Appendix D.
n indicates whether the data byte values are control codes or printable
characters as follows:
•
n = 0 or 48: Control codes (ignore undefined characters)
•
n = 1 or 49: Printable characters
This control sequence works only if you have selected an Epson
Character Set.
Example
REM SET AS CONTROL CODES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"I";CHR$(0);
REM SET AS PRINTABLE CHARACTERS
LPRINT CHR$(27);"I"CHR$(1);
186
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
FORM LENGTH
ESC C
Length of Form in Lines
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
C
C
67
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
43
(n)
Sets form length to n number of lines. n must be from 1 to 127. The
default setting is 66 lines. The current form position becomes the top of
form when the printer receives this command.
If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation
command (ESC N), the Length of Form in Lines command cancels the
bottom margin setting. Therefore, to re-establish the bottom margin after
Length of Form in Lines is set, send another Skip Over Perforation
command.
Form length is stored as an absolute length equal to the line spacing
multiplied by the specified number of lines. That form length remains in
effect even if the line spacing is changed.
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 50 LINES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(50);
Operator’s Guide 187
ESC C NUL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Length of Form in Inches
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
C
C
67
43
NUL
NUL
0
00
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets form length to an integer number, n, of inches. n must be from 1 to
22. The default is 11 in. The current form position becomes the top of
form when the printer receives this command.
If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation
command (ESC N), the Length of Form in Inches command cancels the
bottom margin setting. Therefore, to re-establish the bottom margin after
Length of Form in Inches is set, send another Skip Over Perforation
command.
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 10 INCHES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(0);CHR$(10);
188
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
GRAPHICS
ESC K
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Single-Density Graphics
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
K
K
75
4B
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
Causes the printer to print single-density-graphics dot columns. Singledensity graphics are printed 60 dot columns per horizontal inch.
n1 and n2 specify the number of dot columns (data bytes) to reserve for
graphics. The maximum number of dot columns per line for single-density
graphics is 816. n1 and n2 are calculated as follows:
•
n1
=
X MOD 256
•
n2
=
INT(X/256)
where X equals the number of dot columns to reserve. For example, if the
number of dot columns is 80:
•
n1
=
80 MOD 256 = 80
•
n2
=
INT (80/256) = 0
d1...d816 are decimal numbers from 0 to 255, each representing a dot
column. Each decimal number has a corresponding 8-bit binary
expression. The bits set to logic 1 in the binary expression correspond to
the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot column. If a bit is
set, the corresponding pin fires. If it is not set, the corresponding pin does
not fire. See the figure on the next page and the example that follows.
Operator’s Guide 189
For example, if d1 is 19 (decimal), the corresponding binary expression is
00010011. Pins 8, 7, and 4 fire.
Cell
Values
128
Dot
Column
19 = 00010011
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
AB0-AG1
The printer does not print until it receives sufficient data to fill all dot
columns reserved for graphics. Therefore, if dot column space is
reserved beyond the area in which printing occurs, it must be filled with
nulls (decimal 0s).
190
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
The following example shows the code necessary to cause the printer to
print the following graphic pattern:
Printhead
MSB
LSB
d1 - d8 =
129 66 36 24 24 36 66 129
AB0-AH
Note: n/216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing. n/216
in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is - 1/216 in.
Example
REM PRINT AN X SHAPED PATTERN USING SINGLE
REM DENSITY GRAPHICS
LPRINT CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(8);CHR$(0);
FOR I = 1 TO 8
READ D
LPRINT CHR$(D);
NEXT I
LPRINT
DATA 129,66,36,24,24,36,66,129
Operator’s Guide 191
ESC L or ESC Y
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
Double-Density Graphics
L
L
76
4C
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
Y
Y
89
59
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
Causes the printer to print double-density graphics. Double-density
graphics are printed 120 dot columns per horizontal in.
The following illustrates the difference between single-density and doubledensity graphics:
Single Density
Double Density
AB0-AI1
Use ESC L to print double-density graphics at double-density speed.
Use ESC Y to print double-density graphics at single-density speed. ESC
Y causes alternate dots to be skipped during printing.
192
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in
double-density graphics is 1632.
Note: n/216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing. n/216
in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is - 1/216 in.
The operation of double-density graphics and quad density is the same as
single density. For more information, refer to the description of the SingleDensity Graphics command (ESC K).
Example
REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN
REM LENGTH USING DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS
FOR I = 1 TO 2
LPRINT CHR$(27);"L";CHR$(150);CHR$(0);
FOR J = 1 TO 150
LPRINT CHR$(255);
NEXT J
LPRINT
NEXT I
END
Operator’s Guide 193
ESC Z
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Quad-Density Graphics
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
Z
Z
90
5A
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
Causes the printer to print quadruple-density graphics. Quadruple-density
graphics are printed in synthesized 240 dot columns per horizontal in.
The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in
quad density graphics is 3264.
The printer prints half as many dot columns as it receives. Adjacent
columns are paired, and if corresponding bits in either dot column are set,
a pin is fired to create a dot.
Example
REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN
REM LENGTH USING QUAD DENSITY GRAPHICS
FOR I = 1 TO 2
LPRINT CHR$(27);"Z";CHR$(150);CHR$(0);
FOR J = 1 TO 150
LPRINT CHR$(255);
NEXT J
LPRINT
NEXT I
END
194
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC *
Graphics Mode Selection
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
*
*
42
2A
(m)
(m)
(m)
(m)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(dx)
(d1)...(dx)
(d1)...(dx)
(d1)...(dx)
Causes the printer to print graphics in the density specified by m as
follows:
0=Single Density, (60 dots/in.)
1=Double Density, (120 dots/in.)
2=High-Speed Double Density, (120 dots/in.)
3=Quad Density, (240 dots/in.)
4=75 dots/in.
5=50 dots/in.
6=75 dots/in.
The "x" in dx refers to the maximum number of dot columns that can be
reserved. The maximum number of d-bytes depends on the density,
specified as follows:
Dots/In.
60
120
240
75
50
Maximum No. of d-bytes
where x (of dx) =
816
1632
3264
1020
680
Refer to the explanation of the Single-Density Graphics command (ESC
K) for information about n1 and n2 and specifics on how to use graphics.
Example
REM PRINT AN X SHAPED PATTERN USING SINGLE
REM DENSITY GRAPHICS
LPRINT CHR$(27);"*";CHR$(0);CHR$(8);CHR$(0);
FOR I = 1 TO 8
READ D
Operator’s Guide 195
LPRINT CHR$(D);
NEXT I
DATA 129,66,36,24,24,36,66,129
LINE SPACING
ESC 1
7/72 inch
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
1
1
49
1B
31
Sets all subsequent line spacing at 7/72 in. (10.3 lines per in.).
ESC Ø
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
1/8 inch
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
Ø
Ø
48
30
Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1/8 in. (8 lines per in.).
ESC 2
1/6 inch
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
2
2
50
1B
32
Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1/6 in. (6 lines per in.).
ESC A
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
n/72 inch
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
A
A
65
41
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets all subsequent line spacing at n/72 in. The valid entries for n are 1 to
85.
196
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC 3 or ESC J
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
n/216 inch
3
3
51
33
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
J
J
74
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
4A
(n)
Sets line spacing at n/216 in. The valid entries for n are 1 to 255.
n/216 in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is - 1/216 in.
•
ESC 3 (n) causes all subsequent line spacing to be set at n/216.
•
ESC J (n) prints all data in the print buffer, clears the print buffer, then
advances the paper n/216 in., one time only. ESC J does not perform
a carriage return with the linefeed.
Note: n/216 in. line spacing is called "Graphics Line Spacing" by some
manufacturers. Use a line spacing of 24/216 in. for bit-image
graphics using eight bits.
Example
REM "Prints buffer & advances paper 1 in."
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(74);CHR$(216);
Operator’s Guide 197
MARGINS
ESC •
ASCII:
Set Left Margin
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
•
•
108
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
6C
(n)
Sets the left margin to column n. The valid range for n is from 1 to one
column less than the right margin setting. The left margin is the first
column in which characters is printed.
ESC Q
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
Set Right Margin
Q
Q
81
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
51
(n)
Sets the right margin to column n. This command must be specified at
the beginning of a line.
The value of n for the right margin depends on the setting of the left
margin and the selected pitch:
•
5.0 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 68
•
6.0 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 81
•
7.5 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 102
•
8.33 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 113
•
8.57 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 116
•
9.1 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 123
•
10.0 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 136
•
12.0 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 163
198
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
•
15.0 pitch:
•
16.67 pitch: LM + 1 µ n µ 226
•
17.14 pitch: LM + 1 µ n µ 233
•
18.2 pitch:
LM + 1 µ n µ 204
LM + 1 µ n µ 247
where LM is the setting for the left margin. If n is greater that the upper
limit, the command is ignored and the previous right margin setting
remains in effect.
ESC N
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Skip Over Perforation
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
N
N
78
4E
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets the bottom margin to n number of lines. n must be from 1 to 127.
When the form length is changed by using the Length of Form by Lines
command (ESC C) or the Length of Form in Inches Command (ESC C
NUL), the bottom margin setting is cancelled. To regain the bottom
margin setting, use ESC N following either ESC C or ESC C (NUL).
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 55 LINES AND RESET
REM BOTTOM MARGIN TO 3 LINES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(55);
LPRINT CHR$(27);"N";CHR$(3);
ESC O
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
O
O
79
4F
Cancels the bottom margin setting set with ESC N.
Operator’s Guide 199
MISCELLANEOUS
ESC @
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Printer Initialization
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
@
@
64
40
Initializes the printer. This command initiates the same process as turning
the printer on. The printer functions as specified by the configuration
menu.
ESC @ also cancels the print line of characters in which it occurs.
CR
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Carriage Return
CR
CTRL
M
13
0D
Prints any data stored in the print buffer, and sets the current column
position to the left margin. If Auto Linefeed (LF on CR) is enabled, a
linefeed is performed after the carriage return.
BEL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Bell
BEL
CTRL
G
7
07
Sounds the beeper once, for approximately 0.1 second.
200
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
BS
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Backspace
BS
CTRL
H
8
08
Prints any data in the print buffer, then backs up one column for the next
starting position. This is used to create overstrike characters.
If you have changed the character pitch before sending the BS control
code, the distance the printer backs up may be inaccurate.
LF
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Linefeed
LF
CTRL
J
10
0A
Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper one line. If
Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, a carriage return is
performed after the linefeed.
This control code cancels control code SO.
FF
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Form Feed
FF
CTRL
L
12
0C
Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper to the next top
of form. If Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, a carriage return
is performed after the form feed. Otherwise, printing continues in the next
column to the right.
This control code cancels control code SO.
Operator’s Guide 201
DEL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Delete Last Character
DEL
not applicable
127
7F
Deletes the last character in the print buffer.
CAN
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
CAN
CTRL
X
24
18
Cancels all data currently in the print buffer.
The right margin becomes the current print position.
ESC s
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
Half-Speed Printing
s
s
115
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
73
(n)
Starts or cancels half-speed printing. Half-speed printing causes the
printer to run at 50 percent of the normal speed. It is an effective way to
reduce print noise and improve horizontal alignment. n specifies whether
it is set or cancelled as follows:
n =1 or 49:
Start half-speed printing
n =0 or 48:
Cancel half-speed printing
The printer uses half-speed printing when the operator access door is
open.
202
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
Example
REM START HALF-SPEED PRINTING
LPRINT CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(1);
LPRINT "This is a test."
REM CANCEL HALF-SPEED PRINTING
LPRINT CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(0);
LPRINT "This is a test."
DC1
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select Printer
DC1
CTRL
Q
17
11
Sets the printer to accept data from the computer after it has been
deselected by DC3 in the serial mode. This code does not place the
printer on line if it has been placed off line by pressing ON LINE. DC1 is
the X-ON character.
See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking.
DC3
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Deselect Printer on Serial Port
DC3
CTRL
19
13
S
07
Deselects printer when used with a serial interface.
Treated as a null on the parallel interface. On the serial interface, the
printer sends this control code to indicate its buffer is full. DC3 is the XOFF character.
See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking.
Operator’s Guide 203
ESC =
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Clear MSB
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
=
=
61
3D
Forces the most significant bit (MSB) of character codes to logic 0 so that
characters are printed from the lower half of Epson character sets (as
non-italic characters). Overrides the logic of the MSB in data sent from
the host. ESC = is cancelled by ESC #.
ESC >
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set MSB
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
>
>
62
3E
Forces the most significant bit (MSB) of character codes to logic 1 so that
characters are printed from the upper half of Epson character sets (as
italic characters). Overrides the logic of the MSB in data sent from the
host. ESC > is cancelled by ESC #.
ESC #
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel MSB Control
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
#
#
35
23
Cancels MSB control enforced by ESC = or ESC >. Causes the printer to
return to the left margin, then print from left to right for one line only.
204
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
PRINT DIRECTION
ESC <
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
One-Line Unidirectional Printing
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
<
<
60
3C
Causes the printer to return to the left margin, then print from left to right
for one line only.
Note: If set to ON, "PRINT STYLE, BiDirectional Graphics / NLQ" in the
configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing.
ESC U
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing
U
U
85
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
55
(n)
Causes the printer to print unidirectionally or bidirectionally as indicated by
n:
•
n = 1 or 49: Unidirectional printing
•
n = 0 or 48: Bidirectional printing
When unidirectional printing is selected, data is printed only when the
printhead is moving from left to right. Printing this way improves vertical
character alignment.
When bidirectional printing is selected, data is printed when the printhead
is moving in both directions. This is the default print mode.
Note: If set to ON, "PRINT STYLE, Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ" in the
configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing.
Operator’s Guide 205
PRINT STYLE
ESC !
Set Pitch and Strike
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
!
!
33
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
21
(n)
Specifies the number of characters per inch (pitch) and degree of
boldness (strike). The entries for n are as follows:
n
5
21
13
29
4
20
12
28
1
17
9
25
0
16
8
24
Pitch
18.2
18.2
18.2
18.2
16.67
16.67
16.67
16.67
12.0
120
12.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
Strike
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
n
37
53
45
61
36
52
44
60
33
49
41
57
32
48
40
56
Pitch
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
Strike
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Single
Double
Bold
Extra Bold
Note: To select 15.0 pitch or 7.5 pitch, use the universal control
command SOH Az! or ESC Az!.
See the example on the next page.
206
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
Example
REM SET TO 20 PITCH, SINGLE STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(5);
LPRINT "20 pitch in single strike."
REM SET TO 5 PITCH, EXTRA BOLD STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(56);
LPRINT "5 pitch in extra bold."
SI or ESC SI
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Condensed Pitch
SI
CTRL
0
15
0F
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
SI
CTRL
15
1B
O
0F
Increases character pitch according to the table below. Increasing
character pitch allows more characters to be printed per line. ESC SI
duplicates the function of the SI command.
Current Pitch
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
After SI or ESC SI
8.33
9.1
9.1
16.67
18.2
18.2
Current character pitches of 8.33, 8.57, 9.1, 16.67, 17.14, and 18.2 are
unaffected by this command. See DC2 to cancel condensed pitch.
Example
REM SET TO 10 PITCH, THEN
REM CHANGE TO 17.14 PITCH, AS FOLLOWS
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(33);CHR$(0);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi."
Operator’s Guide 207
LPRINT CHR$(15);
LPRINT "Now printing in 17.14 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(13);
DC2
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Condensed Pitch
DC2
CTRL
R
18
12
Cancels condensed pitch set by SI or ESC SI. Returns to the pitch that
was set prior to using SI or ESC SI.
Previous
Ptich
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
New Pitch
(After SI or ESC
SI)
8.33
9.1
9.1
16.67
18.2
18.2
After
DC2
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
Note: To reset 7.5 or 15.0 pitch, use the universal control command SOH
Az!.
Example
REM CHANGE FROM 10 PITCH TO 17.14 PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(15);
LPRINT "Printing in 17.14 pitch."
REM CANCEL 17.14 PITCH, RETURN TO 10 PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(18);
LPRINT "Printing in 10 pitch."
208
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC M
Select Elite Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
M
M
77
4D
Selects elite pitches according to the table below. Current character
pitches of 6.0, 8.33, 9.1, 12.0, 16.67, and 18.2 are unaffected by this
command.
Current Pitch
5.0
8.57
10.0
15.0
17.14
After ESC M
6.0
9.1
12.0
12.0
18.2
ESC P
Cancel Elite Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
P
P
80
50
Cancels elite pitches and selects pica pitches according to the table
below. Current character pitches of 5.0, 8.33, 8.57, 10.0, 16.67, and
17.14 are unaffected by this command.
Current Pitch
6.0
9.1
12.0
15.0
18.2
After ESC P
5.0
8.33
10.0
10.0
16.67
Operator’s Guide 209
SO or ESC SO
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
SO
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
Enlarged Pitch
N
14
0E
CTRL
27
1B
SO
[
CTRL
N
14
0E
Enlarges the currently selected pitch as follows:
Current Pitch
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
After SO or ESC SO
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
See the BASIC example under DC4.
SO causes the enlarged pitch to remain in effect for one line only, or until
one of the following is received:
•
LF
ESC W (0)
•
FF
ESC W (48) ESC A z ! (n)
•
DC4
ESC ! (n)
SOH A z ! (n)
Note: Enlarged pitch is called "Double Wide Printing" by some
manufacturers. This command is not valid when NLQ printing is
selected.
210
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
DC4
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
DC4
CTRL
T
20
14
Cancels enlarged pitch set with command SO or ESC SO. See the table
below.
Pitch Set with SO or ESC SO
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
After DC4
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
This command does not cancel enlarged pitches set with ESC W
! (n), SOH A z ! (n), or ESC A z ! (n).
Example
REM SET TO 10 PITCH.
REM AFTER THAT ENLARGE TO 5 PITCH.
REM FINALLY, CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH
REM TO RETURN TO 10 PITCH, AS FOLLOWS
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(33);CHR$(0);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(14);
LPRINT "Now printing in 5 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(20);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi again."
LPRINT CHR$(13);
(n),
ESC
Operator’s Guide 211
ESC W
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
W
W
87
57
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels enlarged pitch. n specifies whether the function is set or
cancelled:
•
n = 1 or 49: Set enlarged pitch
•
n = 0 or 48: Cancel enlarged pitch
Setting enlarged pitch causes the currently selected pitch to become
enlarged as follows:
Current
Pitch
18.2
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
After ESC W
(1)
9.1
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
Previous
Pitch
9.1
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
After ESC W
(0)
18.2
16.67
15
12
10
ESC W (1) or ESC W (49) causes enlarged pitch to remain in effect until
changed by one of the following:
•
ESC W (0)
•
ESC W (48) SOH A z ! (n)
•
ESC ! (n)
ESC A z ! (n)
Note: Enlarged pitch is called "Double Wide Printing" by some
manufacturers. This command is not valid when NLQ printing is
selected.
212
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
Example
REM SET ENLARGED PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(27);"W";CHR$(1);"This is large."
REM CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(27);"W";CHR$(0);"This is small."
ESC x
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
Set/Cancel NLQ
x
x
120
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
78
(n)
Sets and cancels near letter quality (NLQ) print. n specifies whether NLQ
printing is set or cancelled as follows:
•
n = 1 or 49: Set NLQ
•
n = 0 or 48: Cancel NLQ
The character following ESC is the lowercase letter "x".
Note: Near letter quality printing is available only in 10, 12, and 15 pitch.
Example
REM SELECT NLQ PRINT
LPRINT CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(1);
LPRINT "This is NLQ print."
REM CANCEL NLQ, SELECT DRAFT PRINT
LPRINT CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(0);
LPRINT "This is draft print."
Operator’s Guide 213
ESC G
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Double Strike
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
G
G
71
47
Starts double-strike printing. Each line is printed with two passes of the
printhead. ESC G remains in effect until ESC H, ESC ! (n), ESC Az! (n),
or SOH Az! (n) is received.
See BASIC example in ESC H.
ESC H
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Double Strike
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
H
H
72
48
Cancels double-strike set with ESC G, ESC ! (n), SOH Az! (n), or ESC Az!
(n).
Example
REM SET DOUBLE STRIKE PRINTING
LPRINT CHR$(27);"G";
LPRINT "In double strike mode."
REM CANCEL DOUBLE STRIKE PRINTING
LPRINT CHR$(27);"H";
LPRINT "Now in single strike mode."
ESC E
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike), ON
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
E
E
69
45
Begins emphasized printing. All characters following this command are
printed in bold strike. See BASIC example under ESC F.
214
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC F
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike), OFF
ESC
ctrl [
27
1B
F
F
70
46
Cancels emphasized printing (bold strike) set with ESC E, ESC ! (n), ESC
Az! (n), or SOH Az! (n).
Example
REM PRINT IN BOLD STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"E";
LPRINT "Now printing in bold strike."
REM CANCEL BOLD STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"F";
LPRINT "Now printing in single strike."
ESC ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set/Cancel Underline
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
45
2D
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels the underline function. n specifies whether the function
is set or cancelled as follows:
•
n = 1 or 49: Set underline function
•
n = 0 or 48: Cancel underline function
Example
REM SET UNDERLINE FUNCTION
LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(1);
LPRINT "Underline function is on."
REM CANCEL UNDERLINE FUNCTION
LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(0);
LPRINT "Underline function is now off."
Operator’s Guide 215
ESC S
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Subscript/Superscript
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
S
S
83
53
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Prints characters following this control command as subscript or
superscript characters. n specifies which is selected as follows:
•
n = 1 or 49: Select subscript
•
n = 0 or 48: Select superscript
Subscript or superscript characters are printed at normal height. ESC S
remains in effect until ESC T is received. Multiple ESC S (n) commands
may be sent prior to an ESC T.
Note: This function works only if Sub/Superscript is enabled from the
configuration menu .
ESC T
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
T
T
84
54
Cancels subscript/superscript set by ESC S.
ESC 4
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Italics
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
4
4
52
34
Allows most upright draft quality or NLQ style (condensed, bold, enlarged,
single/double strike) to be printed in italics.
Epson italic characters reside in the upper half of the Epson character
sets. ESC 4 causes this upper half to be mapped to the lower bytes.
ESC 5
Cancel Italics
216
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
5
5
53
35
Cancels italics. Print returns to previous upright style.
TABS
ESC D
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
D
D
68
44
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
NUL
CTRL
@
0
00
Sets multiple horizontal tabs. A maximum of 32 tabs may be set with one
command. Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte.
This command clears all existing horizontal tabs. Therefore, to add one
tab, you must include all existing tabs plus the new one.
ESC D only sets the tabs. The Horizontal Tab control code, HT, causes
the printer to tab to each subsequent tab.
n denotes the character position of each tab. The valid range for n is from
1 to one less than the right margin minus the left margin. Send the values
of n in ascending order. An out of order tab value is interpreted as a
terminator.
The tabs are set relative to the left margin. An n value of 1 sets the tab
one character to the right of the left margin. A maximum value of n sets
the tab one character to the left of the right margin. Therefore, n is the
character position relative to the left margin, not the actual column
number.
Operator’s Guide 217
The following shows the location of tabs for various values of n.
Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Margins
L
R
n=1
T
n=4
T
n=6
T
Example
REM SET HORIZONTAL TABS TO COLS 6, 12 & 30
LPRINT CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(6);CHR$(12);
LPRINT CHR$(30);CHR$(0);
HT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Horizontal Tab
HT
CTRL
I
9
09
Causes the printer to tab to the next tab setting set by control command
ESC D or to the default tab (every 8 columns) if ESC D has not been sent.
If no tabs exist to the right of the current column, HT is ignored.
VT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Vertical Tab
VT
CTRL
K
11
0B
Causes the printer to print the data stored in the print buffer, then tab to
the next tab setting set by ESC B or ESC b. If no tabs exist past the
current position on the page, VT performs the same function as linefeed
(LF). If Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, a carriage return is
performed after VT.
218
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
ESC B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
B
B
66
42
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
NUL
CTRL
@
0
00
Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines. Note that this control command is
terminated with a null byte. n denotes the line number for each tab. The
valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line on the page, as specified
by the form length setting. Send the values of n in ascending order. An
out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator.
The tab positions set by ESC B are the same as those set by ESC b (0),
vertical tab channel zero.
ESC B and ESC b clear all existing vertical tabs. Therefore, to add one
tab, you must include all existing tabs, plus the new one. Use ESC B or
ESC b to set the tabs. Use the Vertical Tab control code, VT, to cause
the printer to tab to each subsequent tab.
Example
REM SET VERTICAL TABS TO LINES 5 TO 10
LPRINT CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(5);CHR$(10);CHR$(0);
ESC b
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Vertical Tab Channel
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
b
b
98
62
(m)
(m)
(m)
(m)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
NUL
CTRL
@
0
00
Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines for the vertical tab Channel m.
Note that this control sequence is terminated with a null byte. m denotes
the tab channel. The valid entries for m are 0 to 7. n denotes the line
number for each tab. The valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line
on the page, as specified by the form length setting. Send the values of n
in ascending order. An out of order tab value is interpreted as a
terminator.
Note: The tab positions for Channel 0 can also be set with ESC B.
Operator’s Guide 219
ESC B and ESC b clear all existing vertical tabs. Therefore, to add one
tab, you must include all existing tabs, plus the new one. Use ESC B or
ESC b to set the tabs. Use the Vertical Tab control code, VT, to cause
the printer to tab to each subsequent tab.
ESC /
ASCII:
ESC
CTRL [
Control:
Decimal:
27
Hexadecimal:
Select Vertical Tab Channel
/
/
47
1B
(n)
(n)
(n)
2F
(n)
Selects one of eight vertical tab channels as active. All subsequent VT
commands use the channel selected by this command. Valid entries for n
are 0 to 7. The default value is 0.
220
Epson FX-100 Control Commands
IBM Proprinter
Control Commands
This section describes the control codes and control commands you can
use while the printer is in IBM Proprinter XL emulation mode.
Before using these commands, read the section entitled "Control
Commands—An Introduction." It describes the typographic conventions
used in this section and other information needed to send these
commands in the correct format.
222
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS
Character Sets
Select IBM Character Set #2
Select IBM Character Set #1
All Characters Character Set
Print One Character From All Character Set
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC \ (n1)(n2)
ESC ^
239
239
239
240
ESC C (n)
ESC C NUL (n)
241
242
ESC K (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d816)
ESC L/ESC Y (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d1632)
ESC Z (n1)(n2)(d1)...(d3264)
243
244
246
Form Length
Length of Form in Lines
Length of Form in Inches
Graphics
Single-Density Graphics
Double-Density Graphics
Quad-Density Graphics
Line Spacing
7/72 inch
1/8 inch
n/72 inch
Start Text Line Spacing Set by ESC A
n/216 inch
ESC 1
ESC Ø
ESC A (n)
ESC 2
ESC 3/ESC J (n)
247
247
247
247
248
Operator’s Guide 223
Margins
Set Horizontal Margins
Skip Over Perforation (Sets Bottom Margin)
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
ESC X (n1)(n2)
ESC N (n)
ESC O
249
250
250
Miscellaneous
Carriage Return
Bell
Backspace
Linefeed
Auto Linefeed
Form Feed
Top of Form
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
Select Printer
Deselect Printer
Deselect Printer
CR
BEL
BS
LF
ESC 5 (n)
FF
ESC 4
CAN
DC1
ESC Q (22)
DC3
251
251
251
252
252
252
253
253
253
254
254
ESC U (n)
255
SI or ESC SI
DC2
SO or ESC SO
DC4
ESC W (n)
ESC :
256
257
258
259
260
261
Print Direction
Unidirectional or Bidirectional
Print Style
Condensed Pitch
Cancel Condensed Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set 12 Pitch
224
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
Set/Cancel NLQ
ESC I (n)
Set NLQ
ESC G
Cancel NLQ
ESC H
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike) ON ESC E
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike) OFF ESC F
Set/Cancel Underline
ESC - (n)
Set Subscript/Superscript
ESC S (n)
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
ESC T
262
262
262
262
263
263
264
264
Tabs
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
ESC D (n1)...(n32) NUL
265
Horizontal Tab
HT
266
Vertical Tab
VT
266
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
ESC B (n1)...(n16) NUL
267
Set Tabs to Power On Settings
ESC R
267
Operator’s Guide 225
ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY
Command
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
ESC ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
Function
Bell
Backspace
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
Carriage Return
Select Printer
Cancel Condensed Pitch
Deselect Printer on Serial Port
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set/Cancel Underline
1/8 Inch Line Spacing
7/72 Inch Line Spacing
Start Text Line Spacing
Set by ESC A
ESC 3
n/216 Inch Line Spacing
ESC 4
Set Top of Form
ESC 5
Auto Linefeed
ESC 6
Select IBM Character Set #2
ESC 7
Select IBM Character Set #1
ESC :
Set 12 Pitch
ESC A
n/72 Inch Line Spacing
ESC B
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
ESC C
Set Length of Form by Line
ESC C NUL Set Length of Form in Inches
ESC D
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
ESC E
Emphasized Mode,
(Bold Strike) ON
ESC F
Emphasized Mode,
(Bold Strike) OFF
Page
239
239
241
239
241
245
242
247
251
235
235
235
236
241
240
227
227
249
235
255
229
230
253
250
251
Command
Function
ESC G
ESC H
ESC I
ESC J
ESC K
ESC L
ESC N
ESC O
ESC Q (22)
ESC R
ESC S
ESC SI
ESC SO
ESC T
ESC U
ESC W
ESC X
ESC Y
ESC Z
ESC \
ESC ^
Set NLQ
Cancel NLQ
Set/Cancel NLQ
n/216 Inch Line Spacing
Single-Density Graphics
Double-Density Graphics
Skip Over Perforation
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
Deselect Printer
Set Tabs to Power On Settings
Set Subscript/Superscript
Condensed Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
Set Horizontal Margins
Double-Density Graphics
Quad-Density Graphics
All Characters Character Set
Next Character From All
Characters Set
Form Feed
Horizontal Tab
Linefeed
Condensed Pitch
Enlarged Pitch
Vertical Tab
FF
HT
LF
SI
SO
VT
Page
250
250
250
236
231
232
238
238
242
255
252
244
246
252
243
248
237
232
234
227
228
240
254
240
244
246
254
226
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
UNAVAILABLE IBM PROPRINTER CONTROL
COMMANDS
The following commands are not available in IBM emulation mode:
•
ESC =
Downloaded Character Font
•
ESC [ @
Double High/Double Wide Printing
•
ESC _
Continuous Overscore
•
ESC P
Proportional Printing
The IBM Download Character Font command, ESC =, can be performed
by the equivalent universal control command SOH Az&.
Operator’s Guide 227
CHARACTER SETS
ESC 6
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select IBM Character Set #2
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
6
6
54
36
This command causes the printer to print with the IBM Character Set #2.
See Appendix D for charts of character sets.
ESC 7
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select IBM Character Set #1
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
7
7
55
37
This command causes the printer to print with the IBM Character Set #1.
See Appendix D for charts of character sets.
All Character Character Set*
ESC \
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
\
\
92
5C
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
Prints a number of characters from an All Character Set, then returns to
the character set in use prior to receipt of the ESC \ command.
n1 and n2 specify the number of succeeding characters to be printed from
this set. The total number of characters to be printed from an All
Character Character Set is equal to "n1 + (n2 x 256)". An All Character
Character Set is constructed from an IBM Code Page. (See Appendix D.)
*
ESC \ enables you to print continuously from an All Character Character Set. ESC ^ is valid for printing one character
only. Both commands enable printing of characters for data bytes normally recognized as control codes. See Appendix
D for charts of character sets.
228
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
An All Character Character Set includes printable characters for data byte
values from 0 to 31 and 128 to 159 decimal (00 to 1F hex and 80 to 9F
hex). No control code functions are performed when ESC \ is in effect.
Example
REM PRINT NEXT 130 CHARACTERS FROM ALL CHARACTERS SET
LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";CHR$(130);CHR$(0);
Print One Character From All Character Set*
ESC ^
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
^
^
94
5E
Prints the next character from an All Character Character Set, then
returns to the character set in use prior to receipt of the ESC ^ command.
Example
REM PRINT NEXT CHARACTERS FROM ALL CHARACTERS SET
LPRINT CHR$(27);"^";CHR$(206);
RESULTS:PRINTS ö
*
ESC \ enables you to print continuously from an All Characters Character Set. ESC ^ is valid for printing one character
only. Both commands enable printing of characters for data bytes normally recognized as control codes. See Appendix
D for charts of character sets.
Operator’s Guide 229
FORM LENGTH
ESC C
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Length of Form in Lines
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
C
C
67
43
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets form length to n number of lines. n must be from 1 to 255. The
default setting is 66 lines. The current form position becomes the top of
form when the printer receives this command.
If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation
command (ESC N), the Length of Form in Lines command cancels the
bottom margin setting. Therefore, to re-establish the bottom margin after
the Length of Form in Lines command is set, send another Skip Over
Perforation command.
Form length is stored as an absolute length equal to the line spacing
multiplied by the specified number of lines. That form length remains in
effect even if the line spacing is changed.
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 50 LINES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(50);
230
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC C NUL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Length of Form in Inches
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
C
C
67
43
NUL
NUL
0
00
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets form length to an integer number of inches n. n must be from 1 to
151. (See Note below.) The default is 11 in. The current form position
becomes the top of form when the printer receives this command.
If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation
command (ESC N), the Length of Form in Inches command cancels the
bottom margin setting. Therefore, to re-establish the bottom margin after
Length of Form in Inches is set, send another Skip Over Perforation
command.
Note: The IBM Proprinter allows a form length range of 1 < n < 180 in.
The IBM emulation in the 4100 printer allows a range of 1 < n <
151 in. An out of range value is ignored.
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 10 LINES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(10);
Operator’s Guide 231
GRAPHICS
ESC K
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Single-Density Graphics
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
K
K
75
4B
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
(d1)...(d816)
Causes the printer to print single-density-graphics dot columns. Singledensity graphics are printed 60 dot columns per horizontal inch.
n1 and n2 specify the number of dot columns (data bytes) to reserve for
graphics. The maximum number of dot columns per line for single-density
graphics is 816. n1 and n2 are calculated as follows:
n1
=
X MOD 256
n2
=
INT(X/256)
where X equals the number of dot columns to reserve. For example, if the
number of dot columns is 80:
n1
=
80 MOD 256 = 80
n2
=
INT (80/256) = 0
d1...d816 are decimal numbers from 0 to 255, each representing a dot
column. Each decimal number has a corresponding 8-bit binary
expression. The bits set to logic 1 in the binary expression correspond to
the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot column. If a bit is
set, the corresponding pin fires. If it is not set, the corresponding pin does
not fire. See the figures and examples of single-density graphics in the
Epson FX-100 Control Command section.
232
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC L or ESC Y
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
Double-Density Graphics
L
L
76
4C
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
Y
Y
89
59
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
(d1)...(d1632)
Causes the printer to print double-density graphics. Double-density
graphics are printed 120 dot columns per horizontal in.
The following illustrates the difference between single-density and doubledensity graphics:
Single Density
Double Density
AB0-AI1
Use ESC L to print double-density graphics at double-density speed.
Use ESC Y to print double-density graphics at single-density speed. ESC
Y causes alternate dots to be skipped during printing.
The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in
double-density graphics is 1632.
Operator’s Guide 233
Note: n/216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing. n/216
in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is - 1/216 in.
The operation of double-density graphics and quad density is the same as
single density. For more information, refer to the description of the SingleDensity Graphics command (ESC K).
Example
REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN
REM LENGTH USING DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS
FOR I = 1 TO 2
LPRINT CHR$(27);"L";CHR$(150);CHR$(0);
FOR J = 1 TO 150
LPRINT CHR$(255);
NEXT J
LPRINT
NEXT I
END
234
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC Z
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Quad-Density Graphics
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
Z
Z
90
5A
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
(d1)...(d3264)
Causes the printer to print quadruple-density graphics. Quadruple-density
graphics are printed in synthesized 240 dot columns per horizontal in.
The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in
quad density graphics is 3264.
The printer prints half as many dot columns as it receives. Adjacent
columns are paired, and if corresponding bits in either dot column are set,
a pin is fired to create a dot.
The arguments for quad-density graphics are the same as the SingleDensity Graphics command (ESC K).
Example
REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN
REM LENGTH USING QUAD DENSITY GRAPHICS
FOR I = 1 TO 2
LPRINT CHR$(27);"Z";CHR$(150);CHR$(0);
FOR J = 1 TO 150
LPRINT CHR$(255);
NEXT J
LPRINT
NEXT I
END
Operator’s Guide 235
LINE SPACING
ESC 1
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
7/72 inch
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
1
1
49
31
Sets all subsequent line spacing at 7/72 in. (10.3 lines per in.).
ESC Ø
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
1/8 inch
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
Ø
Ø
48
30
Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1/8 in. (8 lines per in.).
ESC A
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
n/72 inch
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
A
A
65
41
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets all subsequent line spacing at n/72 in. The valid entries for n are 1 to
85.
ESC A only sets the line spacing. ESC 2 causes the specified line
spacing to start. Linefeeds (LF) sent before ESC 2 is spaced at the
previously set line spacing.
ESC 2
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Start Text Line Spacing
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
2
2
50
32
Begins text line spacing set by ESC A. If ESC A has not been sent, line
spacing is 6 lines per in.
236
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC 3 or ESC J
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
n/216 inch
3
3
51
33
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
J
J
74
4A
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets line spacing at n/216 in. The valid entries for n are 1 to 255.
n/216 in. line spacing is approximated using 1/144 in. steps. Maximum
local and cumulative error is - 1/216 in.
•
ESC 3 (n) causes all subsequent line spacing to be set at n/216 in.
•
ESC J (n) prints all data in the print buffer, clears the print buffer, then
advances the paper n/216 in., one time only. If Auto Carriage Return
(CR on LF) is enabled, ESC J (Ø) causes a carriage return to be
performed after the paper advances the amount specified by n. The
command ESC J (Ø) is equivalent to a carriage return.
Note: n/216 in. line spacing is called "Graphics Line Spacing" by some
manufacturers. Use a line spacing of 24/216 in. for bit-image
graphics using eight bits.
Example
REM LPRINT "Prints buffer & advances paper 1 in."
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(74);CHR$(216);
Operator’s Guide 237
MARGINS
ESC X
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Horizontal Margins
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
X
X
88
58
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
Sets the left margin to Column n1 and the right margin to Column n2.
Specify margins in character positions, at the pitch currently in use.
Margins are stored in absolute displacements from the left edge of the
paper.
If n1 is 0, the current left margin is used. If n2 is 0, the current right
margin is used.
n1 must be at least one character position less than n2.
n2 must be 255 or less. If 255 is specified for the right margin, the
maximum right margin is set.
Use a CR immediately after ESC X to establish the printhead position
relative to the new margin settings.
238
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC N
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Skip Over Perforation
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
N
N
78
4E
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets the bottom margin to n number of lines. n must be from 1 to 255.
When the form length is changed by using the Length of Form by Lines
command
(ESC C) or the Length of Form in Inches Command (ESC C NUL), the
bottom margin setting is cancelled. To regain the bottom margin setting,
use ESC N following either ESC C or ESC C (NUL).
Example
REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 55 LINES AND RESET
REM BOTTOM MARGIN TO 3 LINES
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(55);
LPRINT CHR$(27);"N";CHR$(3);
ESC O
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
O
O
79
4F
Cancels the bottom margin setting set with ESC N.
Operator’s Guide 239
MISCELLANEOUS
CR
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Carriage Return
CR
CTRL
M
13
0D
Prints any data stored in the print buffer, and sets the current column
position to the left margin.
If Auto Linefeed (LF on CR) is enabled, or if ESC 5 is sent before CR, a
linefeed is performed after the carriage return.
BEL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Bell
BEL
CTRL
G
7
07
Sounds the beeper once, for approximately 0.1 second.
BS
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Backspace
BS
CTRL
H
8
08
Prints any data in the print buffer, then backs up one column for the next
starting position. This is used to create overstrike characters.
If you have changed the character pitch before sending the BS control
code, the distance the printer backs up may be inaccurate.
240
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
LF
Linefeed
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
LF
CTRL
J
10
0A
Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper one line. If
Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, a carriage return is
performed after the linefeed.
This control code cancels control code SO.
ESC 5
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Auto Linefeed
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
5
5
53
35
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels automatic linefeed (LF on CR). n specifies whether the
function is set or cancelled as follows:
•
n = 1: Set automatic linefeed
•
n = 0: Cancel automatic linefeed
When automatic linefeed (LF on CR) is set, the printer does a linefeed
each time a carriage return is received.
ESC 5 overrides the automatic linefeed option set from the configuration
menu.
FF
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Form Feed
FF
CTRL
L
12
0C
Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper to the next top
of form. A carriage return is performed after the form feed.
This control code cancels control code SO.
Operator’s Guide 241
ESC 4
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Top of Form
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
4
4
52
34
Sets the current paper position as the top of form.
CAN
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Data in Print Buffer
CAN
CTRL
X
24
18
Cancels all data currently in the print buffer.
If Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, the left margin becomes
the current print position.
DC1
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select Printer
DC1
CTRL
Q
17
11
Sets the printer to accept data from the computer after it has been
deselected by
ESC Q (22) in the serial mode. This code does not place the printer on
line if it has been placed off line by pressing ON LINE. DC1 is the X-ON
character.
See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking.
242
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC Q (22)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Deselect Printer
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
Q
Q
81
51
(22)
(22)
22
16
Sets the printer so it will not accept data from the computer. This control
command is intended for diagnostic purposes only. The printer remains in
the off line state until Select Printer (DC1) is received, and cannot be
reselected by pressing ON LINE.
DC3
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Deselect Printer on Serial Port
DC3
CTRL
19
13
S
07
Deselects printer when used with a serial interface.
Treated as a null on the parallel interface. On the serial interface, the
printer sends this control code to indicate its buffer is full. DC3 is the XOFF character.
See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking.
Operator’s Guide 243
PRINT DIRECTION
ESC U
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
U
U
85
55
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Causes the printer to print unidirectionally or bidirectionally. n indicates
which is selected as follows:
•
n = 1 or 49: Unidirectional printing
•
n = 0 or 48: Bidirectional printing
When unidirectional printing is selected, data is printed only when the
printhead is moving from left to right. Printing this way improves vertical
character alignment.
When bidirectional printing is selected, data is printed when the printhead
is moving in both directions. This is the default print mode.
Note: If set to ON, "PRINT STYLE, Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ" in the
configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing.
244
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
PRINT STYLE
SI or ESC SI
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
SI
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
Condensed Pitch
0
15
0F
CTRL
27
1B
SI
[
CTRL
O
15
0F
Increases character pitch according to the table below. Increasing
character pitch allows more characters to be printed per line. ESC SI
duplicates the function of the SI command.
Current Pitch
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
After SI or ESC SI
8.57
9.1
9.1
17.14
18.2
18.2
Current character pitches of 8.33, 8.57, 9.1, 16.67, 17.14, and 18.2 are
unaffected by this command. See DC2, on the following page, to cancel
condensed pitch.
Example
REM SET 12 PITCH,
REM THEN CHANGE TO 10 PITCH.
REM AFTER THAT CHANGE TO 17.14 PITCH, AS FOLLOWS
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(58);
LPRINT "Now printing in 12 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(18);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(15);
LPRINT "Now printing in 17.14 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(13);
Operator’s Guide 245
DC2
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Condensed Pitch
DC2
CTRL
R
18
12
Cancels condensed pitch set by SI or ESC SI. Returns to the pitch that
was set prior to using SI or ESC SI. Also, cancels 12 pitch set by ESC :
and resets to 10 pitch.
Previous
Pitch
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
New Pitch
(After SI or
ESC SI)
8.33
9.1
9.1
16.67
18.2
18.2
After
DC2
5.0
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
Previous
Pitch
Any
New Pitch
(After ESC)
12
After
DC2
10
Note: To reset 7.5 or 15.0 pitch, use universal control command SOH
Az!.
Example
REM CHANGE FROM 10 PITCH TO 17.14 PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(15);
LPRINT "Printing in 17.14 pitch."
REM CANCEL 17.14 PITCH, RETURN TO 10 PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(18);
LPRINT "Printing in 10 pitch."
246
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
SO or ESC SO
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
SO
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
Enlarged Pitch
N
14
0E
CTRL
SO
[
27
1B
CTRL
N
14
0E
Enlarges the currently selected pitch as follows:
Current Pitch
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
After SO or ESC SO
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
See the BASIC example under DC4.
SO causes the enlarged pitch to remain in effect for one line only, or until
one of the following is received:
•
CR
•
CAN ESC W (0)
•
LF
ESC W (48)
•
FF
DC4
VT
SOH A z ! (n)
ESC A z ! (n)
Note: Enlarged pitch is called "Double Wide Printing" by some
manufacturers. This command is not valid when NLQ printing is
selected.
Operator’s Guide 247
DC4
Cancel Enlarged Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
DC4
CTRL
T
20
14
Cancels enlarged pitch set with command SO or ESC SO. See the table
below.
Pitch Set with SO or
ESC SO
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
After DC4
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
This command does not cancel enlarged pitches set with ESC W (n), ESC
! (n), SOH A z ! (n), or ESC A z ! (n).
Example
REM SET 12 PITCH,
REM THEN CHANGE TO 10 PITCH.
REM AFTER THAT ENLARGE TO 5 PITCH.
REM FINALLY, CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH
REM TO RETURN TO 10 PITCH, AS FOLLOWS
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(58);
LPRINT "Now printing in 12 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(18);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(14);
LPRINT "Now printing in 5 cpi."
LPRINT CHR$(20);
LPRINT "Now printing in 10 cpi again."
LPRINT CHR$(13);
248
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC W
Set/Cancel Enlarged Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
W
W
87
57
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels enlarged pitch. n specifies whether the function is set or
cancelled:
•
n = 1 or 49: Set enlarged pitch
•
n = 0 or 48: Cancel enlarged pitch
Setting enlarged pitch causes the currently selected pitch to become
enlarged as follows:
Current
Pitch
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
After ESC
W (1)
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
Previous
Pitch
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
6.0
5.0
After ESC W
(0)
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
12.0
10.0
ESC W (1) or ESC W (49) causes enlarged pitch to remain in effect until
changed by one of the following:
•
ESC W (0)
•
ESC W (48) SOH A z ! (n)
ESC A z ! (n)
Note: Enlarged pitch is called "Double Wide Printing" by some
manufacturers. This command is not valid when NLQ printing is
selected.
Operator’s Guide 249
Example
REM SET ENLARGED PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(27);"W";CHR$(1);"This is large."
REM CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH
LPRINT CHR$(27);"W";CHR$(0);"This is small."
ESC :
Set 12 Pitch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
:
:
58
3A
Sets character pitch to 12 pitch. If currently printing in Enlarged Pitch,
sets to 6 pitch. Control code DC2 resets to 10 pitch.
Current Pitch
18.2
17.14
16.67
15.0
10.0
9.1
8.57
8.33
7.5
5.0
After ESC
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
250
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC I
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set/Cancel NLQ
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
I
I
73
49
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels near letter quality (NLQ) print. n specifies whether NLQ
printing is set or cancelled as follows:
•
n = 1 or 4:
Cancel NLQ
•
n = 2 or 6:
Set NLQ
Note: Near letter quality printing is available only in 10, 12, and 15 pitch.
ESC G
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set NLQ
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
G
G
71
47
Starts near letter quality (NLQ) printing.
Note: Near letter quality printing is available only in 10, 12, and 15 pitch.
ESC H
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel NLQ
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
H
H
72
48
Cancels near letter quality (NLQ) printing set with ESC G.
ESC E
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike), ON
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
E
E
69
45
Begins emphasized printing. All characters following this command are
printed in bold strike. See BASIC example under ESC F.
Operator’s Guide 251
ESC F
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Emphasized Mode (Bold Strike), OFF
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
F
F
70
46
Cancels emphasized printing (bold strike) set with ESC E, ESC ! (n), ESC
Az! (n), or SOH Az! (n).
Example
REM PRINT IN BOLD STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"E";
LPRINT "Now printing in bold strike."
REM CANCEL BOLD STRIKE
LPRINT CHR$(27);"F";
LPRINT "Now printing in single strike."
ESC ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set/Cancel Underline
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
45
2D
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Sets and cancels the underline function. n specifies whether the function
is set or cancelled as follows:
•
n = 1 or 49: Set underline function
•
n = 0 or 48: Cancel underline function
Example
REM SET UNDERLINE FUNCTION
LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(1);
LPRINT "Underline function is on."
REM CANCEL UNDERLINE FUNCTION
LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(0);
LPRINT "Underline function is off."
252
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
ESC S
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Subscript/Superscript
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
S
S
83
53
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Prints characters following this control command as subscript or
superscript characters. n specifies either subscript or superscript:
•
n = 1 or 49: Select subscript
•
n = 0 or 48: Select superscript
Subscript or superscript characters are printed at normal height. ESC S
remains in effect until ESC T is received. Multiple ESC S (n) commands
may be sent prior to an ESC T.
Note: This function works only if Sub/Superscript is enabled from the
configuration menu.
ESC T
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel Subscript/Superscript
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
T
T
84
54
Cancels subscript/superscript set by ESC S.
Operator’s Guide 253
TABS
ESC D
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
ESC
CTRL
D
D
68
44
[
27
1B
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
(n1)...(n32)
NUL
CTRL
@
0
00
Sets multiple horizontal tabs. A maximum of 28 tabs may be set with one
command. Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte.
This command clears all existing horizontal tabs. Therefore, to add one
tab, you must include all existing tabs plus the new one.
ESC D only sets the tabs. The Horizontal Tab control code, HT, causes
the printer to tab to each subsequent tab.
n denotes the character position of each tab. The valid range for n is from
1 to one less than the right margin minus the left margin. Send the values
of n in ascending order. An out of order tab value is interpreted as a
terminator.
The tabs are set relative to the left margin. An n value of 1 sets the tab at
the left margin. A maximum value of n sets the tab one character to the
left of the right margin. Therefore, n is the character position relative to the
left margin, not the actual column number.
The following shows the location of tabs for various values of n.
Column
Margins
n=2
n=5
n=7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
9
R
T
T
T
10
254
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
Example
REM SET HORIZONTAL TABS TO COLS 6, 12 & 30
LPRINT CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(6);CHR$(12);
LPRINT CHR$(30);CHR$(0);
HT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Horizontal Tab
HT
CTRL
I
9
09
Causes the printer to tab to the next tab setting set by control command
ESC D or to the default tab (every 8 columns) if ESC D has not been sent.
If no tabs exist to the right of the current column, HT is ignored.
VT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Vertical Tab
VT
CTRL
K
11
0B
Causes the printer to print the data stored in the print buffer, then tab to
the next tab setting set by ESC B or ESC b. If no tabs exist past the
current position on the page, VT performs the same function as linefeed
(LF). If Auto Carriage Return (CR on LF) is enabled, a carriage return is
performed after VT.
Operator’s Guide 255
ESC B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
ESC
CTRL
[
27
1B
B
B
66
42
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
(n1)...(n16)
NUL
CTRL
@
0
00
Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines. Note that this control command is
terminated with a null byte. n denotes the line number for each tab. The
valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line on the page, as specified
by the form length setting. Send the values of n in ascending order. An
out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator.
ESC B clears all existing vertical tabs. Therefore, to add one tab, you
must include all existing tabs, plus the new one. Use ESC B to set the
tabs. Use the Vertical Tab control code, VT, to cause the printer to tab to
each subsequent tab.
Example
REM SET VERTICAL TABS TO LINES 5 AND 10
LPRINT CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(5);CHR$(10);CHR$(0);
ESC R
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Set Tabs to Power On Settings
ESC
CTRL
27
1B
[
R
R
82
52
Cancels all vertical and horizontal tab settings. Restores power-on
horizontal tab settings (one tab stop every eight positions, starting at
Column 9).
256
IBM Proprinter Control Commands
DEC LA210
Control Commands
This section describes the control codes and control commands you can
use while the printer is in DEC LA210 emulation mode.
Before using these commands, read the section entitled "Control
Commands—An Introduction." It describes the typographic conventions
and other information needed to send these commands in the correct
format.
258
DEC LA210 Control Commands
INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS
Character Maps
Select G0
Select G1
Select G2
Select G3
Map G0 into Lower Data Bytes
Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes
Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes
Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes
Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes
Map G2 into Upper Data Bytes
Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes
Print Next Character From G2
Print Next Character From G3
ESC ( (n)
ESC ) (n)
ESC * (n)
ESC + (n)
SI
SO
ESC n
ESC o
ESC ~
ESC }
ESC |
ESC N or SS2 (n)
ESC O or SS3 (n)
284
285
285
285
286
286
286
287
287
287
288
288
289
ESC [ (n) z
ESC [ z or
ESC [ Ø z or
ESC [ 1 z
ESC [ 2 z
ESC [ 3 z
ESC [ 4 z
ESC [ 5 z
ESC [ 6 z
290
290
290
290
290
290
290
290
290
Lines Per Inch
Set Line Spacing
Set 6 Lines Per Inch
Set 8 Lines Per Inch
Set 12 Lines Per Inch
Set 2 Lines Per Inch
Set 3 Lines Per Inch
Set 4 Lines Per Inch
Operator's Guide 259
Margins
Left Margin
Right Margin
Left and Right Margin
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Top and Bottom Margin
Set Print Area
ESC [ (n) s or
ESC [ (n) ; Ø s
ESC [ ; (n) s or
ESC [ Ø ; (n) s
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) s
ESC [ (n) r
ESC [ ; (n) r
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) r
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) " s
291
291
291
291
292
293
294
294
295
ESC [ 2 Ø h
ESC [ 2 Ø l
CR
ESC [ ? 4 Ø h
ESC [ ? 4 Ø l
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC [ ? 7 l
ESC [ (n) t
ESC [ Ø t
BEL
CAN
ESC SP 7
ESC SP 6
ESC P 1 v (h1)...(h30)
ENQ
DCS 1 v (h1)...(h30)
296
296
296
297
297
297
297
297
298
299
299
299
299
301
301
302
Miscellaneous
Enable Linefeed/Newline
Disable Linefeed/Newline
Carriage Return
Enable Carriage Return/Newline
Disable Carriage Return/Newline
Enable Auto Wraparound
Disable Auto Wraparound
Form Length
No Form Mode
Bell
Cancel
Enable C1 Control Codes
Disable C1 Control Codes
Define Answer Back Message
Return Answer Back Message
Device Control String
260
DEC LA210 Control Commands
String Terminator
Control Sequence Introducer
ESC \ or
ST
CSI
302
302
302
ESC P (n) q (d1)...(dx)
303
ESC D or
IND
ESC E
NEL
ESC K or
PLD
LF
ESC [ (n) d
ESC [ (n) e
FF
308
308
308
308
309
309
309
310
310
310
ESC [ 1 8 w
ESC [ 4 w
ESC [ 3 w
ESC [ 2 w
ESC [ Ø w or
ESC [ w or
ESC [ 1 w
ESC [ 9 w
ESC [ 8 w
ESC [ 7 w
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
Graphics
Graphics
Paper Motion
Index
Linefeed with Carriage Return
Next Line
Advance Paper 1/12 Inch
Linefeed
Advance to Line n
Advance n Lines
Form Feed
Pitch
Select 18.2 Pitch
Select 16.67 Pitch
Select 15.0 Pitch
Select 12.0 Pitch
Select 10.0 Pitch
Select 9.1 Pitch
Select 8.33 Pitch
Select 7.5 Pitch
Operator's Guide 261
Select 6.0 Pitch
Select 5.0 Pitch
Select Font Pitches
Select All Pitches
ESC [ 6 w
ESC [ 5 w
ESC [ ? 2 9 h
ESC [ ? 2 9 l
311
311
311
312
ESC [ Ø " z or
ESC [ 1 " z
ESC [ 2 " z
ESC [ 4 m
ESC [ 2 4 m
ESC [ 2 m
ESC [ Ø m
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
ESC [ (n) `
BS
ESC [ (n) a
314
314
314
Unidirectional Printing
ESC [ ? 4 1 h
315
Bidirectional Printing
ESC [ ? 4 1 l
315
Print Style
Draft Quality Printing
Near Letter Quality Printing
Enable Underline
Disable Underline
Enable Underline
Disable Underline
Special Printhead Movement
Set Active Column to Column n
Backspace
Advance n Columns
Print Direction
262
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Tabs
Set Horizontal Tab
at Current Column
Clear Horizontal Tab
at Current Column
Set Horizontal Tab at Column n
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs
Clear All Horizontal Tabs
Horizontal Tab Set
Horizontal Tab
Vertical Tab Set
Set Vertical Tab at
Current Line
Clear Vertical Tab at
Current Line
Set Vertical Tab at Line n
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs
Clear All Vertical Tabs
Vertical Tab
ESC H or
316
ESC 1
316
ESC [ g or
316
ESC [ Ø g
316
ESC [ (n) u
317
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n16) u
317
ESC 2 or
317
ESC [ 2 g or
317
ESC [ 3 g
317
HTS
318
HT
318
VTS
318
ESC J or
319
ESC 3
319
ESC [ 1 g
319
ESC [ (n) v
319
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n15) v
320
ESC 4 or
320
ESC [ 4 g
320
VT
320
Operator's Guide 263
ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY
Command Function
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
CSI
DCS 1 v
ENQ
ESC SP 6
ESC SP 7
ESC ( (n)
ESC ) (n)
ESC * (n)
ESC + (n)
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 4
ESC D
ESC E
ESC [ 2 g
ESC [ 2 m
ESC [ 2 w
ESC [ 2 z
ESC [ 2 Ø h
ESC [ 2 Ø
l
ESC [ 2 4 m
Bell
Backspace
Cancel
Carriage Return
Control Sequence
Introducer
Device Control String
(h1)...(h30)
Return Answer Back
Message
Disable C1 Control
Codes
Enable C1 Control
Codes
Select G0
Select G1
Select G2
Select G3
Set Horizontal Tab at
Current Column
Clear All Horizontal
Tabs
Set Vertical Tab at
Current Line
Clear All Vertical Tabs
Index
Linefeed with Carriage
Return
Clear All Horizontal
Tabs
Enable Underline
Select 12.0 Pitch
Set 8 Lines Per Inch
Enable Linefeed/
Newline
Disable Linefeed/
Newline
Disable Underline
Page
299
314
299
296
302
302
301
299
299
284
285
285
285
316
317
319
320
308
308
317
313
311
280
296
296
313
Command
Function
Page
ESC H
Set Horizontal Tab at
Current Column
316
ESC J
Set Vertical Tab at
Current Line
319
ESC K
Advance Paper 1/12 Inch 309
ESC N (n)
Print Next Character
from G2
286
ESC O (n)
Print Next Character
from G3
289
ESC P 1 v
Define Answer Back
(h1)...(h30)
Message
301
ESC P (n) q (d1)...(dx) Graphics
303
ESC [ Ø " z
Draft Quality Printing
312
ESC [ Ø ; (n) s
Right Margin
291
ESC [ Ø g
Clear Horizontal Tab at
Current Column
316
ESC [ Ø m
Disable Underline
313
ESC [ Ø t
No Form Mode
298
ESC [ Ø w
Select 10 Pitch
311
ESC [ Ø z
Set 6 Lines Per Inch
311
ESC [ 1 " z
Draft Quality Printing
312
ESC [ 1 8 w
Select 18.2 Pitch
311
ESC [ 1 g
Clear Vertical Tab at
Current Line
319
ESC [ 1 w
Select 10 Pitch
311
ESC [ 1 z
Set 6 Lines Per Inch
290
ESC [ 2 " z
Near Letter Quality
312
ESC [ ; (n) r
Bottom Margin
294
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) r
Top and Bottom Margin
292
ESC [ ; (n) s
Right Margin
291
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) s
Left and Right Margin
292
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n16) u
Set Multiple
Horizontal Tabs
317
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n15) v Set Multiple
Vertical Tabs
320
ESC [ ? 2 9 h
Select Font Pitches
311
l
Select All Pitches
312
ESC [ ? 4 Ø h
Enable Carriage
Return/Newline
297
ESC [ ? 2 9
264
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Command
Page
Command
Clear All Horizontal
Tabs
317
ESC [ 3 w
Select 15.0 Pitch
311
ESC [ 3 z
Set 12 Lines Per Inch
270
ESC [ 4 g
Clear All Vertical
Tabs
320
ESC [ 4 m
Enable Underline
313
ESC [ 4 w
Select 16.67 Pitch
311
ESC [ 4 z
Set 2 Lines Per Inch
270
ESC [ 5 w
Select 5.0 Pitch
311
ESC [ 5 z
Set 3 Lines Per Inch
270
ESC [ 6 w
Select 6.0 Pitch
311
ESC [ 6 z
Set 4 Lines Per Inch
270
ESC [ 7 w
Select 7.5 Pitch
311
ESC [ 8 w
Select 8.33 Pitch
311
ESC [ 9 w
Select 9.1 Pitch
311
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) " s Set Print Area
295
ESC [ (n) ; Ø s Left Margin
291
ESC [ (n) u
Set Horizontal Tab at Current
Column n
317
ESC [ (n) v
Set Vertical Tab at Line n
319
ESC [ w
Select 10.0 Pitch
311
ESC [ (n) w
Select Pitch
311
ESC [ z
Set 6 Lines Per Inch
270
ESC [ (n) z
Select Line Spacing
270
ESC \
String Terminator
302
ESC n
Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes 286
ESC o
Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes 287
ESC |
Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes 288
ESC }
Map G2 into Upper Data Bytes 287
ESC ~
Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes 287
FF
Form Feed
310
ESC [ ? 4 Ø
ESC [ 3 g
Function
Function
l
ESC [ ? 4 1 h
ESC [ ? 4 1
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC [ ? 7 l
ESC [ (n) `
ESC [ (n) a
ESC [ (n) d
ESC [ (n) e
ESC [ g
ESC [ (n) r
ESC [ (n) s
ESC [ (n) t
HT
IND
LF
NEL
HTS
VTS
PLD
SI
SO
SS2 (n)
SS3 (n)
ST
VT
l
Page
Disable Carriage
Return/Newline
Unidirectional Printing
297
315
Bidirectional Printing
Enable Auto Wraparound
315
297
Disable Auto Wraparound
Set Active Column to
Column n
Advance n Columns
Advance to Line n
Advance n Lines
Clear Horizontal Tab
at Current Column
Top Margin
Left Margin
Form Length
Horizontal Tab
Index
Linefeed
Next Line
Horizontal Tab Set
Vertical Tab Set
Partial Line Down
Map G0 into Lower Data Bytes
Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes
Print Next Character from G2
Print Next Character from G3
String Terminator
Vertical Tab
297
314
314
310
310
316
293
291
297
318
308
309
308
318
318
309
286
286
288
289
302
320
Operator's Guide 265
4100 PRINTER VS DEC LA210 PRINTER
A few difference exist between the DEC LA210 emulation in the 4100
printer and the DEC LA210 printer, as described in the following
subsections.
UNSUPPORTED DEC COMMANDS
The following DEC LA210 commands are not available in this DEC LA210
emulation:
ESC SP G Enable 8-bit Transmission
ESC SP F Disable 8-bit Transmission
ESC [ (n) A Initiate n Reverse Linefeeds
ESC m
Reverse Linefeed
ESC ,
Select Alternate Character Sets (see Note)
ESC Select Alternate Character Sets (see Note)
ESC .
Select Alternate Character Sets (see Note)
ESC /
Select Alternate Character Sets (see Note)
ESC [ ? 1 Ø c
Font Configuration Report
ESC Z
Printer ID
ESC _
Application Program Command
ESC ]
Operating System Command
ESC ^
Privacy Message
RI
Reverse Index
ESC L
Partial Line Up
PLU
Partial Line Up
OSC
Operating System Command
PM
Privacy Message
APC
Application Program Command
ESC [ 1 Ø m through ESC [ 1 4 m
Specify Character Fonts
Note: All character sets can be selected with other commands.
266
DEC LA210 Control Commands
In addition to the DEC LA210 functions listed on the previous page,
commands that are supported by the DEC LA210—yet perform no
function on the DEC LA210 printer—and are not supported in DEC LA210
emulation on the 4100 printer, are listed below:
EOT
DLE
DC2
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
EM
SUB
FS
GS
RS
US
DEL
ESC @
End of Transmission
Data Link Escape
Device Control 2
Device Control 4
Negative
Acknowledge
Synchronous Idle
End of Transmission
Block
End of Medium
Substitute
File Separator
Group Separator
Record Separator
Unit Separator
Delete
Reserved
ESC A
ESC B
ESC F or SSA
ESC G or ESA
ESC I or HTJ
ESC Q or PU1
ESC R or PU2
ESC S or STS
ESC T or CCH
ESC U or MW
ESC V or SPA
ESC W or EPA
ESC X
ESC Y
ESC Z
Reserved
Reserved
Start of Selected
Area
End of Selected
Area
Horizontal Tab with
Justification
Private Use 1
Private Use 2
Set Transmit State
Cancel Character
Message Waiting
Start of Protected
Area
End of Protected
Area
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Operator's Guide 267
CHARACTER PITCH DIFFERENCES
Control commands used to set character pitch are the same in the DEC
emulations of the 4100 printer and DEC LA210 printers, except for
commands shown in the table below:
Character Pitch
Control
Sequence
ESC[3w
ESC[4w
ESC[7w
ESC[8w
ESC[9w
ESC[18w
LA210
Printer
13.2 pitch
16.5 pitch
6.6 pitch
8.25 pitch
––––––
––––––
4100 Printer
15.0 pitch
16.67 pitch
7.5 pitch
8.33 pitch
9.1 pitch
18.2 pitch
GRAPHICS DENSITY DIFFERENCES
Graphics densities available in the 4100 printer are different than graphics
densities available in the DEC LA210 printer. The differences are shown
in the following tables.
DEC LA210 Printer Graphics Densities
Dots/inch
330
220
168
132
110
94
83
74
Overlap
77.00%
66.00%
55.00%
50.00%
32.00%
20.00%
9.00%
0.00%
Aspect
ratio
4.58
3.04
2.29
1.83
1.50
1.30
1.12
1.02
Dots/line
4350
2880
2160
1760
1440
1250
1080
960
Inches/Line
13.18
13.09
13.09
13.18
13.09
13.05
13.09
13.09
268
DEC LA210 Control Commands
DEC LA210 Emulation Graphics Densities
(assuming any pitch except 12.0 or 6.0 pitch set prior to beginning
graphics)
Dots/inch
240
240
150
120
100
100
75
75
Overlap
64.29%
64.29%
52.38%
40.48%
28.57%
28.57%
04.76%
04.76%
Aspect
ratio
3.36
3.36
2.08
1.67
1.39
1.39
1.04
1.04
Dots/line
3168
3168
1980
1584
1320
1320
990
990
Inches/line
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
DEC LA210 Emulation Printer Graphics Densities
(assuming 12.0 or 6.0 pitch set prior to beginning graphics)
Dots/inch
240
240
180
180
120
120
90
90
Overlap
64.29%
64.29%
52.38%
40.48%
28.57%
28.57%
04.76%
04.76%
Aspect
ratio
3.36
3.36
2.08
1.67
1.39
1.39
1.04
1.04
Dots/Line
3168
3168
2376
2376
1584
1584
1188
1188
Inches/Line
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
Operator's Guide 269
CHARACTER MAPS
The control commands on the next several pages enable you to pre-select
four different character maps, then map them into the lower or upper data
bytes when you are ready to use them. These commands are valid only
while the printer is in DEC LA210 emulation.
A DEC character map is an assignment of printable characters to some
data bytes between 0 and 255. It contains printable characters only and
does not contain control codes.
The lower data bytes are 33 through 126 decimal (21 through 7E
hexadecimal). The upper data bytes are 161 through 254 decimal (A1
through FE hexadecimal). The positions of the lower and upper data
bytes are shown in the illustration on the next page.
The four pre-selectable character maps are called G0, G1, G2, and G3.
"G0" through "G3" are equivalent to the character maps that Digital
Equipment Corporation refers to as "Graphics 0" through "Graphics 3".
The lower and upper data bytes are equivalent to the character maps
Digital Equipment Corporation refers to as "GL" (Graphics Left) and "GR"
(Graphics Right).
Any character map available in DEC LA210 emulation may be selected as
G0, G1, G2, or G3. These selections are stored in permanent memory
and are not lost at power off. Default selections are shown below:
•
G0:
United States Character Map
•
G1:
VT100 Line Draw Character Map
•
G2:
Multilingual Character Map
•
G3:
United States Character Map
270
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Techniques for mapping preselected character maps into lower or upper
data bytes are shown in the following illustration. Default mappings are
shown below:
•
Lower Data Bytes: G0
•
Upper Data Bytes: G2
All available character maps are primary character maps and the printer
supports the DEC LA210 control commands used to select primary
character maps. No alternate character maps are available and control
codes to select alternate character maps are not supported.
The illustration that follows shows how character maps G0 through G3 are
selected as national-use, multilingual, or VT100 line draw maps, and then
how those maps are selected for the lower and upper data bytes of the
character set.
DEC LA210 Emulation Character Mapping
AB0-AJ
Operator's Guide 271
Character maps for DEC LA210 may be selected using the configuration
menu or with control commands. Differences between these methods are
described below.
Using the Configuration Menu to Select Character Maps
Using the configuration menu, you can select character maps G0, G1, G2
and G3 for the 7-bit or 8-bit DEC character set. Different character maps
may be selected.
Character map G0 can be mapped only into the lower data bytes.
Character maps G1 through G3 can be mapped into either or both the
lower and upper data bytes.
The character maps selected for G0 and G2 become active when you turn
on the printer. The character maps selected for G1 and G3 may be
invoked using the commands shown in this section.
Using Control Commands to Select Character Maps
Using the control commands shown on the following pages, you can
assign any character map to G0 through G3. The assignments are active
when mapped into the lower or upper data bytes using the mapping
commands shown in this section.
Character map G0 can be mapped only into the lower data bytes. G1,
G2, and G3 may be mapped into either or both the lower and upper data
bytes. Before you can access map G1 through G3 in the upper data
bytes, the "8 Bit DEC" option must be selected from the configuration
menu; otherwise, the command is stored in memory until the upper data
bytes have been enabled.
272
DEC LA210 Control Commands
The control commands to select character maps G0 through G3 are:
•
ESC ( (n)
Select G0
ESC ) (n)
Select G1
•
ESC * (n)
Select G2
ESC + (n)
Select G3
n specifies the character map as follows:
A
B
K
R
Y
n=Character Map
United Kingdom
United States
Germany
France
Italy
Z
h
<
0
n=Character Map
Spain
Hebrew
Multilingual
VT100 Line Draw
5
6
7
9
n=Character Map
Finland
Norway/Denmark
Sweden
Canada
With the exception of Multilingual and VT100 Line Draw, the available
character maps are national-use character maps. See Appendix D for
charts of these character maps.
Additional information for each command is provided on the following
pages.
ESC ( (n)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select G0
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
(
(
40
28
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Assigns a character map to G0. n specifies one of the character maps
listed previously.
This control command does not change the character set currently in use.
The selection takes effect when G0 is mapped into the lower data bytes
using control code SI. G0 cannot be mapped into the upper data bytes.
Operator's Guide 273
ESC ) (n)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select G1
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
)
)
41
29
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Assigns a character map to G1. n specifies one of the character maps
listed previously.
This control command does not change the character set currently in use.
The selection takes effect when G1 is mapped into the lower or upper
data bytes using control command SO or ESC ~, respectively.
ESC * (n)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select G2
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
*
*
42
2A
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Assigns a character map to G2. n specifies one of the character maps
listed previously.
This control command does not change the character set currently in use.
The selection takes effect when G2 is mapped into the lower or upper
data bytes using control command ESC n or ESC }, respectively.
ESC + (n)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select G3
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
+
+
43
2B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Assigns a character map to G3. n specifies one of the character maps
listed previously.
This control command does not change the character set currently in use.
The selection takes effect when G3 is mapped into the lower or upper
data bytes using control command ESC o or ESC ¦, respectively.
274
DEC LA210 Control Commands
The following example selects the U.K. character map for G3 and then
maps G3 into the upper data bytes.
Example
LPRINT CHR$(27);"+A";
LPRINT CHR$(27);"¦";
SI
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G0 into Lower Data Bytes (default)
SI
CTRL 0
15
0F
Maps the G0 character map selected with control command ESC ( into
the lower data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
SO
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes
SO
CTRL N
14
0E
Maps the G1 character map selected with control command ESC ) into
the lower data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
ESC n
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes
ESC n
CTRL [
27
1B
110
6E
Maps the G2 character map selected with control command ESC * into
the lower data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
To print only one character from the character map designated as G2, use
control command ESC N.
Operator's Guide 275
ESC o
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes
ESC
CTRL [
o
o
111
6F
Maps the G3 character map selected with control command ESC + into
the lower data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
To print only one character from the character map selected as G3, use
ESC O.
ESC ~
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes*
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
~
~
126
7E
Maps the G1 character map selected with control command ESC ) into
the upper data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
ESC }
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G2 into Upper Data Bytes (default)*
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
}
}
125
7D
Maps the G2 character map selected with control command ESC * into
the upper data bytes, making that character map active for printing.
To print only one character from the character map selected as G2, use
ESC N.
276
DEC LA210 Control Commands
ESC |
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes*
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
|
|
124
7C
Maps the G3 character map selected with control command ESC + into
the upper data bytes, making that character map active for printing. (See
ESC + (n) for an example.)
To print only one character from the character map selected as G3, use
ESC O. 1
ESC N or SS2
Print Next Character from G2
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
SS2
(n)
not applicable
142
(n)
8E
(n)
ESC
CTRL [
N
N
78
4E
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Prints the next character from the G2 character map selected with control
command ESC *. n specifies the character to print. The value of n must
be from 0 to 127. G2 does not need to be currently active (that is,
mapped into the lower or upper data bytes) to use this command.
Both commands perform the same function. SS2 is valid only if "8 Bit
DEC" has been set in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes
have been enabled using ESC SP 7.
This command is valid for printing one character only. To print
continuously from the G2 character map, use control sequence ESC n or
1
To print the upper data byte characters, the "8 Bit DEC" option must be set in the
configuration menu. If the "7 Bit DEC" option is set, these commands are stored in
memory but not invoked until "8 Bit DEC" is selected.
Operator's Guide 277
ESC } to map G2 into the lower or upper data bytes, respectively, making
that character map active for printing.
ESC O or SS3
Print Next Character from G3
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
SS3
(n)
not applicable
143
(n)
8F
(n)
ESC
CTRL [
O
O
79
4F
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
Prints the next character from the G3 character map selected with control
sequence ESC +. n specifies the character to print. The value of n must
be from 0 to 127. G3 does not need to be currently active (that is,
mapped into the lower or upper data bytes) to use this command.
Both commands perform the same function. SS3 is valid only if "8 Bit
DEC" has been set in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes
have been enabled using ESC SP 7.
This command is valid for printing one character only. To print
continuously from the G3 character map, use control code ESC o or ESC
| to map G3 into the lower or upper data bytes, respectively, making that
character map active for printing.
The following prints the character £ from the U.K. character set.
Example
LPRINT CHR$(27);"+A";
LPRINT CHR$(27);"O";
LPRINT "#";
278
DEC LA210 Control Commands
LINES PER INCH
ESC [ (n) z
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Set Line Spacing
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
z
z
122
7A
Sets the number of lines to be printed on each vertical inch (also called
vertical pitch). n specifies the line spacing as follows:
Lines Per Inch:
2
3
4
6
6
8
12
ASCII
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
Decimal
52
53
54
48
49
50
51
Hexadecimal
34
35
36
30
31
32
33
Value of n
6 lines per in. line spacing may also be set using ESC [ z, without sending
parameter n.
When the lines per inch setting is changed, the active line moves down
after the next vertical paper motion command to the next even multiple of
the new vertical pitch. The physical positions of the vertical tabs are also
altered. Changing lines per inch does not reset the top or bottom margin.
Operator's Guide 279
MARGINS
Left Margin2
ESC [ (n) s or ESC [ (n) ; Ø s
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
s
s
115
73
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
;
;
59
3B
Ø
Ø
48
30
s
s
115
73
Sets the left margin to Column n. The left margin is the first column in
which characters are printed. The valid range for n is from 1 to one
column less than the right margin setting.
Both control commands perform the same function.
Right Margin2
ESC [ ; (n) s or ESC [ Ø ; (n) s
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
;
;
59
3B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
s
s
115
73
[
[
91
5B
Ø
Ø
48
30
;
;
59
3B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
s
s
115
73
Sets the right margin to Column n.
2 Selecting or cancelling font pitches, changing the print quality to draft or NLQ, or changing the print area modifies
horizontal margin settings.
If the active column is greater than the new right margin, the next printable character activates the autowrap feature.
280
DEC LA210 Control Commands
The value of n for the right margin depends on the setting of the left
margin and the selected pitch (where LM is the setting for the left margin):
•
5.0 pitch:
LM + 1 !n ! 66
•
6.0 pitch:
LM + 1 !n ! 79
•
7.5 pitch:
LM + 1 ! n ! 99
•
8.33 pitch:
LM + 1 ! n ! 109
•
9.1 pitch:
LM + 1 ! n ! 120
If n is greater than the upper limit, the maximum permitted value is
assumed.
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) s
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
Left and Right Margin
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
;
;
59
3B
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
s
s
115
73
Sets the left margin to Column n1 and the right margin to Column n2.
The value of n2 for the right margin depends on the setting of the left
margin and the selected pitch:
•
5.0 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 66
•
6.0 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 79
•
7.5 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 99
•
8.33 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 109
•
9.1 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 120
•
10.0 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 132
•
12.0 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 158
•
15.0 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 198
Operator's Guide 281
•
16.67 pitch: n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 219
•
18.2 pitch:
n1 + 1 ! n2 ! 240
If n2 is greater than the upper limit, the maximum permitted value is
assumed.
Note: Selecting or cancelling font pitches, changing the print quality to
draft or NLQ, or changing the print area modifies horizontal margin
settings. If n1 or n2 sets the margins past the print area defined
with control command ESC [ n1 ; n2 " s, the sequence is ignored.
If the active column is greater than the new right margin, the next
printable character activates the Auto Wraparound feature.
The following example sets the right and left margins at approximately
1.25 in., assuming an 8½ in. wide paper at 10 character columns per in.
Example
LPRINT CHR$(27);"13;67s";
ESC [ (n) r
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Top Margin
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
r
r
114
72
Sets the top margin to Line n. The maximum value of n is the form length
set with control sequence ESC [ (n) t.
The top margin is reset to Line 1 if the form length is changed. Changing
the lines per inch does not affect the top margin setting.
282
DEC LA210 Control Commands
ESC [ ; (n) r
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Bottom Margin
[
[
91
5B
;
;
59
3B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
r
r
114
72
Sets the bottom margin to Line n. The maximum value of n is one line
less than the form length set with control sequence ESC [ (n) t.
The bottom margin is reset to its maximum value (determined by form
length) if the form length setting is changed. Changing the lines per inch
does not affect the bottom margin setting.
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) r
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
Top and Bottom Margin
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
;
;
59
3B
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
r
r
114
72
Sets the top margin to Line n1 and the bottom margin to Line n2.
The top margin is reset to Line 1 and the bottom margin to its maximum
value (determined by form length) if the form length is changed.
Changing the lines per inch does not affect the top or bottom margin
settings.
The following sets the top and bottom margins at 1 in., assuming an 11 in.
form at 6 lines per in.
Example
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6;60r";
Operator's Guide 283
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) " s
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
Set Print Area
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
;
;
59
3B
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
"
"
34
22
s
s
115
73
Sets the print area to the position specified by n1 and n2.
The left edge of the print area is the position n1/12 in. from the physical
left edge of the paper. The right edge of the print area is the position
n2/12 in. to the right of the left edge.
The left margin is placed one character width to the right of the left edge
of the print area. The right margin is placed one character width to the left
of the right edge of the print area.
When the print area is defined, all existing tab positions are defined
relative to the left edge of the print area. Tabs retain their column
reference numbers.
For example, if no print area has been defined and tabs are set at
Columns 8, 16, and 24, and then, if n1 is set to 12 and n2 is set to 96, the
results are as follows:
•
The left edge of the print area is 1 in. right of the physical left edge of
the paper. The right edge of the print area is 8 in. right of the left edge
of the print area; a total of 9 in. from the physical left edge of the
paper.
•
The left margin is set 1 in. plus one character width right of the
physical left edge of the paper.
•
The right margin is set 8 in. minus one character width right of the left
edge of the print area.
•
Tabs are 1 in. right of their previous position, but remain numbered 8,
16, and 24.
If n1 or n2 is set to zero, the previously defined print area remains in
effect.
284
DEC LA210 Control Commands
If the new right margin is left of the current column and Auto Wraparound
is enabled, the next character is printed on a new line.
MISCELLANEOUS
ESC [ 2 Ø h
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable Linefeed/Newline
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
Ø
Ø
48
30
h
h
104
68
Returns the active column to the left margin when LF or VT is performed.
ESC [ 2 Ø l
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable Linefeed/Newline
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
Ø
Ø
48
30
l
l
108
6C
Does not change the active column when LF or VT is performed.
CR
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Carriage Return
CR
CTRL M
13
0D
Prints all data stored in the print buffer and sets the active column to the
left margin. If Auto Linefeed (LF on CR) is enabled, a linefeed is
performed.
If Carriage Return/Newline is enabled, a linefeed is performed after the
carriage return.
Operator's Guide 285
ESC [ ? 4 Ø h
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable Carriage Return/Newline
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
4
4
52
34
Ø
Ø
48
30
h
h
104
68
When a carriage return is performed, the active column returns to the left
margin and the paper advances one line.
ESC [ ? 4 Ø l
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable Carriage Return/Newline
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
4
4
52
34
Ø
Ø
48
30
l
l
108
6C
When a carriage return is performed, the active column returns to the left
margin and the paper does not advance.
ESC [ ? 7 h
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable Auto Wraparound
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
7
7
55
37
h
h
104
68
Turns on Auto Wraparound mode. Any characters received that would
place the active column past the right margin are printed on the next line,
starting at the left margin. Auto Wraparound mode remains in effect until
control command ESC [ ? 7 l is received.
ESC [ ? 7 •
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable Auto Wraparound
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
7
7
55
37
•
•
108
6C
Turns off Auto Wraparound mode set with control sequence ESC [ ? 7 h.
any characters received that would place the active column past the right
margin are not printed. The printhead remains at the right margin position
until a line terminator is received.
ESC [ (n) t
Form Length
286
DEC LA210 Control Commands
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
t
t
116
74
Sets the length of the form to n lines, not physical units. Changing the
vertical pitch (lines per in.) alters the physical form length.
The maximum value of n is determined by the current vertical lines per
inch setting, as follows:
•
6 lines per in.: n = 132, max.
•
8 lines per in.: n = 176, max.
Changing form length clears the vertical margins and defines the current
line as Line 1.
If the value of n is 0, the printer enters No Form mode. Refer to the
following command.
ESC [ Ø t
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
No Form Mode
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
Ø
Ø
48
30
t
t
116
74
Causes the printer to enter No Form mode. In this mode, there are no
vertical margins or form length. Printing is continuous and line spacing is
determined by the current pitch.
This command overrides the form length setting selected from the
configuration menu. No Form mode remains in effect until the printer
power is turned off, or a new, nonzero form length is set with ESC [ (n) t.
Operator's Guide 287
BEL
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Bell
BEL
CTRL G
7
07
Sounds the beeper for approximately 0.1 second.
The printer accepts up to ten sequential BEL commands; additional BEL
commands are ignored.
CAN
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Cancel
CAN
CTRL X
24
18
Cancels any control function before it is finished. When received in
graphics mode, CAN returns the printer to text mode.
ESC SP 7
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable C1 Control Codes
SP
SP
32
20
7
7
55
37
Enables the printer to receive and interpret the C1 control codes, decimal
range 128 to 159, if upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8
Bit DEC" in the configuration menu. See the following command.
ESC SP 6
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable C1 Control Codes
SP
SP
32
20
6
6
54
36
Causes the MSB in C1 control codes, decimal range 128 to 159, to be set
to 0, effectively mapping control functions to them to C0, decimal range
000 to 031.
288
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Two groups of control codes may be active in the printer: C0 (decimal
range 000 to 031) and C1 (decimal range 128 to 159).
Control codes in C0 are always active. Control codes in C1 are enabled if
upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the
configuration menu and if control command ESC SP 7 has been received.
Otherwise, the printer sets the MSB of data bytes received in the decimal
range 128 to 159 to 0, effectively mapping them to C0, decimal range 000
to 031.
The position of the control codes is shown in these maps.
C0 Control Codes
HEX
-0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
0NUL
SOH
1DC1
DC3
ENQ
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
CAN
ESC
C1 Control Codes
HEX
-0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
8NUL
9DCS
IND
NEL
HTS
VTS
PLD
SS2
SS3
CSI
ST
Operator's Guide 289
ESC P 1 v
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Define Answer Back Message
P
P
80
50
1
1
49
31
v
v
118
76
(h1)...(h30)
(h1)...(h30)
(h1)...(h30)
(h1)...(h30)
Enters an Answer Back Message string in permanent memory. When
control code ENQ is received, the printer sends this Answer Back
Message back to the host.
h1 through h30 are hexadecimal numbers representing characters of the
Answer Back Message.
The message may contain up to 30 characters, including spaces.
Additional characters are discarded. If the message is less than 30
characters long, use control sequence ESC \ (or control code ST if the
upper control codes are enabled) to terminate the message.
Both printable characters and control characters can be used in the
message. The message remains in permanent memory until a new
message is defined.
The following example defines the message "LA210."
Example
LPRINT CHR$(27);"P1v4C41323130";
LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";
ENQ
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Return Answer Back Message
ENQ
CTRL E
5
05
Returns the message defined with the Define Answer Back Message
command ESC P 1 v (h1)...(hx). The message is sent back to the host on
the serial port.
290
DEC LA210 Control Commands
DCS 1 v
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Device Control String
DCS
1
not applicable
144
49
90
31
v
(h1)...(h30)
118
76
(h1)...(h30)
(h1)...(h30)
Performs the same function as ESC P 1 v, that is, it introduces a graphics
string or enters an Answer Back message string. DCS is valid only if the
upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the
configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using
ESC SP 7.
ESC \ or ST
String Terminator
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ST
not applicable
156
9C
ESC
CTRL [
\
\
92
5C
Exits graphics mode and returns to text processing mode. Also
terminates a Define Answer Back Message or Device Control String. Both
commands perform the same function. ST is valid only if the upper data
bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the configuration
menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7.
CSI
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Control Sequence Introducer
CSI
not applicable
155
9B
Performs the same function as ESC [. ESC [ is always valid. CSI is valid
only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in
the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled
using ESC SP 7.
For example, ESC [ z and CSI z are recognized by the printer as identical
commands: each sets line spacing to 6 lines per in.
Operator's Guide 291
GRAPHICS
ESC P (n) q (d1)..(dx)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
P
P
80
50
Graphics
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
q
q
113
71
(d1)..(dx)
(d1)..(dx)
(d1)..(dx)
(d1)..(dx)
Causes the printer to print graphics dot columns.
n specifies the graphics density. This determines the horizontal dotcolumn spacing, the
horizontal dots per inch, the horizontal overlap, the aspect ratio, the dot
columns per line, and the inches per line. The values for n are shown in
the tables below.
Graphics Densities
The table below assumes any pitch other than 12.0 or 6.0 set prior to
beginning graphics.
(n)
2
3
4
5, 0, or 1
6
7
8
9
Dots/
inch
240
240
150
120
100
100
75
75
Overlap
64.29%
64.29%
52.38%
40.48%
28.57%
28.57%
04.76%
04.76%
Aspect
ratio
3.36
3.36
2.08
1.67
1.39
1.39
1.04
1.04
Dots/
line
3168
3168
1980
1584
1320
1320
990
990
Inches/
line
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
292
DEC LA210 Control Commands
The table below assumes 12.0 or 6.0 set prior to beginning graphics.
(n)
2
3
4
5, 0, or 1
6
7
8
9
Dots/
inch
240
240
180
180
120
120
90
90
Overlap
64.29%
64.29%
52.38%
40.48%
28.57%
28.57%
04.76%
04.76%
Aspect
ratio
3.36
3.36
2.08
1.67
1.39
1.39
1.04
1.04
Dots/
line
3168
3168
2376
2376
1584
1584
1188
1188
Inches/
line
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
Note: Graphics densities available in the 4100 printer are different than
graphics densities on the DEC LA210 printer. The differences are
mentioned in "Graphics Density Differences" earlier in this section.
d1 through dx are data byte values from 63 decimal to 126 decimal (3F
hexadecimal to 7E hexadecimal), each representing a graphics dot
column. Subtract 63 decimal from each byte and convert the result to an
8-bit binary expression. The bits set to logic 1 in the binary expression
correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot
column. If a bit is set, the corresponding pin fires. If it is not set, the
corresponding pin does not fire. In each line, 6 printhead pins may fire
during graphics. The least significant bit in the binary expression
corresponds to the top pin. See the following examples.
Operator's Guide 293
The dot pattern for data byte value 82 is shown below.
(82 - 63 = 19 = 00010011)
Dot Rows Dot Column
Cell Values
1
20 = 1
2
21 = 2
3
22 = 4
4
23 = 8
5
24 = 16
6
25 = 32
19 =00010011
If a dot pattern below 63 decimal is sent, a null column (no dots) is
printed. If a dot pattern above 126 decimal is sent, a vertical line (all dots)
is printed.
The following codes can be used within graphics mode to perform
functions:
-
Performs a carriage return and linefeed.
$
Performs a carriage return without linefeed.
! (n)
Initiates n repeats of the next dot column. n may be any number
from 0 to 65535. The next dot column is repeated n times. When
the count has run out, any following dot columns are printed.
294
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Control codes sent while the printer is in graphics mode are processed or
ignored as follows:
Processed without
exiting
graphics mode
Ignored
NUL
EOT
BS
FF
ENQ
BEL
LF
HT
DEL
SI
CR
VT
SO
The printer remains in graphics mode until:
•
The power is turned off.
•
A valid C1 control code (decimal range 128 and 159) is received.
•
A control command is received.
•
A string terminator (ST or ESC \) is received.
•
The control code CAN is received.
When one of these events occurs, all pending graphic data are printed
out, the printer exits graphics mode, and the command is executed as
normal.
Operator's Guide 295
Example
The following shows the command necessary to cause the printer to print
an x-shaped graphics pattern:
33 18 12 12 18 33
+ 66 63 63 63 63 66
d1 – d6
pin fire data
offset
96 80 75 75 81 96
data byte, decimal
‘
data byte, ASCII
Q
K
Q K
‘
REM PRINT X-SHAPED PATTERN USING
REM 200 DOTS/INCH DENSITY GRAPHICS
LPRINT CHR$(27);"P2q`QKKQ`";CHR$(27);"\";
296
DEC LA210 Control Commands
PAPER MOTION
ESC D or IND
Index
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
IND
not applicable
132
84
ESC
CTRL [
D
D
68
44
Advances the active line by one line. When the active line is advanced
past the bottom margin, the active line is set to the top margin. IND does
not change the active column.
Both commands perform the same function. IND is valid only if the upper
data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the
configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using
ESC SP 7.
ESC E or NEL
Linefeed with Carriage Return (Next Line)
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
NEL
not applicable
133
85
ESC
CTRL [
E
E
69
45
Advances the active line by one line and returns the active column to the
left margin. Both commands perform the same function. NEL is valid
only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in
the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled
using ESC SP 7.
Operator's Guide 297
ESC K or PLD
Advance Paper 1/12 Inch
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
27
1B
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
PLD
not applicable
139
8B
ESC
K
K
75
4B
CTRL [
Performs a 1/12 in. paper feed. Linefeed/Newline mode does not affect
this command. The active line is not modified. The next form feed is
measured from the last active line, making
the next top of form reference inaccurate. Both commands perform the
same function. Partial Line Down (PLD) is valid only if the upper data
bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the configuration
menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7.
LF
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Linefeed
LF
CTRL
J
10
0A
Advances the active line by one line. When the active line is advanced
past the bottom margin and above the top margin, the active line is set to
the next top margin.
If Linefeed/Newline mode is enabled, LF also returns the active column to
the left margin. LF does not change the active column.
298
DEC LA210 Control Commands
ESC [ (n) d
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Advance to Line n
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
d
d
100
64
Advances the active line to Line n. When the active line is advanced past
the bottom margin and above the next top margin, the active line is set to
the next top margin.
ESC [ (n) e
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Advance n Lines
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
e
e
101
65
Advances the paper by n number of lines. If n is 0, 256 lines is assumed.
When the active line is advanced past the bottom margin and above the
next top margin, the active line is set to the next top margin.
FF
SCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Form Feed
FF
CTRL
L
12
0C
Advances the paper to the top margin of the next page. To advance the
paper to the next top of form instead of the top margin, the top margin
setting must be cleared. If Linefeed/Newline mode is enabled, the active
column is returned to the left margin.
Operator's Guide 299
PITCH
ESC [ (n) w
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Select Pitch
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
w
w
119
77
Sets the number of characters printed per horizontal inch. n specifies the
pitch as follows:
Pitch:
5
6
7.5 8.33 9.1 10
10
12 15.0 16.67 18.2
Value of n
ASCII 5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
1
8
Decimal 53
54
55
56
57
48
49
50
51
52
49 56
Hexadecimal35
36
37
38
39
30
31
32
33
34
31 38
10 pitch may also be selected using ESC [ w, without sending parameter
n.
Changing the pitch resets left and right margins to default settings.
ESC [ ? 2 9 h
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Select Font Pitches
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
2
2
50
32
9
9
57
39
h
h
104
68
Sets pitch select mode to font pitches. In this mode, only certain
character widths are printed. If currently printing in 10.0 to 18.2 pitch, only
10 characters per inch are printed. If printing in 5.0 to 9.1 pitch, only 5
characters per inch are printed.
300
DEC LA210 Control Commands
ESC [ ? 2 9 l
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Select All Pitches
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
2
2
50
32
9
9
57
39
l
l
108
6C
Cancels font pitches set with control sequence ESC [ ? 2 9 h. Sets pitch
select mode to all pitches. The pitch in use prior to selecting font pitches
is restored.
PRINT STYLE
ESC [ Ø " z or ESC [ 1 " z
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Draft Quality Printing
[
[
91
5B
Ø
Ø
48
30
"
"
34
22
z
z
122
7A
[
[
91
5B
1
1
49
31
"
"
34
22
z
z
122
7A
Selects draft quality printing. Cancels near letter quality printing selected
from the configuration menu or with control command ESC [ 2 " z.
Both control commands perform the same function.
ESC [ 2 " z
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Near Letter Quality Printing
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
"
"
34
22
z
z
122
7A
Selects near letter quality printing. This print mode remains in effect until
the printer is turned off or until reset with command ESC [ Ø " z or ESC [ 1
" z, or changed using the configuration menu or the NLQ control key.
Near letter quality printing is available only in 10, 12, and 15 pitch.
Operator's Guide 301
ESC [ 4 m
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable Underline
[
[
91
5B
4
4
52
34
m
m
109
6D
Selects the underline function. All succeeding print characters are
underlined until the function is disabled with control command ESC [ 2 4
m or ESC [ 0 m.
ESC [ 2 4 m
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable Underline
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
4
4
52
34
m
m
109
6D
Cancels the underline function enabled with control command ESC [ 4 m
or ESC [ 2 m.
ESC [ 2 m
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Enable Underline
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
m
m
109
6D
Selects the underline function. All succeeding print characters are
underlined until the function is disabled with control command ESC [ 2 4
m or ESC [ Ø m.
ESC [ Ø m
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Disable Underline
[
[
91
5B
Ø
Ø
48
30
m
m
109
6D
Cancels the underline function enabled with control command ESC [ 4 m
or ESC [ 2 m.
302
DEC LA210 Control Commands
SPECIAL PRINTHEAD MOVEMENT
ESC [ (n) `
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Set Active Column to Column n
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
`
`
96
60
Causes the next character to be printed in Column n. The character
following n is the grave accent (see ASCII data byte value 96 decimal).
BS
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Backspace
BS
CTRL H
8
08
Causes the active column to move to the left one space. If the active
column is at the left margin, the backspace command is ignored.
ESC [ (n) a
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Advance n Columns
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
a
a
97
61
Advances the active column n number of columns.
If Linefeed/Newline is enabled, attempting to move the active column
more than one column right of the right margin executes a
linefeed/newline.
Operator's Guide 303
PRINT DIRECTION
ESC [ ? 4 1 h
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Unidirectional Printing
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
4
4
52
34
1
1
49
31
h
h
104
68
Begins unidirectional printing. Data are printed only when the printhead is
moving left to right. Printing this way improves vertical character
alignment.
Unidirectional printing remains in effect until reset with ESC [ ? 4 1 l.
Note: If set to ON, "PRINTSTYLE, Bi-Directional Graphics / NLQ in the
configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing.
ESC [ ? 4 1 l
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Bidirectional Printing
[
[
91
5B
?
?
63
3F
4
4
52
34
1
1
49
31
l
l
108
6C
Begins bidirectional printing. Data are printed when the printhead is
moving in either direction. This is the default print mode. It remains in
effect until reset by ESC [ ? 4 1 h.
304
DEC LA210 Control Commands
TABS
Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column3
ESC H or ESC 1
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
H
H
72
48
1
1
49
31
Adds a horizontal tab at the current column, but not at a physical position
on the paper.
Both control commands perform the same function.
Clear Horizontal Tab at Current Column‡
ESC [ g or ESC [ Ø g
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
g
g
103
67
[
[
91
5B
Ø
Ø
48
30
g
g
103
67
Clears horizontal tab at current column.
Both control commands perform the same function.
3
Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops. These commands only set
or clear the tabs. The Horizontal Tab control code, HT, causes the active column to advance to subsequent
tab positions.
Selecting or cancelling font pitches, changing the print quality to draft or NLQ, or changing the print area also
changes the physical position of the tabs.
Operator's Guide 305
Set Horizontal Tab at Column n4
ESC [ (n) u
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
u
u
117
75
Adds a horizontal tab at Column n.
Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs§
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n16) u
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
;
;
59
3B
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
;
;
59
3B
...(n16)
...(n16)
...(n16)
...(n16)
u
u
117
75
Adds multiple horizontal tabs at Columns n1, n2, etc. A maximum of 16
horizontal tabs may be set with one command.
ESC 2 or ESC [ 2 g or ESC [ 3 g
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Clear All Horizontal Tabs§
2
2
50
32
[
[
91
5B
2
2
50
32
g
g
103
67
[
[
91
5B
3
3
51
33
g
g
103
67
Clears all previously set horizontal tabs. All three control commands
perform the same function.
4
Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops. These commands only set
or clear the tabs. The Horizontal Tab control code, HT, causes the active column to advance to subsequent
tab positions.
Selecting or cancelling font pitches, changing the print quality to draft or NLQ, or changing the print area also
changes the physical position of the tabs.
306
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Horizontal Tab Set∗
HTS
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
HTS
not applicable
136
88
Performs the same function as ESC H and ESC 1. Adds a horizontal tab
at a column, but not at a physical position on the page. HTS is valid only
if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the
configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using
ESC SP 7.
HT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Horizontal Tab
HT
CTRL I
9
09
Causes the active column to advance to the next horizontal tab position to
the right of the current column. If there are no tabs to the right of the
current column, the active column becomes the column after the right
margin.
VTS
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Vertical Tab Set*
VTS
not applicable
138
8A
Adds a vertical tab at the current line. Vertical tabs are set at line
numbers not at physical locations on the page. VTS is valid only if the
upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting "8 Bit DEC" in the
configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using
ESC SP 7.
∗
Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops. These commands only set or clear
the tabs. The Horizontal Tab control code, HT, causes the active column to advance to subsequent tab positions.
Selecting or cancelling font pitches, changing the print quality to draft or NLQ, or changing the print area also changes the
physical position of the tabs.
Operator's Guide 307
Set Vertical Tab at Current Line5
ESC J or ESC 3
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
J
J
74
4A
3
3
51
33
Adds a vertical tab at the current line. Vertical tabs are set at line
numbers, not physical locations on the page. Both control commands
perform the same function.
ESC [ 1 g
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Clear Vertical Tab at Current Line**
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
1
1
49
31
g
g
103
67
Clears the vertical tab at the current line. Vertical tabs at other lines are
unaffected.
ESC [ (n) v
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Set Vertical Tab at Line n**
[
[
91
5B
(n)
(n)
(n)
(n)
v
v
118
76
Add a vertical tab at Line n. Vertical tabs are set at line numbers, not
physical locations on the page.
5 Changing line spacing also changes the physical position of tab stops
These commands only set or clear the tabs. The vertical tab control code, VT, causes the active line to
advance to subsequent tab positions.
308
DEC LA210 Control Commands
Set Multiple Vertical Tabs6
ESC [ (n1) ; (n2) ; ...(n15) v
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
[
[
91
5B
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
(n1)
;
;
59
3B
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
(n2)
;
;
59
3B
...(n15)
...(n15)
...(n15)
...(n15)
v
v
118
76
Adds multiple vertical tabs at Columns n1, n2, etc. You may set up to a
maximum of 15 vertical tabs with the use of one command. Vertical tabs
are set at line numbers, not physical locations on the page.
ESC 4 or ESC [ 4 g
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
ESC
CTRL [
27
1B
Clear All Vertical Tabs††
4
4
52
34
[
[
91
5b
4
4
52
34
g
g
103
67
Clears all previously set vertical tabs. Both control commands perform
the same function.
VT
ASCII:
Control:
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Vertical Tab
VT
CTRL K
11
0B
Causes the active line to advance to the next vertical tab on the current
page. If there are no more vertical tabs on the current page, the active
line is set at the top margin on the next page.
If Linefeed/Newline mode is enabled, the active column is also returned to
the left margin.
6 Changing line spacing also changes the physical position of tab stops.
These commands only set or clear the tabs. The vertical tab control code, VT, causes the active line to
advance to subsequent tab positions.
Appendix A—
Specifications
The printer employs three printheads. Each printhead contains one row of
nine wires arranged vertically. The printheads are fastened to a shuttle or
carriage assembly.
Two carriage assemblies are offered:
•
Wide Carriage. In 10 pitch draft mode at 6 lpi, the wide carriage is
optimized to support a throughput of 300 lpm over 132 columns; in
NLQ mode, it supports a throughput of 75 lpm.
•
Narrow Carriage. In 10 pitch draft mode at 6 lpi, the narrow carriage is
optimized to support a throughput of 400 lpm over 80 columns; in NLQ
mode, it supports a throughput of 100 lpm.
Both models can print a 13.6-in. line of characters or graphics.
This appendix deals with specifications. These include the printer's
characteristics, safety features, reliability, physical features, and
requirements.
Note: All specifications in this appendix are subject to change without
notice.
A-2
Appendix A—Specifications
CHARACTERISTICS
Throughput
Wide Model*
Draft
NLQ
300 lpm
75 lpm
191 lpm
62 lpm
185 lpm
N/A
118 lpm
N/A
118 lpm
N/A
Pitch
10
12
15
16.67
18.2
*
Printing 6 lines per in. on a 132 character column.
**
Printing 6 lines per in. on an 80 character column.
Narrow Model**
Draft
NLQ
400 lpm
100 lpm
281 lpm
83 lpm
285 lpm
N/A
193 lpm
N/A
183 lpm
N/A
Printing Mechanism
Printing
Direction
Bidirectional, short-line logic seeking: normally bidirectional (or
selectable as unidirectional) for text; unidirectional for graphics.
Printheads
Type
Dot-matrix impact using ballistic wire
driven through ruby guides.
Number of Heads
3
Horizontal Distance
Between Printheads
Wide Carriage: 4.4 in. on centers
Narrow Carriage: 2.8 in. on centers
Number of Wires Per
Head
9
Operator's Guide
A-3
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Printing Mechanism, continued
Diameter of
Wire
Duty Cycle
Printhead
Carriage
0.014 in. (0.356 mm)
•
No limitation when printing rolling ASCII
characters
•
60 lines at 136 characters per line when
printing same character
Wide Carriage
Optimized for 13.2-in.-wide column
Narrow Carriage
Optimized for 8.0-in.-wide column
Line Length
Up to 13.6 in. with either narrow or wide
carriage
Copies
Original + 5 copies, max. (See “Paper” Requirements.)
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Method
Adjustable pull tractors for continuous forms
Paper Path
Front and bottom loading
A-4
Appendix A—Specifications
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Paper Feed, continued
Paper Handling
Capacity
Total thickness must not exceed 0.018 in. (0.46 mm), based on
following requirements. (See "Paper" Requirements.)
Width
Label Handling
Capacity
Line Spacing
(Vertical Pitch, in
Lines / In.)
Line Feed
Increments
*
Bond Weight
Single-Part Paper:
3.0 to 16.0 in.
14 to 28 lb
(52 to 105
2
g/m )
Multipart-Part
Paper:
(Each Sheet)
3.0 to 16.0 in.
11 to 21 lb*
2
(40 to 80 g/m )
Total thickness: must not exceed 0.007 in. (0.18 mm), based on
width range of 3.0 to 16.0 in., with no trimming. (See "Label"
Requirements.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Menu Selectable: 6 to 8 lpi.
Universal control Commands: 144 to 144/170 lpi.
Epson/IBM Control Commands: 216 to 216/255 lpi.
DEC Control Commands: 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 lpi.
Switch Panel. 1/6 in., 1/8 in., 1/144 in.
Universal Control Commands. n/144 in., n = 1 to 170
Epson/IBM Control Commands: n/216 in., n = 1 to 255
DEC Control Commands. 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12 in.
Varies among first, middle, and last parts.
Operator's Guide
A-5
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Paper Feed, continued
Line Feed
Direction
Forward in linefeed increment specified above. (1/144 in.
increments in reverse direction.)
Form Length
0.5 to 31.5 in. (12.7 to 800 mm) in 0.5 in. increments using
2
menu*. Also, 420 mm, 297 mm, 210 mm, 148.5 mm, and 11 /3
in.
Selectable: 11 or 5 in. per second
Slew Rate
Ribbon
Type
Cartridge
Ribbon Life
Nylon ribbon, 1/2 in. wide, black
Disposable, full-carriage length cassette, approx. 3 in. x 4 in. x
20 in. Clean-hands installation.
6 million draft-mode characters
Emulations
•
•
•
Epson FX-100
IBM Proprinter XL
DEC LA210
Character Sets
Control Code Maps
*
Epson
Standard Epson Map
IBM
IBM #1 and IBM #2
DEC
C0 and C1
Other form lengths are available using emulation control commands. The DEC LA210 emulation also contains
a No Form mode selected by a control command.
A-6
Appendix A—Specifications
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Character Sets, continued
Character Code
Maps
ASCII
Standard 96-Character ASCII*
Epson
96-Character Epson National-Use**,
including :
U.S.
Japan
France
Norway
Germany
Denmark II
U.K.
Spain II
Denmark
Latin America
Sweden
Hebrew
Italy (Epson)
Italy (ANSI)
Spain
IBM
Code Page 437 (U.S.), Code Page 437
(Hebrew), Code Page 850 (Multilingual),
Code Page 860 (Portugal)†
*
All emulations support the standard ASCII character map.
**
Also adapts to an Epson National-Use Standard Code Page using Epson control commands.
†
All also adapt to an IBM All-Character Character Set (PC-8) using IBM control commands.
Operator's Guide
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Character Sets, continued
DEC
DEC National-Use, including :
Canada Italy (ANSI)
Spain
Finland Hebrew
U.K.
France Sweden
U.S.
Germany Norway/Denmark
DEC Multilingual
DEC VT100 Line Draw
Overlays
OCR A, OCR B, Downloaded
Characters††
Human-Readable Fonts (Text Characters)
Character
Modes
ROM Character
Library
NLQ (10, 12, and 15 pitches only) and Draft
428 Printable Draft Characters; 428 Printable NLQ Characters.
Library includes Space Character.
Fixed Pitches
(Characters/In.)
5, 6, 7.5, 8.33, 8.57, 9.1, 10 (Pica), 12 (Elite), 15, 16.67, 17.14
(Pica Condensed), 18.2 (Elite Condensed)
Typeface
Nonproportional typewriter face and OCR
Typestyle
Upright, Italics, Condensed, Enlarged
†† Download characters for overlaying using universal control commands.
A-7
A-8
Appendix A—Specifications
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Human-Readable Fonts, continued
Weight
Normal Stroke, Emphasized (Bold)
Download
Characters
Supported
Text Composition
Draft
(ROM Resident)
Pitch
10
12
15
17.14
18.2
Dot Configuration
Char. Graphics
9 x 7 9 x 12
9 x 7 9 x 12
9 x 7 9 x 12
9 x 7 9 x 12
9 x 7 9 x 12
Dot Size
(Dia.)
1/100 in.
1/120 in.
1/150 in.
1/166 in.
1/182 in.
18 x 14 18 x 24
18 x 14 18 x 24
18 x 14 18 x 24
1/200 in.
1/240 in.
1/300 in.
NLQ
(ROM Resident)
10
12
15
Download Draft
—
—
—
1/120 in.
Download NLQ
—
—
—
1/240 in.
Barcodes
Styles
Code 3 of 9, EAN-8, EAN-13, UPC-A, UPC-E, Interleaved 2 of 5,
PostNet, Codabar
Height
1/12
Bar Width
0.014 in., min.
in. to 10 in. in 1/12 in. increments
Operator's Guide
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Barcodes, continued
Space Width
0.014 in., min.
Intercharacter Gap
0.014 in., min.
Weight
Single and Double Strike
Density
75 and 100 dpi
Graphics
Graphics Technique
Bit-image, dot-addressable
Graphic Resolution
Single Density: 1/60 in. dia.
Double Density: 1/120 in. dia.
Quadruple Density: 1/240 in. dia.
Serial Interface*
Type
RS-232-C (RS-422-A optional)
Protocol
DTR, X-ON/X-OFF, or ETX/ACK
Baud
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200
Data Bits
7 or 8
Parity
Even, Odd, Mark, Space, or None
Stop Bits
*
See Appendix B for details.
1 or 2
A-9
A-10
Appendix A—Specifications
CHARACTERISTICS, CONTINUED
Parallel Interface*
Centronics
Compatible
Selectable initialize sensitivity
Memory Configuration
RAM
32K x 8 for download characters and input buffer
EPROM
128K x 8 firmware
SAFETY FEATURES
Your printer has the following safety features:
*
•
Printer prints at half speed when printing 10 pitch if the operator
access door is open.
•
All electrically conductive materials are grounded.
See Appendix C for details.
Operator's Guide
RELIABILITY
Printhead Life Expectancy:
Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF):
Mean Time to
Repair (MTTR):
500 million characters per printhead
9000 power-on hr. at 15% duty cycle and
32% print density per page
.5 hr.
PHYSICAL
Height:
6.02 in. (153 mm), without acoustic hood
Width:
27.38 in. (695.5 mm)
Depth:
16.7 in. (424 mm) without acoustic hood
Weight (out of box):
45 lb (20.5 kg), max.
Shipping Weight:
52 lb (23.6 kg) max.
Acoustic Level (ISO 7779):
65 dBA, max, without acoustic hood and stand
55 dBA, max, with acoustic hood and stand
0 dBA in standby mode (power on but not printing)
A-11
A-12
Appendix A—Specifications
REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL
Voltage:
110, 120, 220, or 240 vac
Frequency:
50/60Hz ± 3Hz
Power Consumption: Standby: less than 30 w
Printing: 200 w, max. printing rolling ASCII characters
Leakage Current:
0.0058 ma, max.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature:
Operating: 50° to 100° F (approx. 10° to 40° C)
Non-Operating: -40° to 150° F (approx. -40° to 65° C)
Humidity:
Operating: 20% to 80% and noncondensing
Non-Operating: 10% to 90% and noncondensing
Altitude:
Operating: -400 ft to 10,000 ft (approx. -125 m to 3000 m) above
MSL
Non-Operating: -400 ft to 40,000 ft (approx. -125 m to 12,000
m) above MSL
Miscellaneous:
Avoid exposure to water, toxic chemicals, or corrosive
substances.
INTERFACE
See Appendixes B and C for serial and parallel interface signals and cable requirements.
Operator's Guide
A-13
PAPER
Note: The printer may not operate reliably or efficiently with all
possible forms that fit the paper requirements specified below.
The following table applies to single and multipart forms. Multipart
forms are understood to be any carbonless or carbon-backed paper.
Bond Weight:
Layer
Top sheet
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
No. of
sheets
Single-part 14-28 lb
52-105
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
g/m2
45-90
kg/ream
2-part
11-17 lb
11-21 lb
40-64 g/m2 40-80 g/m2 _______
_______
_______
_______
34-55
34-70
kg/ream
kg/ream
3-part
11-14 lb
11-21 lb
40-52 g/m2
40-80 g/m2 _______
_______
_______
34-45 kg/ream
34-48
kg/ream
4-part
11-14 lb
11-21 lb
40-52 g/m2
40-56 g/m2 _______
_______
34-45 kg/ream
34-48
kg/ream
5-part
11-14 lb
11-21 lb
40-52 g/m2
40-56 g/m2 _______
34-45 kg/ream
34-48
kg/ream
6-part
11-14 lb
11-21 lb
40-52 g/m2
40-56 g/m2
34-45 kg/ream
34-48
kg/ream
Note:
7th
_______
8th
Width
0.002_______ 0.005 in.
(0.065-0.13
mm)
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
0.015 in.
_______ max. (0.38
mm)
_______
_______
_______
_______
g/m2:
Weight of a sheet of paper 39.37 x 39.37 in. (1000 x 1000 mm)
kg/ream: Weight of 1000 sheets of paper 31.02 x 42.95 in. (788 x 1091 mm)
lb:
Weight of 500 sheets of paper 17 x 22 in.: (431.8 x 558.8 mm)
For example, 64 gm2 = 55 kg/ream = 17 lb
Total
thickness
16.0 in.
max.
A-14
Appendix A—Specifications
Size and Print Area:
B
C
E
D
F
A
*
Symbol
A
Description
Form Length*
B
C
D
E
F
Paper Width
1st Character Column
Vertical Sprocket Spacing
Print Area
Horizontal Sprocket
Position
Specification
0.5 to 31.5 in. (approx. 12.7 to 800 mm) in ½ in.
inc.
3 to 16 in. (approx. 76.2 to 406.4 mm)
0.55 to 0.88 in. (approx. 14 to 22.35 mm)
0.50 in.
13.6 in. (approx. 342.9 mm), max.
0.25 in. or 6.00 mm
Form length as selected in the configuration menu. The actual paper length is continuous. Longer form lengths
and a No Form mode are available in some emulations.
Operator's Guide
Multipart Forms:
A-15
Multiple-part forms should be secured on both sides with glue or
crimp fasteners.
Paper. When using multipart forms, consider the following:
•
When the forms are unfolded, the height of the bulge at the
outfold should not exceed the following, depending upon the
forms' thickness:
Total thickness (t) of forms
Allowable height of bulge
t < 0.012 in. (0.3 mm)
0.079 in. (2 mm)
0.012 in. < t < 0.022 in.
0.118 in. (3 mm)
(0.3 mm < t < 0.55 mm)
"
"
0.079 or 0.118 in. max.
(2 or 3 mm)
t
!
#
#
$#
1 in.
½ in.
!
$
$
1 in.
This limitation applies to the multipart forms fastened with any
method.
•
The maximum displacement of the center of the sprocket holes
between sheets shall not exceed 0.5 mm.
A-16
Appendix A—Specifications
Gluing. Gluing specifications for multipart forms are as follows:
•
Spot gluing should be applied along both sides.
•
Spot-gluing should be applied at the alternate positions from
the top to bottom sheet.
•
Glue should be applied evenly without wrinkling or creasing.
•
Paper thickness change due to gluing should not exceed 0.05
mm.
Crimp Fastening. Crimp specifications for multipart forms are as
follows:
•
Double crimp fasteners (4-tail) should be applied to the same
positions on both sides of the forms. (See the figure on the
next page.)
Single crimp fasteners (4-tail) are also acceptable.
•
In consideration of displacement between the top and bottom
layers, a spacing of at least 1/3 in. should be used for form
design.
•
Displacement between sheets in 5-part forms should not
exceed
2.2 mm in self-print testing.
•
The combination of gluing on one side and crimp fasteners on
the other side is allowed.
•
The crimp fastener pitch should be a maximum of 2 in.
When the total thickness of forms is 0.3 mm or less and the
paper width is 10 in. or less, a pitch of 3 in. is allowed.
Operator's Guide
•
A-17
Metallic fasteners must not be used.
"
Crimp fasteners
(Double, 4-tail)
2 inches
max.
!
Sprocket Holes and Perforations. Sprocket hole and perforation
specifications for multipart forms are as follows:
•
The sprocket holes should be clearly and cleanly cut.
•
Forms should be fanfolded at every horizontal perforated line.
•
Both edges of each perforation should not be torn.
•
Intersection of the horizontal and vertical perforations should
not be cut.
A-18
Labels:
Appendix A—Specifications
Label size and print area are shown in the following illustration.
(R) 0.079 in. (2 mm) min.
Label
blank
Label
Base
paper
With label No label
blank
blank
•
The total thickness of label and base paper should not exceed
0.18 mm.
•
Label forms shall not be left in the printer.
•
The label adhesion should be so strong that no label comes off
or partially separates from the base paper after a label form
has been left in the printer for 72 hours at room temperature.
•
Feed labels only from the bottom.
•
The temperature range allowable for label printing is 40º F to
95º F (5º C to 35º C).
Appendix B—
Serial Interface
This appendix deals with RS-232-C (and RS-422-A) serial interface
connectivity.
SERIAL INTERFACE BASICS
RS-232-C, commonly referred to as RS-232, is a serial interface
communication standard developed by the Electronics Industries
Association (EIA) which defines communication signals, pin assignments,
and voltage levels.
The standard divides equipment into two categories:
•
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
•
Data Communication Equipment (DCE)
The two types of equipment are distinguished by their signals and pin
assignments, as shown in the table on the following page:
•
DTE devices transmit on Pin 2
•
DCE devices transmit on Pin 3
Computers and serial printers are usually DTE devices. Modems and
communication controllers are usually DCE devices.
The RS-232-C standard specifies more signals than are used, or needed,
in most data communication applications. However, for reference, the
table on the following page lists all communication signals, their
B-2
Appendix B—Serial Interface
abbreviations, and pin assignments. The direction of the arrow indicates
whether the signal is an input or output of the device.
Pin assignments are specified for 25-pin D-type connectors. The RS-232C standard does not specify pin assignments for serial communication on
9-pin connectors.
Only nine of the 25 RS-232-C signals are commonly used in serial
connections. These nine are listed in the table on Page B-4.
Serial Port Connector
JB0-BL
RS-422-A serial interface is optional. RS-422-A serial connectivity
involves differential drivers and receivers for extended computer-to-printer
distances, depending on the baud. RS-422-A signals are not
implemented on the standard printer.
Operator's Guide
DTE Device
Pin #
1
2
%
3
&
4
%
5
&
6
&
7
8
&
9
&
10
&
11
&
12
&
13
&
14
%
15
&
16
&
17
&
18
19
%
20
%
21
&
22
&
23
%
24
%
25
Signal
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Pos. DC Test Voltage
Neg. DC Test Voltage
Equalizer Mode
Sec. Data Carrier Detect
Sec. Clear To Send
Sec. Transmitted Data
Transmitter Clock
Sec. Received Data
Receiver Clock
Unassigned
Sec. Request To Send
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Quality Detect
Ring Indicator
Data Rate Selector
Ext. Transmitter Clock
Unassigned
Abbreviation
FG
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
DCD
+V
-V
QM
(S)DCD
(S)CTS
(S)TD
TC
(S)RD
—
(S)RTS
DTR
SQ
RI
—
(TC)
—
EIA RS-232-C Pin Assignments
%
&
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
%
&
&
&
%
%
&
&
%
%
B-3
DCE Device
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B-4
Appendix B—Serial Interface
DTE Device
Pin #
1
2
%
3
&
4
%
5
&
6
&
7
8
&
20
%
Signal
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
Abbreviation
FG
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
DCD
DTR
DCE Device
Pin #
1
2
%
3
&
4
%
5
&
6
&
7
8
&
20
%
Common RS-232-C
Note that two signal names in this group, Transmitted Data and Received
Data, are defined from the perspective of the DTE device. The same
terms are used, however, for DCE devices. For DTE devices, the
Transmitted Data signal is assigned to Pin 2 and is a data output; for DCE
devices, the Transmitted Data signal is also assigned to Pin 2, but is a
data input.
To avoid confusion, note that Transmitted Data and Received Data are
misleading terms when used to describe DCE signals. The following chart
defines these and the other nine common RS-232-C signals in
relationship to DTE and DCE devices.
Operator's Guide
DTE DEVICE
Pin
Signal
Name
B-5
DCE DEVICE
Function
Pin
Signal
Name
Function
1
Frame
Ground
(FG)
Frame Ground
1
Frame
Ground
(FG)
Frame Ground
2
Transmitted
Data (TxD)
Output. Data signal. Transmits
serial data on this pin.
2
Transmitted
Data (TxD)
Input. Data signal. Receives
transmitted data on this pin.
3
Received
Data (RxD)
Input. Data signal. Receives
serial data on this pin.
3
Received
Data (RxD)
Output. Data signal.
Transmits serial data on this
pin.
4
Request To
Send
(RTS)
Output. Control signal. DTE has
data to send and is requesting
permission to transmit by placing
this pin high.
4
Request To
Send
(RTS)
Input. Control signal. DCE
looks for positive voltage on
this pin indicating other
device has data to send.
5
Clear To
Send
(CTS)
Input. Control signal. DTE looks
for a positive voltage on this pin
as permission to transmit data.
5
Clear To
Send
(CTS)
Output. Control signal. DCE
grants permission for other
device to transmit data by
placing positive voltage on
this line.
6
Data Set
Ready
(DSR)
Input. Control signal from other
RS-232-C device that lets DTE
know that the other RS-232-C
device is powered up.
6
Data Set
Ready
(DSR)
Output. Control signal. DCE
places positive voltage on
this pin when powered up.
7
Signal
Ground
Signal Ground. (Must be
connected.)
7
Signal
Ground
Signal Ground. (Must be
connected.)
8
Data
Carrier
Detect
(DCD)
Input. Control signal from other
RS-232-C device that lets DTE
know that circuit has been
established.
8
Data
Carrier
Detect
(DCD)
Output. Control signal. DCE
places positive voltage on
this pin when circuit has been
established.
20
Data
Terminal
Ready
(DTR)
Output. Control signal. DTE
places positive voltage on this
pin when powered up.
20
Data
Terminal
Ready
(DTR)
Input. Control signal from
other device that lets DCE
know that other RS-232-C
device is powered up.
DTE/DCE Device Chart
B-6
Appendix B—Serial Interface
With the exception of Frame Ground and Signal Ground, the nine signals
can be categorized as data signals or control signals and are paired as
shown below:
Data Signal Pair:
Pin 2
Transmitted Data TxD
Pin 3
Received Data
RxD
Control Signal
Pair:
Pin 4
Pin 5
Request to Send
Clear to Send
RTS
CTS
Control Signal
Pair:
Pin 6
Pin 20
Data Set Ready
Data Term.
Ready
DSR
DTR
Pin 8, Data Carrier Detect, is also a control signal but it does not have a
functional pair. Some situations require a high voltage on this input to
allow communication. See "Making a Serial Cable" on Page B-9.
Operator's Guide
B-7
SERIAL INTERFACE PIN-OUTS FOR PRINTER
The printer is a DTE device. The table that follows summarizes the pin
assignments on the printer end of a serial interface.
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Signal Name
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Abbr.
FG
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
%
%
%
RS-422-A TxDRS-422-A TxD+
Auxiliary DTR*
TxD 422TxD 422+
——
&
%
%
RS-422-A RxD+**
Auxiliary DTR*
Data Terminal Ready
RxD 422+ <optional, not implemented>
——
Same as Pin 20.
DTR
High until buffer fills, then low.
%
&
%
&
&
Comment
Always high; + 12v, signal level.
<optional, not implemented>
<optional, not implemented>
<optional, not implemented>
<optional, not implemented>
Same as Pin 20.
*
Technically, not an RS-232-C signal. See ”DTR Polarity” under Serial Options in the configuration menu. See
“Handshaking” later in this appendix for more information.
**
RxD on Pin 3 is used as the differential complement RxD 422- of this signal line.
B-8
Appendix B—Serial Interface
MAKING A SERIAL CABLE
Interfacing two RS-232-C serial devices is simply a process of connecting
grounds and tying together the output and input signal pairs.
The wiring diagrams on Page B-10 list the nine most commonly used RS232-C serial interface signals and their pins versus the pin assignments
on DCE and DTE devices. Most computers are DTE devices. Most
modems, repeaters, and translators are DCE.
Connections that are usually required appear as solid lines. Connections
that are normally optional appear as dashed lines. The full compliment of
connections is sufficient for the majority of situations. For special cases,
consult your device's technical reference manual.
Serial connectors come in two genders: male and female. A female
connector is mounted on the printer. Use a male connector on the printer
end of the cable.
Operator's Guide
B-9
Printer To DCE Device Wiring Diagram
AB0-AM
Printer To DTE Device Wiring Diagram
AB0-AN
To determine which wiring diagram to use, you must determine if the
device is DTE or DCE. Locate a description of the target device's
Transmitted Data signal and determine if it is an input or output. If
Transmitted Data is an output, the device is DTE. Use the DTE wiring
diagram. If Transmitted Data is an input, the device is DCE. Use the
DCE wiring diagram.
B-10
Appendix B—Serial Interface
To determine the pin assignments of other devices, refer to those devices'
technical reference manuals. The serial interface pin assignments,
functional description, signal direction, and control requirements are
usually described.
If no documentation is available, a "break-out box" or an intelligent serial
interface cable can determine which pins are used. (I.Q. Technology's
Smart Cable, for example, is an intelligent serial interface cable.)
As pin assignments are determined, pin numbers should be written down
on the appropriate wiring diagram on Page B-10. When you have written
down all required pin assignments, you can then build the cable directly
from the wiring chart.
Keep in mind that the actual pin number assigned to any signal may vary
from device to device. For example, Pin 5 is the pin assigned to Signal
Ground on the IBM PC/AT (or later) while Pin 7 is the pin assigned to
Signal Ground on the IBM PC.
Operator's Guide
B-11
CONNECTION EXAMPLES
Use the following examples as guides in building a serial interface cable.
The following examples are presented:
•
IBM PC to Printer
•
IBM PC/AT to Printer
IBM PC TO PRINTER
The wiring diagram on the following page shows how to connect an IBM
PC, a DTE device, to the printer, also a DTE device. A DTE/DTE
interface must make each side of the link seem as if it is receiving inputs
from a DCE device. This is accomplished by making a cross-connected
cable.
First, the Signal Ground on the printer is tied to the Signal Ground on the
IBM PC; likewise, the Frame Grounds on the printer and IBM PC are tied
together. Next, RxD on the printer (Pin 3) is tied to TxD (Pin 2) on the IBM
PC; then TxD (Pin 2) on the printer is tied to RxD (Pin 3) on the IBM PC.
Lastly, the control signals are connected: DTR (Pin 20) on the printer to
DSR (Pin 6) on the IBM PC, and RTS (Pin 4) on the printer to CTS (Pin 5)
on the IBM PC.
When the printer powers up, it always raises the voltage on its Pin 20,
DTR, and maintains it in an elevated state. The PC receives this signal
on Pin 6, DSR, and interprets it to mean that the printer is available.
B-12
Appendix B—Serial Interface
When the PC has data to send, it looks for a high voltage input on its Pin
5, CTS, before sending data. The printer actually holds the voltage
continuously high on its Pin 4, RTS, which is tied to the PC's Pin 5. Thus,
the PC automatically begins sending data on its Pin 2 and continue until
all data are sent or transmission is interrupted by a handshaking protocol.
IBM PC to Printer Wiring Diagram
AB0-AO
IBM PC/AT* TO PRINTER
The wiring diagram that follows shows how to connect an IBM PC/AT, a
DTE device, to the printer, also a DTE device. It differs from the IBM PC
example only in the pin numbers on the computer side. The IBM PC/AT
uses a male, 9-pin, D-type serial connector.
*
Also 386s, 486s, etc.
Operator's Guide
B-13
First, the Signal Ground on the printer is tied to the Signal Ground on the
IBM PC/AT; likewise, the Frame Grounds on the printer and IBM PC/AT
are tied together. Next, RxD on the printer (Pin 3) is tied to TxD (Pin 3) on
the IBM PC/AT; then TxD (Pin 2) on the printer is tied to RxD (Pin 2) on
the IBM PC/AT. Lastly, the control signals are connected: DTR (Pin 20)
on the printer to DSR (Pin 6) on the IBM PC/AT, and RTS (Pin 4) on the
printer to CTS (Pin 8) on the IBM PC/AT.
IBM PC/AT to Printer Wiring Diagram
AB0-AP
B-14
Appendix B—Serial Interface
HANDSHAKING
Handshaking controls the data flow across the serial interface.
Control of the data flow is necessary because it is possible for computers
to send data faster than the printer can print. The printer contains a data
storage buffer to ease this potential problem, but data flow control is
necessary to totally eliminate the possibility of data loss.
The printer provides two kinds of handshaking:
•
Software handshaking
•
Hardware handshaking
SOFTWARE HANDSHAKING
Software handshaking occurs when a device controls data flow using the
content of the data itself.
The printer supports two software handshaking protocols:
•
X-ON/X-OFF
•
ETX/ACK
X-ON/X-OFF
X-ON/X-OFF is commonly used when printers control the handshake.
The printer accepts characters until its input buffer is nearly full, at which
time it initiates the handshake by sending a "turn-off" character, X-OFF,
back to the computer. When the computer receives this character, it
stops transmitting data. When the input buffer is nearly empty, the printer
sends a "turn-on" character, X-ON, to the computer. Upon receipt of this
character, the computer resumes sending characters.
Operator's Guide
B-15
In the configuration menu, you may select whether the printer sends an
X-ON every 20 seconds during periods when it is ready to receive data
(called robust) or only once.
X-ON is ASCII character decimal number 17, and X-OFF is ASCII
character decimal number 19. These are sometimes referred to as device
control 1 (DC1) and device control 3 (DC3), respectively.
ETX/ACK
ETX/ACK is a commonly used when computers control the handshake.
The computer sends its characters line-by-line. After each line is sent, the
computer puts in an END OF TEXT character, ETX. When the printer is
ready to receive the next line of data, it sends an ACKNOWLEDGMENT
character, ACK, back to the computer.
ETX is ASCII character decimal number 3, and ACK is ASCII character
decimal number 6.
B-16
Appendix B—Serial Interface
HARDWARE HANDSHAKING
Hardware handshaking controls data transmission by changing the
voltage level on a signal wire. Not all printers can respond to control
characters embedded in the data stream (software handshaking).
Many printers use a pin on the connector to specify a "buffer full"
condition. When the printer asserts its buffer-full line, data transmission
stops.
The printer supports two hardware handshaking protocols:
•
•
DTR
BUSY (Inverse DTR)
DTR
DTR handshaking protocol uses the DTR signal on Pin 20. The voltage
remains high until the print buffer is 256 bytes from full, at which time DTR
is set low. When the buffer is 2256 bytes from full (257 bytes if minimum
buffer size is selected in the configuration menu), DTR resets to high and
data transmission can resume.
BUSY (Inverse DTR)
DTR is specified for Pin 20 of an RS-232-C serial interface. Used
according to RS-232-C specifications, DTR is high when the printer is
ready to receive new print data, and low when it is busy processing print
data.
On the 4100 printer, DTR on Pin 20 is also wired to Pins 11 and 19.
Some computer operating systems expect a signal called BUSY (or
inverse DTR) on either Pin 11 or 19, in place of DTR. If used, BUSY is
low when the printer is ready to receive new print data, and high when it is
busy processing data. This is directly opposite of DTR.
Operator's Guide
B-17
Since DTR and BUSY are logical opposites, you can change the polarity
of DTR in the configuration menu. Under Interface Options/Serial
Options, change “DTR Polarity” from “High” (factory default) to “Low.”
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE IT WORK
If your printer-to-computer serial interface is not working, try the following:
•
Check your computer manual's explanation of its RS-232-C serial
interface and compare that to the printer's requirements.
•
Make sure the serial interface cable is wired properly for data transfer
on Pins 2 and 3, and that the control signals are properly matched for
handshaking. (This may require using a serial interface "break out"
box.)
An intelligent serial interface cable, like a "breakout" box, is designed
to make these checks for you and electronically route the necessary
signals to the proper pins. (I.Q. Technology's Smart Cable is one of
these.)
•
Use well-shielded and grounded cables.
•
Obtain support from your dealer.
Check the troubleshooting chart in this operator's guide, under
"Communications" for additional assistance.
B-18
Appendix B—Serial Interface
If the printer does not respond at all to the host:
•
Make sure that you have selected "Serial" under "Active Interface" in
the configuration menu. [Also, do not forget that the printer's "Serial
Options" (protocol, baud, parity, and so on) must match those of the
computer.]
•
Check that Pin 3, RxD, on the printer is connected to TxD on the
computer (Pin 2 on a PC; Pin 3 on a PC/AT). If true, connect DTR,
Pin 20, on the PC to DCD, Pin 8, on the PC to initiate transmission.
Operator's Guide
B-19
INTERFACE CIRCUITS
Version 1
JB0-BP1
B-20
Appendix B—Serial Interface
Version 2
JD0-DS
Appendix C—
Parallel Interface
This appendix deals with Centronics-type parallel interface connectivity.
PARALLEL INTERFACE BASICS
The parallel interface is Centronics-compatible. It receives parallel data
through an 8-bit, input-only port, which is located on the rear panel of the
printer. The connector is a 36-pin female Kycon 37-40360-24-BR, or
equivalent.
Parallel Port Connector
JB0-BK
C-2
Appendix C—Parallel Interface
DATA
The host computer sends each data byte to the printer in parallel across
Data Lines 1 through 8 (connector Pins 2 through 9). A bit set to logical
"1" is transmitted as a high signal; a bit set to logical "0" is transmitted as
a low signal.
Input data and all interface control signals are compatible with TTL
(Transistor-Transistor Logic) levels, 0 to +5 volts.
SYNCHRONIZATION
Synchronization is accomplished by externally supplied STROBE* pulses.
The port receives data prior to the leading (negative) edge of STROBE*.
HANDSHAKING
Handshaking is accomplished by ACKNLG* (acknowledge) and BUSY
signals. These signals control data flow across the parallel interface.
The computer monitors the state of BUSY to determine if the printer is
ready to accept a character. If BUSY is not asserted, the computer sends
a character to the interface on DATA 1 through DATA 8.
After the data setup time, the computer asserts STROBE*. As each
character is received, the leading (negative) edge of STROBE* clocks the
BUSY flipflop, which resets it. This asserts the BUSY signal and latches
the received character into the parallel port register.
When the printer has processed the character and is ready for another, it
sets the BUSY flipflop. This negates the BUSY signal and produces a 5 m
s ACKNLG* pulse. The interface is ready to accept another character as
soon as the ACKNLG* pulse begins.
*
The asterisks following a signal name signifies that logic 1 is an active low.
Operator's Guide
C-3
PARALLEL INTERFACE PIN-OUTS FOR
PRINTER
The table that follows summarizes the pin assignments on the printer end
of the parallel interface. The direction of the arrow indicates whether the
signal is an input (&) to the printer or output (%) from the printer.
A twisted pair cable is often used for each signal in the interface, and the
connection must be completed on the signal return side. To prevent
noise, use cables that are shielded and connect the shield to both the
computer and printer chassis.
Using fewer connections than shown in the table may prevent the
computer from controlling some printer functions. 36-wire cables are
recommended.
C-4
Appendix C—Parallel Interface
Signal Pin #
and Direction
1
&
Signal Name
STROBE*
Description
Synchronous input signal for strobing data into the
printer. Normally high. Pulse width minimum is 1 ms.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA 8
These 8 signals represent the 8-bit data byte.
All eight bits of each character are transmitted to the
printer simultaneously. A high level represents a
binary "1" digit; a low level represents a binary "0"
digit. Data pulse width minimum is 3 ms. Data lines
must be asserted before the strobe goes low.
10
%
ACKNLG*
The printer sends this pulse to the computer after
each character is received. ACKNLG* may be
referred to as a "data request pulse," indicating that
data were received, and the printer is ready to
accept more. ACKNLG* is set high until it receives a
character, then goes low with a pulse width of 5 ms.
This signal works together with the BUSY signal.
11
%
BUSY
When high, data transfer from the computer to the
printer is prevented. BUSY is set high when a
character is strobed into the parallel port, and set
low when a byte has been read. This signal works
together with the ACKNLG* signal.
12
%
PAPER OUT
A high signal indicates the printer is out of paper.
The signal comes directly from the printer's paper
out switch through a buffer. The buffer also drives
the PAPER indicator on the switch panel.
Parallel Interface Pin Assignments
Operator's Guide
Signal Pin #
and
Direction
C-5
Signal Name
Description
ON LINE
When high, this signal indicates the printer is on line
and ready to accept data (if not busy).
14
0V
Logic GROUND level.
15
NC
Not used.
16
0V
Logic GROUND level.
17
CHASSIS GND
Must be connected to computer chassis to ensure
proper printer operation. Connect to printer chassis,
not to signal ground.
+5 VOLTS
Supplies power for external devices. The current is
3
limited to /4 a. to prevent heavy loads on the power
supply. Some computers provide +5 v on this pin.
This may cause the printer to appear "on" after the
power switch has been turned off. The indicator
lights remain lit, but the printer beeps if printing is
attempted. In this case, you should open Pin 18 in
the cable.
STROBE* RET
DATA 1 RET
DATA 2 RET
DATA 3 RET
DATA 4 RET
DATA 5 RET
DATA 6 RET
Pins 19 through 30 are GROUND level returns for
Pins
1 through 12.
13
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
%
%
Parallel Interface Pin Assignments, continued
C-6
Appendix C—Parallel Interface
Signal Pin #
and
Direction
Signal Name
26
27
28
29
30
DATA 7 RET
DATA 8 RET
ACKNLG* RET
BUSY RET
PAPER OUT RET
Description
31
&
INIT*
A low pulse of at least 100 ms (low sensitivity) or
1.66 ms (high sensitivity) resets the printer to its
initial power-on state and clears the buffer.
32
%
+5V
Signal is normally high.
33
GND
34
35
36
NC
NC
NC
No connections.
No connections.
No connections.
Parallel Interface Pin Assignments, continued
Operator's Guide
C-7
PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING
The illustration that follows shows the sequence for parallel data
transmission.
DATA 1
through
DATA 8
1
3
STROBE
2
4
8
5
BUSY
6
ACKNLG
7
Parallel Interface Timing
1. Data set-up time (1 µs, minimum)
2. STROBE* pulse width (1 µs, minimum)
3. Data hold time (1 µs, minimum)
4. STROBE* to BUSY delay (100 ns, typical)
5. BUSY length (variable; 35 µs, typical)
6. BUSY negation to ACKNLG* delay (100 ns, typical)
7. ACKNLG* pulse width (5 µs)
8. ACKNLG* assertion to STROBE* delay (2 µs, minimum)
AB0-AR
C-8
Appendix C—Parallel Interface
INTERFACE CIRCUITS
JB0-BQ2
Appendix D—
Character Sets
This appendix is concerned primarily with standard character sets created
using "Character Options" in the configuration menu.
Character sets determine what the printer does when you send a data
byte to the printer.
There are only two categories of doable possibilities. The printer can
either print a character (A B C a b c * ? 1 2 3 etc.) or perform a basic
operation (form feed, beep, escape, etc.)
•
If your computer and printer are set up to transmit and receive only 7
bits of serial or parallel data per byte, then your printer can do 128
characters and single-code operations.
•
If your computer and printer are set up to transmit and receive 8 bits of
data per byte (and most are), then your printer can do 256 characters
and single-code operations.
D-2
Appendix D—Character Sets
The basic single-code operations are standard throughout the printer
industry. The groupings of basic operations for character sets are called
control code maps. (One common control code map is the ASCII* control
code map.) There are slightly over 40 control code possibilities, of which
a maximum of 32 or 33 control codes are ever assigned at any one time
to a character set. For a 7-bit data byte, that leaves about "128 - 32 = 96"
codes for characters.
The printer can print 428 different characters contained in a built-in ROM
character library.
Most printers, including this one, use groupings of these ROM-based
characters called character maps. The character maps make assignment
of characters from the character library to the character set easier and
more standardized between printers. One or more character maps can be
assigned to make up the completed character set. An example of a
standard character map is the 96-character ASCII map.
The standard ASCII character set, with control and character code
assignments, is shown on Pages D-6 and D-7. Most character and
control code mappings are variations of this standard character set for a
7-bit code. The ASCII character set covers the standard American
computer keyboard.
*
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Operator's Guide
D-3
Note: Notice that the right and left halves of the ASCII character set are
identical. That is because the ASCII set was created for a 7-bit
data byte (0000000 to 1111111 in the binary numbering system, or
0 to127 in decimal, or 00 to 7F in hexadecimal) back in the days of
the teletypewriter. Because computers and printers now commonly
use an 8-bit data byte (00000000-11111111 binary, 0-255 decimal,
or 00-FF hexadecimal), the ASCII character and control codes are
repeated on the upper half of the character set to cover the
possibilities of the 8th bit being either a binary 0 or a binary 1.
The printer contains literally hundreds of "standard" character and control
code map combinations. You can also modify the standard character set
using one or more overlays. An overlay can be used to map over some or
all of the character and control possibilities with other characters from
ROM or RAM character libraries.
This process of creating and modifying characters sets is shown
graphically on Page D-8.
D-4
Appendix D—Character Sets
TERMINOLOGY
Terminology used to describe character sets varies widely between IBM,
Epson, and DEC. Terminology used in this manual is internally consistent
and follows standard usage where possible. The terminology used to
describe character sets is defined below:
Character. A printable pattern composed of dots. Letters, numbers,
punctuation marks, graphic shapes, and all other symbols are characters.
A blank space is also a valid character.
Character Library. A defined group of printable characters stored in the
printer. The printer contains one main, ROM-based character library
when shipped from the factory.
Character Source. The location of character libraries: ROM or RAM.
Control Code. A single byte of information that starts, stops, or modifies
printer action.
Mapping. Process of assigning characters and control codes to data
bytes.
Character Set. A complete assignment of control codes and printable
characters for all data bytes.
Code Page. A predefined IBM character map.
Character Map. An assignment of printable characters used in creating a
character set.
Control Code Map. An assignment of control codes used in creating a
character set.
Operator's Guide
D-5
THE MAIN CHARACTER LIBRARY
Pages D-9 and D-10 show all of the printer's printable draft and NLQ
characters. These constitute the main character library.
When you select a character map in the configuration menu, the printer
chooses the characters from this built-in ROM library of characters and
lists the character numbers in the data byte map.
You can print the data byte map from the configuration menu.
Part of a sample data byte printout is shown on Page 63. Notice the "a"
character in the data byte map. The CHAR NUM for "a" is 097 which is
assigned as DATA BYTE 097 from the character library on Page D-9.
The hexadecimal character number, equivalent to 097 decimal, is 061h,
which is the character shown in the Standard ASCII Character Set
(Column "6-", Row "-1") on Page D-6.
You can remap characters from the main character library into the active
character set. You might wish to do this if you need, for example, a
registered mark (®) which is CHAR NUM 276 (114h) in place of the #
symbol in Column "2-", Row "-3" of the character set. You would make
such a substitution using a universal control command.
D-6
Appendix D—Character Sets
STANDARD ASCII CHARACTER SET*
0
0NUL
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
1DLE
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
SOH
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
1
17
33
49
65
81
97
113
STX
DC2
"
2
B
R
b
r
2
18
34
50
66
82
98
114
ETX
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115
EOT
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
20
36
52
68
84
100
116
ENQ
NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
ACK
SYN
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
22
38
54
70
86
102
118
BEL
ETB
'
7
G
W
g
w
7
23
39
55
71
87
103
119
BS
CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
8
24
40
56
72
88
104
120
HT
EM
)
9
I
Y
i
y
9
25
41
57
73
89
105
121
LF
SUB
*
:
J
Z
j
z
10
26
42
58
74
90
106
122
VT
ESC
+
;
K
[
k
{
11
27
43
59
75
91
107
123
FF
FS
,
<
L
\
l
¦
12
28
44
60
76
92
108
124
CR
GS
-
=
M
]
m
}
13
29
45
61
77
93
109
125
SO
RS
.
>
N
^
n
~
14
30
46
62
78
94
110
126
SI
US
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
15
31
47
63
79
95
111
127
Standard ASCII Control Code Map is shaded; Standard ASCII Character Code Map is unshaded.
Operator's Guide
8NUL
9DLE
ASP
B0
C@
DP
E`
Fp
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
SOH
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
STX
DC2
"
2
B
R
b
r
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
ETX
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
EOT
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
ENQ
NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
ACK
SYN
&
6
F
V
f
v
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
BEL
ETB
'
7
G
W
g
w
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
BS
CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
HT
EM
)
9
I
Y
i
y
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
LF
SUB
*
:
J
Z
j
z
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
VT
ESC
+
;
K
[
k
{
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
FF
FS
,
<
L
\
l
¦
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
CR
GS
-
=
M
]
m
}
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
SO
RS
.
>
N
^
n
~
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
SI
US
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-7
D-8
Appendix D—Character Sets
C u s to m
S u b s titu tio n s
S ta n d a r d
C h a r a c te r
M ap
***
*
S ta n d a rd
C h a ra c te r
Set
M o d ifie d
C h a r a c te r
Set
*
S ta n d a rd
C o n tro l
Code Map
OCR A
C h a ra c te r s
D o w n lo a d e d
C h a r a c te r s
OCR B
C h a ra c te rs
**
C u s to m
C h a ra c te r s
fro m H o s t
JB0-BF
Note: Except for custom substitutions from the ROM character library, all
mapping is done using either "Character Options" in the
configuration menu or control commands. Custom substitutions
from the ROM character library can only be done using universal
control commands.
*
Emulation dependent.
**
Custom characters from the host are downloaded using universal control commands.
*** Custom substitutions from the ROM library are done using universal control commands.
Process of Creating Character Sets
Operator's Guide
Main Character Library (Upright Draft Characters)
D-9
JB0-BG1
D-10
Appendix D—Character Sets
Main Character Library (Upright NLQ Characters)
JB0-BH1
Operator's Guide
D-11
THE CONTROL CODE MAP
Speaking in graphic terms, the first two columns in most character sets,
such as the one shown on Page D-6, contain control codes. Below is an
alphabetical list of abbreviations used in character sets in this appendix
and in the CTRL CODE column of the data byte map.
Pages D-12 through D-15 show all possible emulation-dependent control
code maps. You select the control code map using either "Character
Options" in the configuration menu or emulation control commands.
NUL Null (No Operation)
SOHStart of Header
STX Start of Text
ETX End of Text
EOT End of Transmission
ENQEnquiry
ACK Acknowledge
BEL Bell
BS Back Space
HT Horizontal Tab
LF
Line Feed
VT Vertical Tab
FF Form Feed
CR Carriage Return
SO Shift Out
SI Shift In
DLE Data Link Escape
DC1 Device Control 1 (X-ON)
DC2 Device Control 2
DC3 Device Control 3 (X-OFF)
DC4 Device Control 4
NAK Negative Acknowledge
SYN Synchronous Idle
ETB End of Transmission Block
CAN Cancel
EM End of Medium
SUB Substitute
ESC Escape
FS Field Separator
GS Group Separator
RS Record Separator
US Unit Separator
IND Index
NEL Next Line
HTS Horizontal Tabulation Set
VTS Vertical Tab Set
PLD Partial Line Down
SS2 Single Shift 2
SS3 Single Shift 3
DCS Device Control String
CSI Control Sequence Introducer
ST String Terminator
DEL Delete (Rub Out)*
In the control code maps that follow, the number below the control code
abbreviations is the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal column-row
value.
*
Technically, not actually a control code.
D-12
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON CONTROL CODE MAP
0
0-/8NUL
0
16
-1
SOH
DC1
1
-2
1-/9-
17
DC2
2
-3
18
DC3
3
-4
19
DC4
4
20
5
21
6
22
-5
Control Code Map for Epson Character Set*
-6
-7
BEL
7
23
-8
BS
CAN
8
24
-9
HT
-A
LF
10
26
-B
VT
ESC
11
27
-C
FF
-D
CR
9
12
13
-E
SO
-F
SI
14
15
*
25
28
29
30
31
Characters can be mapped to unshaded areas.
Operator's Guide
D-13
IBM CONTROL CODE MAPS
0-/8NUL
1-/9-
0
0/128
16/144
-1
SOH
DC1
1/129
17/145
-2
2/130
3/131
4/132
20/148
5/133
21/149
-6
-8
-9
-B
-C
23/151
BS
CAN
8/136
24/152
10/138
26/154
VT
ESC
11/139
27/155
FF
14/142
-F
15/143
*
31/159
Characters can be mapped to unshaded areas.
20
5
21
6
22
BEL
7
23
-8
BS
CAN
8
24
-9
HT
-A
LF
10
26
-B
VT
ESC
11
27
-C
FF
-D
CR
-E
SO
-F
SI
9
12
13
30/158
SI
4
-7
29/157
SO
19
DC4
-6
28/156
CR
18
-5
25/153
LF
13/141
-E
3
HT
17
DC3
-4
22/150
7/135
12/140
-D
2
Control Code
Map for Lower
and Upper Halves
of IBM #1
Character Sets
1-
DC2
-3
BEL
9/137
-A
DC1
19/147
DC4
6/134
16
SOH
18/146
-5
-7
0
-1
-2
DC3
-4
0NUL
1
DC2
-3
0
14
15
25
28
29
30
31
Control Code
Map for Lower
Half of IBM #2
Character Sets*
D-14
Appendix D—Character Sets
DEC 7-BIT C0 CONTROL CODE MAP
0-/8NUL
1-/9-
0
0/128
16/144
-1
SOH
DC1
1/129
17/145
2/130
18/146
3/131
19/147
4/132
20/148
-2
-3
DC3
-4
-5
ENQ
5/133
21/149
6/134
22/150
-6
-7
BEL
7/135
-8
-9
CAN
8/136
24/152
HT
9/137
-A
-C
ESC
11/139
27/155
FF
29/157
SO
14/142
-F
28/156
CR
13/141
-E
26/154
VT
12/140
-D
25/153
LF
10/138
-B
23/151
BS
30/158
SI
15/143
31/159
Operator's Guide
D-15
DEC 8-BIT CONTROL CODE MAPS
0
0NUL
1-
0
16
-1
SOH
DC1
1
17
0
128
144
129
145
130
146
131
147
-2
2
-3
18
DC3
3
-3
19
-4
C0 Control Code
4
20
ENQ
5
21
-6
6
BEL
7
23
-8
BS
CAN
8
24
-9
HT
-A
LF
10
26
-B
VT
ESC
11
27
-C
FF
9
12
-E
SO
-F
SI
14
15
IND
-5
NEL
132
148
133
149
134
150
135
151
-6
-7
-8
HTS
136
152
137
153
-9
25
-A
VTS
138
154
-B
PLD
CSI
139
155
140
156
141
157
-C
28
CR
13
Map for Lower
Half of DEC
8-Bit Character
Set
-4
22
-7
-D
9DCS
-1
-2
-5
8NUL
ST
-D
29
-E
SS2
-F
SS3
30
31
142
143
158
159
C1 Control
Code
Map for Upper
Half of DEC
8-Bit Character
Set
D-16
Appendix D—Character Sets
THE CHARACTER MAP
All of the popular character maps can be selected from the configuration
menu under "Character Options." You can select these same character
maps using control commands.
There are two types of configuration menu character maps:
•
Emulation-dependent character maps that are, more or less, complete
collections of characters.
•
Emulation-independent character maps that are partial assortments of
special characters, such as the OCR A and OCR B overlays.
You can select one of the OCR overlays under "Overlay Characters" in
the "Character Options" portion of the configuration menu. The overlay
characters replace the characters that were mapped-in from the
emulation-dependent character map.
The configuration menu character maps are listed and illustrated on the
following pages.
Operator's Guide
Configuration Menu Character Maps
Page
Emulation Dependent Character Maps
Epson National-Use
D-18
Epson Hebrew
D-20
IBM Code Page 437 (U.S.)
D-22
IBM #2 Code Page 437 (Hebrew)
D-24
IBM Code Page 850 (Multilingual)
D-26
IBM Code Page 860 (Portugal)
D-28
DEC National-Use
D-30
DEC Multilingual
D-31
DEC Hebrew
D-32
DEC VT100 Line Draw
D-33
Overlays
OCR A
D-34
OCR B
D-35
D-17
D-18
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP*
00
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
1-
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
34
50
66
82
98
114
#
3
C
S
c
s
35
51
67
83
99
115
$
4
D
T
d
t
36
52
68
84
100
116
%
5
E
U
e
u
37
53
69
85
101
117
&
6
F
V
f
v
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
47
63
79
95
111
127
Shown with 12 double-boxed U.S. character substitutions. See Page D-36 for other character substitutions.
Operator's Guide
8-
9-
ASP
B0
C@
DP
E`
Fp
160
176
192
208
224
240
!
1
A
Q
a
q
161
177
193
209
225
241
"
2
B
R
b
r
162
178
194
210
226
242
#
3
C
S
c
s
163
179
195
211
227
243
$
4
D
T
d
t
164
180
196
212
228
244
%
5
E
U
e
u
165
181
197
213
229
245
&
6
F
V
f
v
166
182
198
214
230
246
'
7
G
W
g
w
167
183
199
215
231
247
(
8
H
X
h
x
168
184
200
216
232
248
)
9
I
Y
i
y
169
185
201
217
233
249
*
:
J
Z
j
z
170
186
202
218
234
250
+
;
K
[
k
{
171
187
203
219
235
251
,
<
L
\
l
¦
172
188
204
220
236
252
-
=
M
]
m
}
173
189
205
221
237
253
.
>
N
^
n
~
174
190
206
222
238
254
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-19
D-20
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON HEBREW CHARACTER MAP
00
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
1-
2SP
30
4@
5P
6à
7ð
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
á
ñ
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
â
ò
34
50
66
82
98
114
#
3
C
S
ã
ó
35
51
67
83
99
115
$
4
D
T
ä
ô
36
52
68
84
100
116
%
5
E
U
å
õ
37
53
69
85
101
117
&
6
F
V
æ
ö
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
ç
÷
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
è
ø
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
é
ù
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
ê
ú
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
ë
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
ì
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
í
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
î
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
ï
DEL
47
63
79
95
111
127
Operator's Guide
8-
9-
ASP
B0
C@
DP
E`
Fp
160
176
192
208
224
240
!
1
A
Q
a
q
161
177
193
209
225
241
"
2
B
R
b
r
162
178
194
210
226
242
#
3
C
S
c
s
163
179
195
211
227
243
$
4
D
T
d
t
164
180
196
212
228
244
%
5
E
U
e
u
165
181
197
213
229
245
&
6
F
V
f
v
166
182
198
214
230
246
'
7
G
W
g
w
167
183
199
215
231
247
(
8
H
X
h
x
168
184
200
216
232
248
)
9
I
Y
i
y
169
185
201
217
233
249
*
:
J
Z
j
z
170
186
202
218
234
250
+
;
K
[
k
{
171
187
203
219
235
251
,
<
L
\
l
¦
172
188
204
220
236
252
-
=
M
]
m
}
173
189
205
221
237
253
.
>
N
^
n
~
174
190
206
222
238
254
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-21
D-22
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM CODE PAGE 437 (U.S.)
0-*
1-*
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
34
50
66
82
98
114
♥
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
35
51
67
83
99
115
♦
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
36
52
68
84
100
116
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
♠
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
47
63
79
95
111
127
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
Operator's Guide
*
8-*
Ç
9-*
É
Aá
B•
C•
D•
E•
F•
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
Æ
í
•
•
•
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
Æ
ó
•
•
•
•
•
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
Ô
ú
•
•
•
•
•
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
Ö
ñ
•
•
•
•
•
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
Ò
Ñ
•
•
•
•
•
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
å
Û
ª
•
•
•
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
Ù
º
•
•
•
•
•
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
ê
Ÿ
¿
•
•
•
•
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
ë
Ö
•
•
•
•
•
•
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
¬
•
•
•
•
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ï
¢
½
•
•
•
•
•
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
î
£
¼
•
•
•
•
•
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
¥
¡
•
•
•
•
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ä
Pt
«
•
•
•
•
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Å
ƒ
»
•
•
•
•
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
D-23
D-24
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM #2 CODE PAGE 437 (HEBREW)
0-*
1-*
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
34
50
66
82
98
114
♥
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
35
51
67
83
99
115
♦
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
36
52
68
84
100
116
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
♠
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
47
63
79
95
111
127
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
Operator's Guide
*
8-*
à
9-*
ð
Aá
B•
C•
D•
E•
F•
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
á
ñ
í
•
•
•
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
â
ò
ó
•
•
•
•
•
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
ã
ó
ú
•
•
•
•
•
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
ô
ñ
•
•
•
•
•
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
å
õ
Ñ
•
•
•
•
•
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
æ
ö
ª
•
•
•
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
÷
º
•
•
•
•
•
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
è
ø
¿
•
•
•
•
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
é
ù
•
•
•
•
•
•
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
ê
ú
¬
•
•
•
•
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ë
¢
½
•
•
•
•
•
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
ì
£
¼
•
•
•
•
•
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
í
¥
¡
•
•
•
•
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
î
Pt
«
•
•
•
•
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
ï
ƒ
»
•
•
•
•
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
D-25
D-26
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM CODE PAGE 850 (MULTILINGUAL)
0-*
1-*
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
♥
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
34
50
66
82
98
114
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
35
51
67
83
99
115
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
36
52
68
84
100
116
♦
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
♠
6
-7
2SP
&
6
F
V
f
v
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
47
63
79
95
111
127
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
Operator's Guide
*
8-*
Ç
9-*
É
Aá
B•
C•
Dð
EÓ
F-
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
æ
í
•
•
Ð
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
Æ
ó
•
•
Ê
Ô
=
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
ô
ú
•
•
Ë
Ò
¾
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
ö
ñ
•
•
È
õ
¶
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
ò
Ñ
Á
•
¹
Õ
§
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
å
û
ª
Â
ã
Í
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
þ
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
247
ê
ÿ
¿
©
•
Ï
Þ
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
ë
Ö
®
•
•
•
Ú
¨
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
ª
•
•
•
Û
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ï
ø
½
•
•
•
Ù
¹
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
î
£
¼
•
•
•
ý
³
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
Ø
¡
¢
•
¦
Ý
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ä
×
«
¥
•
Ì
¯
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Å
ƒ
»
•
¤
•
´
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
D-27
D-28
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM CODE PAGE 860 (PORTUGAL)
0-*
1-*
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
♥
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
32
48
64
80
96
112
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
34
50
66
82
98
114
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
35
51
67
83
99
115
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
36
52
68
84
100
116
♦
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
♠
6
-7
2SP
&
6
F
V
f
v
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
47
63
79
95
111
127
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
Operator's Guide
*
8-*
Ç
9-*
É
Aá
B•
C•
D•
E•
F•
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
À
í
•
•
•
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
È
ó
•
•
•
•
•
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
ô
ú
•
•
•
•
•
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ã
õ
ñ
•
•
•
•
•
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
ò
Ñ
•
•
•
•
•
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
Á
Ú
ª
•
•
•
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
ù
º
•
•
•
•
•
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
ê
Ì
¿
•
•
•
•
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
Ê
Õ
Ò
•
•
•
•
•
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
ª
•
•
•
•
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
Î
¢
½
•
•
•
•
•
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
Ô
£
¼
•
•
•
•
•
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
Ù
¡
•
•
•
Ø
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ã
Pt
«
•
•
•
•
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Â
Ó
»
•
•
•
•
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM #2 control codes.
D-29
D-30
Appendix D—Character Sets
DEC NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP*
0-/80
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
1-/9-
2-/ASP
3-/B0
4-/C@
5-/DP
6-/E`
7-/Fp
32/160
48/176
64/192
80/208
96/224
112/240
!
1
A
Q
a
q
33/161
49/177
65/193
81/209
97/225
113/241
"
2
B
R
b
r
34/162
50/178
66/194
82/210
98/226
114/242
#
3
C
S
c
s
35/163
51/179
67/195
83/211
99/227
115/243
$
4
D
T
d
t
36/164
52/180
68/196
84/212
100/228
116/244
%
5
E
U
e
u
37/165
53/181
69/197
85/213
101/229
117/245
&
6
F
V
f
v
38/166
54/182
70/198
86/214
102/230
118/246
'
7
G
W
g
w
39/167
55/183
71/199
87/215
103/231
119/247
(
8
H
X
h
x
40/168
56/184
72/200
88/216
104/232
120/248
)
9
I
Y
i
y
41/169
57/185
73/201
89/217
105/233
121/249
*
:
J
Z
j
z
42/170
58/186
74/202
90/218
106/234
122/250
+
;
K
[
k
{
43/171
59/187
75/203
91/219
107/235
123/251
,
<
L
\
l
¦
44/172
60/188
76/204
92/220
108/236
124/252
-
=
M
]
m
}
45/173
61/189
77/205
93/221
109/237
125/253
.
>
N
^
n
~
46/174
62/190
78/206
94/222
110/238
126/254
/
?
O
_
o
47/175
63/191
79/207
95/223
111/239
127/255
Shown with 11 double-boxed U.S. character substitutions. See Page D-37 for other character substitutions.
Operator's Guide
DEC MULTILINGUAL CHARACTER MAP
0-/80
-1
-2
-3
1-/9-
2-/ASP
3-/BØ
4-/CÀ
5-/D-
6-/Eà
7-/F-
32/160
48/176
64/192
80/208
96/224
112/240
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
33/161
49/177
65/193
81/209
97/225
113/241
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
34/162
50/178
66/194
82/210
98/226
114/242
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
35/163
51/179
67/195
83/211
99/227
115/243
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
36/164
52/180
68/196
84/212
100/228
116/244
-4
-5
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
37/165
53/181
69/197
85/213
101/229
117/245
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
38/166
54/182
70/198
86/214
102/230
118/246
-6
-7
-8
§
·
Ç
Œ
ç
œ
39/167
55/183
71/199
87/215
103/231
119/247
È
Ø
è
ø
56/184
72/200
88/216
104/232
120/248
¤
40/168
-9
-A
-B
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
41/169
57/185
73/201
89/217
105/233
121/249
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
42/170
58/186
74/202
90/218
106/234
122/250
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
43/171
59/187
75/203
91/219
107/235
123/251
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
44/172
60/188
76/204
92/220
108/236
124/252
½
Í
Ÿ
í
ÿ
45/173
61/189
77/205
93/221
109/237
125/253
46/174
62/190
78/206
94/222
110/238
¿
Ï
ß
ï
63/191
79/207
95/223
111/239
-C
-D
-E
Î
-F
47/175
î
126/254
127/255
D-31
D-32
Appendix D—Character Sets
DEC HEBREW CHARACTER MAP
0-/80
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
1-/9-
2-/ASP
3-/B0
4-/C@
5-/DP
6-/Eà
7-/Fð
32/160
48/176
64/192
80/208
96/224
112/240
!
1
A
Q
á
ñ
33/161
49/177
65/193
81/209
97/225
113/241
"
2
B
R
â
ò
34/162
50/178
66/194
82/210
98/226
114/242
#
3
C
S
ã
ó
35/163
51/179
67/195
83/211
99/227
115/243
$
4
D
T
ä
ô
36/164
52/180
68/196
84/212
100/228
116/244
%
5
E
U
å
õ
37/165
53/181
69/197
85/213
101/229
117/245
&
6
F
V
æ
ö
38/166
54/182
70/198
86/214
102/230
118/246
'
7
G
W
ç
÷
39/167
55/183
71/199
87/215
103/231
119/247
(
8
H
X
è
ø
40/168
56/184
72/200
88/216
104/232
120/248
)
9
I
Y
é
ù
41/169
57/185
73/201
89/217
105/233
121/249
*
:
J
Z
ê
ú
42/170
58/186
74/202
90/218
106/234
122/250
+
;
K
[
ë
{
43/171
59/187
75/203
91/219
107/235
123/251
,
<
L
\
ì
¦
44/172
60/188
76/204
92/220
108/236
124/252
-
=
M
]
í
}
45/173
61/189
77/205
93/221
109/237
125/253
.
>
N
^
î
~
46/174
62/190
78/206
94/222
110/238
126/254
/
?
O
_
ï
47/175
63/191
79/207
95/223
111/239
127/255
Operator's Guide
DEC VT100 LINE DRAW CHARACTER MAP
0-/80
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
1-/9-
2-/ASP
3-/B0
4-/C@
5-/DP
6-/E♦
7-/F–
32/160
48/176
64/192
80/208
96/224
112/240
!
1
A
Q
•
–
33/161
49/177
65/193
81/209
97/225
113/241
"
2
B
R
HT
_
34/162
50/178
66/194
82/210
98/226
114/242
#
3
C
S
FF
_
35/163
51/179
67/195
83/211
99/227
115/243
$
4
D
T
CR
•
36/164
52/180
68/196
84/212
100/228
116/244
%
5
E
U
LF
•
37/165
53/181
69/197
85/213
101/229
117/245
&
6
F
V
°
•
38/166
54/182
70/198
86/214
102/230
118/246
'
7
G
W
±
•
39/167
55/183
71/199
87/215
103/231
119/247
(
8
H
X
NL
•
40/168
56/184
72/200
88/216
104/232
120/248
)
9
I
Y
VT
•
41/169
57/185
73/201
89/217
105/233
121/249
*
:
J
Z
•
•
42/170
58/186
74/202
90/218
106/234
122/250
+
;
K
[
•
•
43/171
59/187
75/203
91/219
107/235
123/251
,
<
L
\
•
≠
44/172
60/188
76/204
92/220
108/236
124/252
-
=
M
]
•
£
45/173
61/189
77/205
93/221
109/237
125/253
.
>
N
^
•
·
46/174
62/190
78/206
94/222
110/238
126/254
95/223
111/239
/
?
O
47/175
63/191
79/207
¯
127/255
D-33
D-34
Appendix D—Character Sets
OCR A OVERLAY CHARACTER MAP*
0-
1-
2-
0
30
4-
48
-1
-2
A
Q
49
65
81
"
2
B
R
50
66
82
3
C
S
51
67
83
$
4
D
T
36
52
68
84
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
5
E
U
53
69
85
6
F
V
54
70
86
7
G
W
55
71
87
8
H
X
56
72
88
9
I
Y
57
73
89
-A
-B
-C
80
1
34
-3
-4
5P
J
Z
74
90
+
K
43
75
,
<
L
\
44
60
76
92
-D
M
77
-E
-F
*
.
>
N
46
62
78
/
O
47
79
Only characters in unshaded areas are overlaid onto the active character set.
6-
7-
Operator's Guide
OCR B OVERLAY CHARACTER MAP*
0-
1-
2-
0
30
4-
48
-1
-2
5P
80
1
A
49
65
2
50
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
3
C
51
67
4
T
52
84
5
E
U
53
69
85
6
V
54
86
7
55
-8
-9
8
X
56
88
9
57
-A
-B
+
43
-C
,
<
44
60
-D
-E
-F
.
>
N
46
62
78
/
47
*
Only characters in unshaded areas are overlaid onto the active character set.
6-
7-
D-35
D-36
Appendix D—Character Sets
CHARACTER SUBSTITUTIONS FOR EPSON
NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP*
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
United States**
France
Germany
United Kingdom
Denmark
Sweden
Italy (Epson)
Spain
Japan
Norway
Denmark II
Spain II
Latin America
Italy (ANSI)
35
23
163
A3
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
Pt
#
#
#
#
#
£
36
24
164
A4
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
$
64
40
192
C0
@
à
§
@
@
É
@
@
@
É
É
á
á
§
91
5B
219
DB
[
°
Ä
[
Æ
Ä
°
¡
[
Æ
Æ
¡
¡
°
92
5C
220
DC
\
ç
Ö
\
Ø
Ö
\
Ñ
¥
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
ç
93
5D
221
DD
]
§
Ü
]
Å
Å
é
¿
]
Å
Å
¿
¿
é
94
5E
222
DE
^
^
^
^
^
Ü
^
^
^
Ü
Ü
é
é
^
96
60
224
E0
`
`
`
`
`
é
ù
`
`
é
é
`
ü
ù
*
Character substitutions in the upper half of the resulting character set are italics.
**
See Page D-18 for the complete Epson U.S. Character Map.
123
7B
251
FB
{
é
ä
{
æ
ä
à
¨
{
æ
æ
í
í
à
124
7C
252
FC
¦
ù
ö
¦
ø
ö
ò
ñ
¦
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ò
125
7D
253
FD
}
è
ü
}
å
å
è
}
}
å
å
ó
ó
è
126
7E
254
FE
~
¨
ß
~
~
ü
ì
~
~
ú
ú
ú
ú
ì
Operator's Guide
D-37
CHARACTER SUBSTITUTIONS FOR DEC
NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Canada (French)
Finland
France
Germany
Italy (ANSI)
Norway/Denmark
Spain
Sweden
United Kingdom
United States*
*
35
23
163
A3
#
#
£
#
£
#
£
#
£
#
64
40
192
C0
à
@
à
§
§
Ä
§
É
@
@
91
5B
219
DB
â
Ä
°
Ä
°
Æ
¡
Ä
[
[
92
5C
220
DC
ç
Ö
ç
Ö
ç
Ø
Ñ
Ö
\
\
93
5D
221
DD
ê
Å
§
Ü
é
Å
¿
Å
]
]
See Page D-30 for the complete DEC U.S. Character Map.
94
5E
222
DE
î
Ü
^
^
^
Ü
^
Ü
^
^
96
60
224
E0
ô
é
`
`
ù
ä
`
é
`
`
123
7B
251
FB
é
ä
é
ä
à
æ
°
ä
{
{
124
7C
252
FC
ù
ö
ù
ö
ò
ø
ñ
ö
¦
¦
125
7D
253
FD
è
â
è
ü
è
å
ç
å
}
}
126
7E
254
FE
û
ü
¨
ß
ì
ü
~
ü
~
~
D-38
Appendix D—Character Sets
THE CHARACTER SET
The character set is the result of selecting control code and character
code maps. For example, in the configuration menu., if you select the
IBM #2 control code map (Page D-13) and the IBM Multilingual Code
Page 850 (Page D-26), you would have the character set shown on Pages
D-40 and D-41.
To print out a copy of your active character set, see Page 34. See Page
37 through 39 for printouts of factory-default character sets.
EPSON ENHANCED CHARACTER SETS
Two Epson character map overlays can be used to map over some of the
characters in the active Epson character set. These Epson character
overlays (Pages D-42 and D-44) are chosen using control commands:
•
ESC I (1) overlays portions of Columns 0, 1, 8, and 9 of the active
Epson character set with printable characters. [Use ESC I (Ø) to
remove the overlay.]
•
ESC 6 overlays portions of Columns 8 and 9 of the active Epson
character set with printable characters. (Use ESC 7 to remove the
overlay.)
Use ESC I (1) together with ESC 6 to create the Epson National-Use
Standard Code Page Character Set shown on Pages D-46 and D-47.
Operator's Guide
D-39
IBM ALL CHARACTER CHARACTER SET
IBM emulation has a standard character set called the "all-character
character set."
The all-character character set consists of the active character set and a
temporary overlay (Pages D-48 and D-49). The overlay temporarily maps
over the control codes in Columns 0 and 1. Pages D-50 and D-51 show
the temporary all-character overlay used with the IBM #2 Multilingual
Character Set.
The IBM control command to temporarily apply the overlay is
ESC \ (n1) (n2). The two-digit decimal number "n1n2" specifies the
number of characters to be printed from the all-character character set.
After the specified characters, the printer reverts to the active IBM
character set.
Note: The all-character character set is available only in the IBM
emulation. ESC \ (n1) (n2) is ignored in the IBM mode of the
Epson emulation.
D-40
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM #2 MULTILINGUAL CHARACTER SET
0
0NUL
1-
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
-1
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
SOH
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
1
q
17
33
49
65
81
97
113
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
DC2
"
2
B
R
b
r
2
18
34
50
66
82
98
114
♥
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115
♦
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
20
36
52
68
84
100
116
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
&
6
F
V
f
v
22
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
7
23
39
55
71
87
103
119
BS
CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
8
24
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
25
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
10
26
42
58
74
90
106
122
VT
ESC
+
;
K
[
k
{
11
27
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
28
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
29
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
30
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
31
47
63
79
95
111
♠
6
-7
-8
-9
BEL
HT
9
-A
-B
-C
LF
FF
12
-D
CR
13
-E
SO
14
-F
SI
15
127
Operator's Guide
8Ç
9É
Aá
B•
C•
Dð
EÓ
F-
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
æ
í
•
•
Ð
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
Æ
ó
•
•
Ê
Ô
=
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
ô
ú
•
•
Ë
Ò
¾
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
ö
ñ
•
•
È
õ
¶
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
ò
Ñ
Á
•
¹
Õ
§
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
å
û
ª
Â
ã
Í
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
þ
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
247
ê
ÿ
¿
©
•
Ï
Þ
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
ë
Ö
®
•
•
•
Ú
¨
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
ª
•
•
•
Û
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ï
ø
½
•
•
•
Ù
¹
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
î
£
¼
•
•
•
ý
³
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
Ø
¡
¢
•
¦
Ý
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ä
×
«
¥
•
Ì
¯
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Å
ƒ
»
•
¤
•
´
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-41
D-42
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON ESC I PRINTABLE CHARACTER OVERLAY*
0
0à
1§
0
16
-1
2-
3-
4-
5-
ß
17
-2
ù
-3
ò
2
3
-4
ì
4
-5
-6
-7
º
ø
5
21
£
¨
6
22
Ä
23
-8
Ö
24
-9
Ü
25
-A
ä
26
-B
-C
ü
28
-D
É
29
-E
é
30
-F
¥
31
*
Only characters in unshaded areas are overlaid onto the active character set.
6-
7-
Operator's Guide
8à
9§
128
144
è
ß
129
145
ù
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F0
-1
-2
130
ò
-3
131
ì
-4
132
º
ø
133
149
£
¨
134
150
Ä
-5
-6
-7
151
Ö
-8
152
Ü
-9
153
ä
-A
154
-B
ü
-C
156
É
-D
157
é
-E
158
¥
159
-F
D-43
D-44
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON ESC 6 PRINTABLE CHARACTER
EXPANSION OVERLAY*
0-
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
Only characters in unshaded areas are overlaid onto the active character set.
6-
7-
Operator's Guide
8à
9§
128
144
è
ß
129
145
ù
Æ
130
146
ò
æ
131
147
ì
Ø
132
148
º
ø
133
149
£
¨
134
150
í
Ä
135
151
¿
Ö
136
152
Ñ
Ü
137
153
ñ
ä
138
154
¤
ö
139
155
Pt
ü
140
156
Å
É
141
157
å
é
142
158
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
ç
¥
Ø
143
159
255
-F
D-45
D-46
Appendix D—Character Sets
EPSON STANDARD CODE PAGE CHARACTER SET*
0
0à
1§
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
-1
SOH
ß
!
1
A
Q
a
q
1
17
33
49
65
81
97
113
ù
DC2
"
2
B
R
b
r
2
18
34
50
66
82
98
114
ò
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115
ì
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
20
36
52
68
84
100
116
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
°
ø
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
£
¨
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
22
38
54
70
86
102
118
BEL
Ä
'
7
G
W
g
w
7
23
39
55
71
87
103
119
BS
Ö
(
8
H
X
h
x
8
24
40
56
72
88
104
120
HT
Ü
)
9
I
Y
i
y
9
25
41
57
73
89
105
121
LF
ä
*
:
J
Z
j
z
10
26
42
58
74
90
106
122
VT
ESC
+
;
K
[
k
{
11
27
43
59
75
91
107
123
FF
ü
,
<
L
\
l
¦
12
28
44
60
76
92
108
124
CR
É
-
=
M
]
m
}
13
29
45
61
77
93
109
125
SO
é
.
>
N
^
n
~
14
30
46
62
78
94
110
126
SI
¥
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
15
31
47
63
79
95
111
127
Based on U.S. Nartional-Use Character Map with an 8-bit data interface.
Operator's Guide
8à
9§
ASP
B0
C@
DP
E`
Fp
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
è
ß
!
1
A
Q
a
q
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
ù
Æ
"
2
B
R
b
r
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
ò
æ
#
3
C
S
c
s
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ì
Ø
$
4
D
T
d
t
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
°
ø
%
5
E
U
e
u
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
£
¨
&
6
F
V
f
v
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
í
Ä
'
7
G
W
g
w
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
¿
Ö
(
8
H
X
h
x
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
Ñ
Ü
)
9
I
Y
i
y
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
ñ
ä
*
:
J
Z
j
z
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
¤
ö
+
;
K
[
k
{
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
Pt
ü
,
<
L
\
l
¦
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
Å
É
-
=
M
]
m
}
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
å
é
.
>
N
^
n
~
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
ç
¥
/
?
O
_
o
Ø
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-47
D-48
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM ALL CHARACTER OVERLAY*
0-
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-
0
16
-1
1
17
2
18
-2
-3
!!
19
-4
¶
20
-5
—
-6
22
-7
!
7
23
8
24
-8
-9
"
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
Only characters in unshaded areas are overlaid onto the active character set.
127
Operator's Guide
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-49
D-50
Appendix D—Character Sets
IBM #2 ALL CHARACTER MULTILINGUAL
CHARACTER SET*
0NUL
1-
0
2SP
30
4@
5P
6`
7p
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
-1
•
!
1
A
Q
a
q
17
33
49
65
81
97
113
"
2
B
R
b
r
18
34
50
66
82
98
114
1
-2
•
2
-3
♥
!!
#
3
C
S
c
s
3
19
35
51
67
83
99
115
♦
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
4
20
36
52
68
84
100
116
-5
♣
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
5
21
37
53
69
85
101
117
-6
♠
•
&
6
F
V
f
v
6
22
38
54
70
86
102
118
'
7
G
W
g
w
7
23
39
55
71
87
103
119
(
8
H
X
h
x
8
24
40
56
72
88
104
120
)
9
I
Y
i
y
9
25
41
57
73
89
105
121
*
:
J
Z
j
z
10
26
42
58
74
90
106
122
+
;
K
[
k
{
11
27
43
59
75
91
107
123
,
<
L
\
l
¦
12
28
44
60
76
92
108
124
-
=
M
]
m
}
13
29
45
61
77
93
109
125
.
>
N
^
n
~
14
30
46
62
78
94
110
126
/
?
O
_
o
15
31
47
63
79
95
111
-4
-7
!
-8
-9
"
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
*
Also called the multilingual PC-8 character set.
127
Operator's Guide
8Ç
9É
Aá
B•
C•
Dð
EÓ
F-
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
ü
æ
í
•
•
Ð
ß
±
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
é
Æ
ó
•
•
Ê
Ô
=
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
â
ô
ú
•
•
Ë
Ò
¾
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
ä
ö
ñ
•
•
È
õ
¶
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
à
ò
Ñ
Á
•
¹
Õ
§
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
å
û
ª
Â
ã
Í
µ
÷
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
ç
ù
º
À
Ã
Î
þ
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
247
ê
ÿ
¿
©
•
Ï
Þ
°
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
ë
Ö
®
•
•
•
Ú
¨
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
è
Ü
ª
•
•
•
Û
·
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
ï
ø
½
•
•
•
Ù
¹
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
î
£
¼
•
•
•
ý
³
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
ì
Ø
¡
¢
•
¦
Ý
²
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
Ä
×
«
¥
•
Ì
¯
•
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
Å
ƒ
»
•
¤
•
´
SP
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
D-51
D-52
Appendix D—Character Sets
Appendix E—
Barcodes
This appendix explains how to use the printer to print barcodes.
Barcodes are printed in accordance with Automatic Identification
Manufacturers (AIM), Material Handling Institute, Inc., the UPC Symbol
Specification Manual, and the U.S. Postal Service. The barcodes
supported are listed below:
Barcode
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Codabar
UPC-A
Description
USD-3
USD-1
USS CODABAR
*
Barcode
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
PostNet
Description
*
*
*
**
Detailed descriptions for commercial barcodes are available from
Automatic Identification Manufacturers, Material Handling Institute Inc.,
1326 Freeport Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15238, USA, (412) 963-8588.
Additional information is contained in Reading Between the Lines, An
Introduction to Barcode Technology, by Craig K. Harmon and Russ
Adams, published 1984 by Helmers Publishing, Inc., 174 Concord St.,
Peterborough, NH 03458.
*
Specifications for UPC and EAN barcodes can be found in the UPC Symbol Specifications Manual, available
from the Uniform Code Council, Inc., P.O. Box 1244, Dayton, OH 45401, (513) 435-3870.
**
USPS PostNet Zip + 4 Delivery Point specification for PostNet can be found in Postal Service Specification
DMM Sections 324.72 through 324.77.
E-2
Appendix E—Barcodes
PRINTING BARCODES
To print barcode symbols, proceed as follows:
1. Send the printer a Barcode Format command.
This command specifies characteristics of the barcode symbol, for
example, bar height and width. (If this step is not performed, the
default parameters are used.)
For example, in BASIC send
LPRINT CHR$(1);”AzM”;CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);
LPRINT CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);
to set up parameters for Example 1 on Page E-21.
2. Send the printer the Start Barcode command.
This command tells the printer to print all subsequent data in the form
of a barcode symbol.
Send
LPRINT CHR$(1);”AzL1”;
to begin interpreting and printing barcode patterns.
3. Send the printer the barcode data.
The data is printed in the form of a barcode symbol.
For example, send
LPRINT “1988,1988”;CHR$(13);
LPRINT “123456789123456789”;CHR$(13);
to print the patterns shown in Example 1.
Operator's Guide
E-3
4. Send the printer the End Barcode command.
This command tells the printer to print all subsequent data as
characters, not barcode symbols.
Send
LPRINT CHR$(1); “AzLØ”;
to return to text mode.
If you have problems printing barcodes, use the hex dump mode, a binary
editor, and/or a BASIC utility to verify and debug your command string.
For best results, use the commands SOH AzM and SOH AzL to format and
print barcodes. These commands are explained on the following pages.
They are valid in any emulation mode.
Note: Zeroes contained within control commands, such as ESC [Øt, are
written as Ø to differentiate the number zero from the capital letter
"O."
For PostNet, make sure "Barcode Density" in the configuration
menu is set to 100 dpi.
For information on how to send the data byte values used in barcode
commands to the printer, refer to the section titled "Control Commands—
An Introduction." That same section also provides a listing of the
typographic conventions used with the barcode commands.
E-4
Appendix E—Barcodes
BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND
The Barcode Format command specifies the characteristics of the
barcode symbols to be printed.
It is not required that this command be sent. If it is not sent, the default
parameter values are used. The default value for each parameter is
specified in the parameter definitions shown on the following pages.
The Barcode Format command is shown below:
ASCII: SOH
Control: CTRL A
Decimal: 1
Hexadecimal: 01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
M
M
77
4D
(P1)...(P8)
(P1)...(P8)
(P1)...(P8)
(P1)...(P8)
Operator's Guide
E-5
P1 THROUGH P8
The (P1) through (P8) bytes are the parameters of the Barcode Format
command.
P1: Barcode Symbology
This parameter specifies the type of barcode to print. The valid entries for
P1 are:
0
1
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
21
Interleaved 2 of 5
PostNet (graphics mode)
Code 39 (default value)
EAN - 8
EAN - 13
Codabar a/a Start and stop character: a
Codabar b/b Start and stop character: b
Codabar c/c Start and stop character: c
Codabar d/d Start and stop character: d
UPC - A
UPC - E
PostNet (text mode)
See Page E-18 for information on Start and Stop Characters.
Note: For best PostNet barcodes, prefer text mode (P1=21) to graphics
mode (P1=1). Also for PostNet, P2 through P8 may be any value;
they must be included in the command but are ignored by the
printer.
E-6
Appendix E—Barcodes
P2: Barcode Height
The height of the barcode is adjustable from 1/12 in. to 10 in. in 1/12 in.
increments.
The valid entries for P2 are :
0 or 9
n
3/4 in. (default value).
n/12 in. The valid range of n is 1 to 120.
P3: Human Readable Line
Characters represented in the barcode symbol may be printed below the
symbol in a human readable line. The line is centered or, if too long, left
justified below the symbol. It is printed in the print style in place prior to
the receipt of the Start Barcode command.
Note: Enlarged text is not used for the human readable line. If the printer
is set for enlarged text (5, 6, 7.5, 8.57, or 9.1 pitch), the human
readable line is printed in the corresponding regular pitch (10, 12,
15, 17.14, or 18.2 pitch, respectively).
The valid entries for P3 are :
0 Do not print human readable line.
1 Print human readable line (default value).
Note: Parameters P4 through P8, discussed on the following pages,
should be specified only by users familiar with barcode symbol
descriptions. These parameters set the width of bars and spaces
in the barcode symbol. Improper adjustment may make the
symbols unreadable. The default values for these parameters
produce barcodes of maximum density.
If you do adjust these parameters, they must be adjusted as a
Operator's Guide
E-7
group to ensure barcode symbol integrity.
For all UPC and EAN barcodes, we recommend these parameters
be used without change. Adjusting them is likely to make the
symbols unreadable.
All measurements shown are approximate. The actual sizes of
printed elements and the readability of the resulting symbols are
affected by many factors including ribbon wear, paper type, and
head gap adjustment.
P4: Narrow Bar Width
This parameter specifies the width of the narrow bars in a barcode
symbol. The valid entries for P4 are :
0 or 1
2
n
0.014 in. (default value)
0.027 in.
0.014 + 0.0133 * (n-1) for n ← 0.
P5: Wide Bar Width
This parameter specifies the width of the wide bars in a barcode symbol.
The valid entries for P5 are:
1
2
0 or 3
4
n
0.014 in.
0.027 in.
0.040 in. (default value)
0.054 in.
0.014 + 0.0133 * (n-1) for n ← 0.
E-8
Appendix E—Barcodes
P6: Narrow Space Width
This parameter specifies the width of the narrow spaces in a barcode
symbol. The valid entries for P6 are:
0 or 1
2
n
0.014 in. (default value)
0.027 in.
0.014 + 0.0133 * (n-1) for n ← 0.
P7: Wide Space Width
This parameter specifies the width of the wide spaces in a barcode
symbol. The valid entries for P7 are:
1
2
0 or 3
4
n
0.014 in.
0.027 in.
0.040 in. (default value)
0.054 in.
0.014 + 0.0133 * (n-1) for n ← 0.
P8: Intercharacter Gap
This parameter allows you to adjust the gap between adjacent character
representations in Code 39 and Codabar barcode symbols. The
adjustment does not affect the other barcode styles. The valid entries for
P8 are:
0 or 1
2
n
0.014 in. (default value)
0.027 in.
0.014 + 0.0133 * (n-1) for n ← 0.
Operator's Guide
E-9
BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND EXAMPLE
The example below shows the barcode format command for a 3/4-in. high
UPC-E barcode symbol with no human readable line. Default values are
used for narrow and wide bar and space widths. The last parameter,
intercharacter gap, does not affect UPC-E barcode symbols but must be
sent with the other parameters. The command could be sent with the
following program:
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzM";CHR$(14);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);
LPRINT CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);
START BARCODE COMMAND
All data sent to the printer following the Start Barcode command are
printed as barcode symbols. The sole exception is the End Barcode
command.
Either of two versions of the Start Barcode command can be used:
ASCII: SOH
Control: CTRL A
Decimal: 1
Hexadecimal: 01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
L
L
76
4C
1
1
49
31
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
L
L
76
4C
2
2
50
32
or
ASCII: SOH
Control: CTRL A
Decimal: 1
Hexadecimal: 01
Note: The "1" and "2" in the Start Barcode command can be entered
either as the character 1 or 2 (as shown) or as the decimal value 1
or 2.
E-10
•
Appendix E—Barcodes
SOH AzL1 enables barcode printing and honors line feeds. SOH AzL1
is commonly used where vertical paper motion is controlled with form
feeds.
•
SOH AzL2 enables barcode printing and discards line feeds. SOH AzL2
is commonly used where vertical paper motion is controlled with line
feeds only. In an application such as a report program generator, SOH
AzL2 preserves the RPG's expected positions of page endings and
headers.
Both commands perform the same function, with the following difference:
SOH AzL2 calculates the number of lines required to print the barcode
symbol, and human readable line, if any, then calculates the comparable
number of line feeds at the line spacing in use prior to the start of barcode
printing, and then eliminates that number of line feeds minus one from the
text following the barcode. For example, if you specify a barcode symbol
3/4-in. high, and if the text line spacing is set at 6 lines per in., a total of
four lines plus a fraction of a line is required to print the barcode. The
fraction of a line is rounded up, for a total of five lines. This number of line
feeds, less one, is discarded; therefore, the next four line feeds after the
barcode SOH AzL2 are discarded.
BARCODE DATA
This section provides information on entering barcode data, including:
•
Valid characters for each type of barcode
•
How to enter barcode data
•
Adjusting the width of the quiet zone
•
Spacing
•
Controlling the placement of PostNet barcode symbols
•
Error checking
•
Number system characters
Operator's Guide
•
Start characters, stop characters, and guard bars
•
Summary of required barcode data
E-11
VALID CHARACTERS
Each type of barcode has a defined set of valid characters. If an invalid
character is detected for a particular code, the printer prints a pattern of all
bars or a solid bar (invalid symbol) to flag that error.
The following shows the valid characters for each type of barcode:
Code 39
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
- . <SPACE> $ / + %
(Lowercase letters are printed in a barcode symbol identical to uppercase
letters. The associated human readable line shows the correct case.)
Interleaved 2 of 5*
UPC/EAN*
0123456789
0123456789
Codabar (Styles 9, 10, 11, 12)*
PostNet*
0123456789
0123456789
\- $ : / . +
*
Commas can be used to terminate these barcodes. Spaces and hyphens are ignored in printing PostNet
barcodes.
E-12
Appendix E—Barcodes
ENTERING BARCODE DATA
Barcode symbols are printed one line at a time. A line may contain one or
many symbols.
To print a line containing a single barcode symbol, enter a sequence of
characters terminated by a carriage return. For example:
1987<CR>
To print a line containing multiple symbols, enter multiple sequences of
valid characters separated by commas, spaces, or horizontal tabs,
depending on the barcode. Terminate each line with a carriage return.
For example:
1985,1986,1987,1988<CR>
If a single symbol is too long to fit on a single line, the printer prints a
pattern of all bars, an invalid symbol. For lines with multiple symbols,
each symbol that fits in its entirety is printed correctly and the remainder
are printed using a pattern of all bars or discarded, as space allows.
Operator's Guide
E-13
QUIET ZONE
Except for PostNet barcodes, there is blank space preceding and
following each barcode symbol called a quiet zone. The width of a quiet
zone is 10 times the width of the narrow bar width, depending on the
barcode. Narrow bars are at least 0.014 in. wide. Therefore, each quiet
zone is at least 0.14 in. wide.
SPACES
Space can be added between barcodes on the same line. Each space
adds 0.10 in. for each space character inserted.
With UPC/EAN and Interleaved 2 of 5, spaces can be added just as you
would between keyboard characters. For example,
012345678905<space>01234567895
Before adding spaces between PostNet and Codabar barcodes, however,
you must use either a horizontal tab (ASCII decimal 9) or a comma (ASCII
decimal 44) to terminate the preceding barcode. For example, to add one
space between two Codabar barcodes, the barcode expression must be
written either as
012345678905,<space>012345678905
or
012345678905<HT><space>012345678905
E-14
Appendix E—Barcodes
POSTNET PLACEMENT ON AN ENVELOPE
Placement of a USPS PostNet Zip + 4 Delivery Point barcode on an
envelope is regulated by the U.S. Postal Service. PostNet barcode
positioning on a standard-size business envelope, shown in the
accompanying illustration, was correct at the time this manual was printed.
The following BASIC program (Epson emulation) prints the PostNet
barcode for “99212-1381” (with delivery point code of 10) in the position
indicated in the illustration.
100
104
108
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzM";CHR$(21);CHR$(0);
LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);
LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);
110
LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT
120
LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT
130
LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT
140
LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT
150
LPRINT:LPRINT:LPRINT
160
LPRINT CHR$(27);"l";CHR$(50);
170
LPRINT "Name"
180
LPRINT "Address"
190
LPRINT "City,State 99212-1381"
200
LPRINT CHR$(27);"l";CHR$(56);
210
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzL1";
220
LPRINT "99212-1381 10"
230
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzLØ";
Note: The printer imposes no limit on the number of barcode digits.
Operator's Guide
PostNet Placement on a
Standard Business Envelope
E-15
AB0-AB
CHECK DIGITS
The check digit is optional for Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, and Codabar; if
desired, the check digit should be supplied as part of the data according
to the specifications of the code you are using. EAN-8 barcodes do not
use check digits. The check digit for UPC-E and PostNet barcodes are
automatically calculated and appended by the printer. For UPC-A and
EAN-13 barcodes, a check digit is required, but it is not automatically
calculated and appended by the printer. The last character is used as the
check digit. See the table below.
E-16
Appendix E—Barcodes
Check Digit
Required
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Codabar
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
PostNet
•
•
Printer
Calculates and
Appends Check
Digit
•
Check Digit
Optional
No Check
Digit
•
•
•
•
•
The check digit prints out along with all other barcode characters in the
human readable line.
NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTERS AND COUNTRY
FLAGS
The first character in UPC barcodes and the first two characters in EAN13 barcodes are for symbol identification. The first digit is called a
number system character. In EAN-13 barcodes, the second character is a
country flag.
The number system character (and the country flag for EAN-13 barcodes)
must be sent to the printer along with the other characters in the code. It
is the first digit of the code.
Operator's Guide
E-17
START CHARACTERS, STOP CHARACTERS, AND
GUARD BARS
You do not need to supply start and stop characters, or guard bars (for
UPC and EAN codes) with the barcode. They are automatically
appended by the printer.
SUMMARY OF REQUIRED BARCODE DATA
The table below summarizes the data the printer must receive for each
barcode symbol. A "•" indicates required data. An asterisk (*) indicates
optional data. A blank space indicates the data are automatically
calculated and appended, or are not applicable for that barcode style.
Barcode
Style
Code 39
Interleaved
2 of 5
(see note)
Codabar
Styles 9-12
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
PostNet
Start
Char.
•
No.
System
Char.
Country
Flag
Char.
•
•
•
No. of
Significant
Char.
Check
Digit
Total
No. of
Char.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
•
10
10
8
10
*
Stop
Char.
•
•
Note: For Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode symbols, if an even number of
characters is not sent, the printer appends a leading zero.
*
12
10
8
13
*
E-18
Appendix E—Barcodes
END BARCODE COMMAND
The End Barcode command terminates the printing of barcode symbols.
The printer returns to printing characters in the font style in place prior to
receipt of the Start Barcode command.
End Barcode command must be in the following form:
ASCII: SOH
Control: CTRL A
Decimal: 1
Hexadecimal: 01
A
A
65
41
z
z
122
7A
L
L
76
4C
Ø
Ø
48
30
Note: The zero in the Stop Barcode command can be entered either as
the character Ø (zero, as shown) or as the decimal value zero.
Operator's Guide
E-19
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
This example shows a BASIC program to format and print three 3/4-in.
high Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode symbols. The human readable line is on,
and default values are used for bar and space widths. Two of the
barcode symbols encode the characters "1988", and the third barcode
symbol encodes the characters "123456789123456789".
REM FORMAT INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BARCODE SYMBOLS
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzM";CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);
LPRINT CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);
REM START BARCODE
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzL1";
REM PRINT TWO BARCODE SYMBOLS ENCODING
REM CHARACTERS "1988"
REM ADVANCE PAPER, THEN PRINT
REM ONE BARCODE SYMBOL ENCODING CHARACTERS
REM "123456789123456789"
LPRINT "1988,1988";CHR$(13);
LPRINT "123456789123456789";CHR$(13);
REM END BARCODE
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzLØ";
JB0-BI
E-20
Appendix E—Barcodes
EXAMPLE 2
This example shows a BASIC program to format and print one 1-in. high
UPC-A barcode symbol. The human readable line is on, and default
values are used for bar and space widths. The barcode symbol encodes
the number system character "0", the characters "1234567890", and the
check digit 5.
REM FORMAT UPC-A BARCODE SYMBOL
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzM";CHR$(13);CHR$(12);CHR$(1);
LPRINT CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);
REM START BARCODE
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzL1";
REM PRINT BARCODE SYMBOL ENCODING CHARACTERS
REM "1234567890"
REM NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER IS 0, CHECK DIGIT IS 5
LPRINT "012345678905";CHR$(13);
REM END BARCODE
LPRINT CHR$(1);"AzLØ";
JB0-BJ1
Operator's Guide
E-21
ALTERNATE COMMANDS
For best results, use the commands explained earlier in this appendix to
format and print barcodes. To provide compatibility with other printers,
the following alternate barcode commands are also supported. They are
valid only when the printer is in Epson emulation mode.
•
ESC [3t Start Barcode command.
Performs the same function as SOH AzL1
•
ESC [4t Start Barcode command.
Performs the same function as SOH AzL2
•
ESC [(P1);...;(P8)} Barcode Format command.
Performs the same function as SOH AzM(P1)...(P8)
•
ESC [Øt End Barcode command.
Performs the same function as SOH AzLØ
Note: The procedure to format and print barcodes using these
commands is the same as explained on the preceding pages.
The Barcode Format command must be in the form:
ESC [(P1);(P2);(P3);(P4);(P5);(P6);(P7);(P8)}
Adjacent semicolons preceding a parameter value indicate that the
preceding parameters are to remain unchanged. For example, to set P4
to a value of "2" without changing other parameters, use:
ESC [;;;(2)}
The (P1) through (P8) bytes are the values of the parameters of the
command. Valid entries for each parameter are shown in the table below:
E-22
Appendix E—Barcodes
Parameter
P1: Barcode Type
(See Note 1)
P2: Barcode Height
P3: Human Readable Line
P4: Narrow Bar Width
P5: Wide Bar Width
P6: Narrow Space Width
P7: Wide Space Width
P8: Intercharacter Gap
(See Note 2)
Note:
*
For n ≠ 0.
Options
0
1
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
21
0
n
0
1
0 or 1
2
n
1
2
0 or 3
4
n
0 or 1
2
n
1
2
0 or 3
4
n
0 or 1
2
n
Setting
Interleaved 2 of 5
PostNet (Graphics Mode)
Code 39 (default)
EAN - 8
EAN - 13
Codabar a/a
Codabar b/b
Codabar c/c
Codabar d/d
UPC - A
UPC - E
PostNet (Text Mode)
3/4 in. (default)
n/12 in. (n = 1 to 120)
Disable
Enable (default)
.014 in. (default)
.027 in.
.014 + .0133 * (n-1) in.*
.014 in.
.027 in.
.040 in. (default)
.054 in.
.014 + .0133 * (n-1) in.*
.014 in. (default)
.027 in.
.014 + .0133 * (n-1) in.*
.014 in.
.027 in.
.040 in. (default)
.054 in.
.014 + .0133 * (n-1) in.*
.014 in. (default)
.027 in.
.014 + .0133 * (n-1) in.*
1. Codabar a/a, b/b, and so forth refer to start and stop characters.
2. Intercharacter gap is adjustable only for Code 39 and Codabar barcode
symbols.
Operator's Guide
E-23
P4 THROUGH P8 INTEGRITY
The tables that follow specify how parameters P4, P5, P6, P7, and P8
must relate to each other if you must make parameter adjustments using
the Barcode Format command.
These tables apply only to Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. Codabar
settings are sufficiently complex to require careful analysis of the Uniform
Symbol Description (USD-4) for Codabar. For UPC and EAN bar codes,
we recommend the parameters be used without adjustment. Adjusting
the symbols is likely to make them unreadable.
Parameter Formula
P5 > 2 ! P4 and
P5 " 3 ! P4
Principle
Wide bar is 2 to 3 times wider than narrow bar.
P6 = P4
Narrow space width equals narrow bar width.
P7 = P5
Wide space width equals wide bar width.
P8 # P4 and
P8 " (9 ! P4) + 3
Intercharacter gap is 1 to 9 times as wide as
narrow bar width.
Parameter
P4 Narrow Bar
P5 Wide Bar
P6 Narrow Space
P7 Wide Space†
P8 Intercharacter Gap
†
See formula above.
Valid Comparative Settings
3
2
1
0
7-9
5,6
0,3
0,3
3
2
0,1
0,1
7-9
5,6
0,3
0,3
3-27
2-18
0-9
0-9
4
9-12
4
9-12
4-36
5
11-15
5
11-15
5-45
Glossary
ASCENDERS. That part of a character that rises above the waist line. Also,
a term used for superscript characters.
ASCII CHARACTERS.
ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for
Information Interchange. ASCII characters are unique, 7-bit values that
represent letters, numbers, spaces, and symbols. This coding scheme
allows for standardization of data and control communication between
devices.
BASELINE.
The imaginary horizontal line on which a character or line of
characters rests.
The speed at which data flows between the printer and computer,
measured in bits of information transmitted per second.
BAUD.
BIT.
Bit is an acronym for binary digit, one of the two digits (0 and 1) used
in binary notation. Usually, eight bits are used to make up one character,
or data byte.
BUFFER.
Two buffers are used. A print buffer consisting of temporary
memory in which the printer holds incoming print jobs, and a dedicated
line buffer which holds the next line of characters or graphics to be
printed.
CHARACTER DOWNLOADING.
Process of defining bit-image data used to
print a character, and assigning it to a data byte value between 0 and 255.
Download characters are stored in RAM (temporary memory).
G-2
Glossary
CHARACTER LIBRARY.
A defined group of printable characters stored in the
printer.
CHARACTER MAP.
An assignment of printable characters to some data byte
values between 0 and 255.
CHARACTER NUMBER MAP.
Each character in a character library is
numbered. The character number map specifies which characters are
currently selected for each data byte value between 0 and 255.
CHARACTER OPTIONS. Used to select the appearance of printed characters;
selected using the configuration menu, accessed from the printer switch
panel, or by sending control commands from the computer.
CHARACTER SET.
A complete assignment of control codes and printable
character codes for all byte values between 0 and 255. Typically, the
character set is built from a character map and a control code map.
CHARACTER SOURCE MAP.
Describes the location of the character library
(ROM or RAM) currently selected for each data byte value between 0 and
255.
CODE PAGE.
A predefined IBM character map.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS.
The combination of settings for baud, parity,
handshaking, data bits, and stop bits that specify the way data are
transmitted between devices, enabling accurate data transmission. Set
communication parameters in the configuration menu.
CONTROL CODE.
A single byte of information that starts, stops, or modifies
printer action.
CONTROL CODE MAP.
A fixed assignment of control codes to some of the
data byte values between 0 and 255.
CONTROL COMMAND.
Two or more bytes of control information that cause
the printer to perform specific functions.
Operator's Guide
G-3
DATA BITS.
Defines the number of data bits in each byte transmitted. A
setting of 7 data bits is used to send ASCII characters 0 through 127. A
setting of 8 data bits is required for sending graphics data and data byte
values between characters 128 through 255.
DATA BYTE.
A string of 7 or 8 bits that represents one character.
DATA BYTE ACTION MAP.
Describes whether a data byte value between 0
and 255 is currently defined as a control code or a printable character.
DATA BYTE MAP.
A group of five maps in printer memory that describe the
action the printer is currently set to perform when it receives a data byte.
A complete data byte map consists of the data byte action map, the
control code map, the character source map, the character library map,
and the character number map.
DECENDERS.
That part of a character that falls below the character's
baseline. Also, a term used to describe a subscript character.
DECIMAL.
The numbering system that uses the numerals 0 to 9.
DEFAULT.
A value or setting that is used if no alternate setting is specified.
Default settings are in effect when the printer is turned on or reset.
DOWNLOAD.
To send data from the computer to the printer.
DTR. Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is a hardware handshaking protocol in
which a receiving device controls data flow by changing the voltage level
on a signal wire.
A specific type of
ROM. The printer uses a 128K x 8 bit EPROM for storing the software
that has been electronically programmed into this ROM device. A
programmed EPROM is sometimes referred to as "firmware."
ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EPROM).
G-4
Glossary
FACTORY DEFAULT.
FORM.
A default assigned at the factory.
The area of paper defined between top of form positions.
FORM FEED.
A control key on the printer switch panel and a control code
used to advance the paper to the top of the next form.
FORMS OPTIONS.
Used to select the appearance of the printed form.
Accessed from the printer switch panel or by sending control commands
from the computer.
HANDSHAKING. The exchange of signals or characters between connected
devices to control data flow and prevent data loss. See DTR and
X-ON/X-OFF.
HEXADECIMAL. A numbering system that uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the
letters A to F, so that each digit can represent sixteen different values.
INTERFACE. The physical
See PARALLEL INTERFACE
and logical connection between two devices.
and SERIAL INTERFACE.
LANGUAGE CHARACTER MAP.
Same as NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP.
LINE FEED. A control key on the printer switch panel and a control code
used to advance the paper one line.
MAPPING.
Process of assigning characters and control codes to data byte
values.
NATIONAL-USE CHARACTER MAP.
Character maps specific to different
countries can be selected using the configuration menu.
A method of printing used to increase the
quality of printed characters. This option is set using the configuration
menu, accessed from the printer switch panel, or with a control command.
NEAR LETTER QUALITY (NLQ).
ON LINE. When the printer is on line, it is able to print data. The printer is
placed on line or off line by pressing the ON LINE key located on the
printer switch panel.
Operator's Guide
PAGE.
G-5
The area of paper defined between horizontal perforations.
PARALLEL INTERFACE. Physical and logical connection between devices
where data are transmitted an entire character at a time.
PARITY.
The value of the parity bit in each character transmitted. Parity
checking ensures accurate data transmission.
PITCH. A measure of the number of characters printed per horizontal inch
of paper. Pitch can be set using the configuration menu or with control
commands. (Also, in the DEC LA210 emulation, "vertical pitch" is a term
that refers to the number of lines per in.)
PLATEN.
The hard surface behind the paper that allows the printhead pins
and ribbon to cause an impression on the paper.
PRINTABLE CHARACTER.
A printable dot pattern: letters, numbers,
punctuation marks, graphic shapes, and all other symbols that can be
printed as a unit within a single cell.
PRINTER EMULATION.
When a printer is set to respond to the commands of
another brand of printer, it is said to emulate that printer. The printer can
be set to emulate the Epson FX-100, IBM Proprinter XL, or DEC LA210.
PRINTHEAD. One of three devices, each containing nine vertically aligned
pins, that cause strike-on impressions on the paper.
PRINTHEAD GAP.
PROTOCOL.
The distance between the printheads and the platen.
Same as HANDSHAKING.
This is the printer's memory which stores
downloaded character and control data, and incoming print jobs. The
printer contains a 32K x 8 bit volatile RAM. Volatile RAM loses its
character and control data when printer power is turned off. [The
microprocessor contains nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) to retain configuration
default settings during periods when the printer is off.]
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM).
G-6
Glossary
READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM). The printer's permanent memory. For the
4100 printer, ROM is the same as ELECTRONICALLY PROGRAMMABLE READ
ONLY MEMORY.
SERIAL INTERFACE.
Physical and logical connection between devices
where data are transmitted one bit at a time.
STOP BITS.
The number of bits that define the end of (or space between)
each serial interface byte.
SUBSCRIPT.
Used to print characters slightly lower on a line than the
baseline text around them. This option is set using the configuration
menu or with a control command. Subscript characters are sometimes
referred to as descenders.
SUPERSCRIPT.
Used to print characters slightly higher on a line than the
baseline text around them. This option is set using the configuration
menu or with a control command. Superscript characters are sometimes
referred to as ascenders.
WAIST LINE.
The imaginary horizontal line that is the height of the top of a
lower case “x” that divides tall and upper case characters. For example,
"h," "d," "A," and the like have ascender attributes because part of these
characters rise above the waist line, whereas "a," "c," "p," and the like do
not.
X-ON/X-OFF. A software handshaking protocol in which a receiving device
controls data flow using the content of data itself. X-OFF and X-ON are
control characters which signal the sending device to stop or resume data
transmission.
Index
Active character set
printing, 37
Alignment
image, 94
ASCII, D-2
character set, D-2
Auto Carriage Return, 79
Barcodes, E-1
alternate commands, E-23
data, E-10, E-12
density, 91
end command, E-20
examples, E-21
format command, E-4
formulas, E-25
options, 91
parameters, E-5
printing, E-2
start command, E-9
strike, 91
summary, E-19
Baud, 68
Beeper, 17
Beeps, 17, 119
Bold print, 74
Buffer size, 70
Cables
connecting interface, 16
parallel interface, C-3
serial interface, B-9
Character
download overlay, 90
library, 62, D-5, D-9, D-10,
D-21
Character maps
DEC, 89
Epson, 84
IBM, 86
Character maps, DEC
Hebrew, D-36
multilingual, D-35
national-use, D-34, D-40
VT100 line draw, D-37
Character maps, Epson
Hebrew, D-21
language, D-18, D-40
U.S., D-18
Character maps, IBM,
code page 437 (Hebrew),
D-25
code page 437 (U.S.), D-23
code page 850
(multilingual),
D-28
code page 860 (Portugal),
D-31
Character maps, overlay
Epson ESC 6, D-48
Epson ESC I, D-46
menu selection, 90
OCR A, D-38
OCR B, D-39
Character options, 81
Character sets, 47, D-1, D-42
ASCII, standard, D-6
Epson, 83
Epson enhanced, D-42
Epson standard code
page, D-50
factory default printouts
DEC, 44
Epson, 40
IBM, 42
IBM #2 multilingual, D-44
IBM all character, D-43,
D-55
main character library, D-5,
D 9, D-10
DEC character sets, 89
Epson character sets,
83
IBM character sets, 86
printing, 37
process of creating, 8
terminology, D-4
Characteristics, A-2
barcodes, A-9
character sets, A-6
copies, A-4
emulations, A-6
graphics, A-10
human-readable fonts, A-8
memory configuration, A-11
paper feed, A-4
parallel interface, A-11
printing mechanism, A-2
ribbon, A-6
serial interface, A-10
throughput, A-2
Characters/Inch, 75
Cleaning, 97
exterior surfaces, 98
interior surfaces, 97
Code Page
Epson standard, D-50
IBM Hebrew (437), D-25
IBM multilingual (850), D-28
IBM Portugal (860), D-31
IBM U.S. (437), D-23
Combination keys, 10
on-line hot keys, 12
power-up hot keys, 10
Communication, problems, 129
Configuration, 49
entering, 51
hot keys, 11, 12
leaving, 53
map, 56
menu, 51
navigating, 52
Control code maps, DEC
menu selection, 88
Control code maps, DEC,
7 Bit DEC, D-14
8 Bit DEC, D-15
Control code maps, Epson
menu selection, 84
Control code maps, Epson,
Epson, D-12
IBM #1, D-13
IBM #2, D-13
Control code maps, IBM
menu selection, 86
Control code maps, IBM,
IBM #1, D-13
I-2
Index
IBM #2, D-13
Controls, 6
CR on LF, 79
Data bits, 68
Data byte map, 61
DCE interface, B-1
DEC
character options, 88
DEC LA210 emulation, index,
272
Decimal-to-hexadecimal
conversion, 45
Default
factory default reset, 92
factory settings, 56
Density, barcode, 91
Double strike, barcode, 91
Download, overlay, 90
Draft quality mode, 32
DTE interface, B-1
DTR, B-5
Emulation, 33, 81
changing, 34
DEC LA210, 271
Environmental requriements,
A-13
Epson character sets, 82, 83
Epson FX-100 emulation, index
for, 190
ETX/ACK, 65
Factory settings
resetting to, 92
Form feed
control key, 10
Form length, 77
Forms compressor
changing, 104
Forms options, 76
Fuses
changing, 107
Handshaking
parallel interface, C-2
serial interface, 65, B-15
Hex dump, 132
power-up hot key, 10
Hex-to-decimal conversion, 45
IBM
character options, 85
Image alignment, 110
Indexes, control codes and
commands
universal, 150
DEC, 272
IBM, 236
Epson, 190
Indicators, 6
Initialize sensitivity, 93
Input buffer size, 70
Input sensitivity, 93
Interface
connectors, 16
menu selection, 63
parallel interface, C-1
serial, B-1
serial options, 64
Italics, 74
Labels
feeding, 23
requirements, A-19
LF on CR, 78
Line feed
auto linefeed, 79
control key, 9
Lines/Inch, 77
Loading paper, 21
Lock character set and
emulation, 92
Lubrication, 98
Maintenance, 95
changing forms
compressor,
104
changing fuses, 107
changing ribbon, 99
cleaning, 97
lubrication, 98
static electricity, 96
vertical image alignment,
110
Menu, configuration, 51
map of, 56
Messages, printed, 120
Microline down, 13
Microline up, 13
Move paper, 9, 10, 13
National-use character maps
DEC, D-34, D-41
Epson, D-18, D-40
IBM, D-23, D-25, D-31
Near letter quality (NLQ), 32
indicator, 8
menu, 72, 73
on-line hot key, 14
NONVOLATILE RAM
CHECKSUM, 121
On line
control key, 8
indicator, 8
On line hot keys, 12
Paper
box trim, 126
feeding, 23
installing, 21
moving, 9, 10, 13
specifications, 23, A-14
Paper gap
adjusting, 27
Paper jam detect, 80
Paper out
indicator, 7, 124
Paper slew rate, 80
Paper speed, 80
Parallel interface, C-1
basics, C-1
handshaking, C-2
pin-outs for printer, C-4
synchronization, C-2
timing, C-7
Parity, 69
Physical features, 1
Physical specifications, A-12
Platen, 100
Operator's Guide
PostNet, 16
Power
cord connection, 15
indicator, 8
on/off switch, 6
receptacle, 15
requirements, A-13
switch, 6
voltage selection, 15, 107
Power-up hot keys, 10
Print drivers, 33
Print position
problems, 123
Print quality, 5, 32
problems, 122
Print style, 72
Printhead carriage, 3
Printhead gap
adjusting, 27
Printhead lever, 3, 28, 100
adjusting, 27
Printing, 4
character set, 37, 59
data byte map, 61
menu, 58
non-defaults, 58
options, 59
status, 58
Printing mechanism
characteristics, A-2
protocol, 65
Reliability, A-12
Requirements, A-13
environmental, A-13
interface, A-13
labels, A-19
paper, A-14
Reset to factory defaults, 92
Ribbon cartridge, 3
changing, 99
specifications, A-6
Ribbon feed wheel, 99
Ribbon guide, 99
attaching, 103
Robust, 67
ROM ERROR, 120
RS-232-C, B-1
pin assignments for, B-3
Safety features, A-11
Self test, 29
power-up hot key, 10, 29
Sensitivity, 93
Serial interface
basics, B-1
connecting cable, B-16
connection examples, B-12
connector, B-16
hardware handshaking, B17
making a cable, B-9
menu selection, 63
pin-outs for printer, B-7
software handshaking, B-15
troubleshooting, 129, B-18
Serial options, 64
Service, vi
Single strike, barcode, 91
Skip perforation, 78
Slash zero, 76
Specification, 23
Specifications, A-2
characteristics, A-2
physical, A-12
reliability, A-12
requirements, A-13
safety features, A-11
Startup, 4
Static electricity, 96
Status printout, 58
Stop bits, 70
Subscript/Superscript, 75
Supplies, vi
I-3
Switch panel, 7
problems, 127
Top of form, 4
control key, 9
setting, 30
Tractor, 3
adjusting, 22, 26
Troubleshooting, 115
chart, 119
beeps, 119
communications, 129
messages, 120
paper problems, 126
print positioning, 123
print quality, 122
printhead performance,
130
switch panel, 127
hex dump mode, 132
test, 131
Universal control commands,
index of, 150
Vertical image alignment, 110
Voltage selection, 107
Wiring diagrams, serial
interface, B-10
XON/XOFF, 65, B-15
Download PDF

advertising